r 


-NRLF 


REESE    LIBRARY 
UNIVERSITY    OF   CALIFORNIA. 

Received *,^/aPCU^         i8S^ 

Accessions  No.  :2<^^yi/!L     Shelf  No.  . 


/ 


V 


A 

MANUAL 

OF  THE  SmA 


CHALDEE   LANGUAGE; 


CONTAINING  A 

CHALDEE  GRAMMAR, 

CHIEFLY  FROM  THE  GERMAN  OF  PROFESSOR  G.  B.  WINER; 


CHRESTOMATHY, 

CONSISTING  OF  SELECTIONS  FROM  THE   TARGUMS,    AND  INCLUDING  THE  WHOLE 
OF  THE    BIBLICAL  CHALDEE,  WITH  NOTES  ;    AND 


VOCABULARY, 

ADAPTED  TO  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 


Mvn-H    AN 

'^^^APPEJVDIX 

ON  IJtHhTMJliri"  ■  f    CHARACTER  AND  STYLE. 


BY  ELIAS  RIGGS,  A.  M. 


BOSTON: 

PUBLISHED    BY    PERKINS    AND    MARVIN, 
PHILADELPHIA — FRENCH  AND  PERKINS. 

Codman  Press,  Andover, 
1832. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1832,  by 

Perkins  &  Marvirt, 
in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachusetts. 


^L^ep^c^ 


KLAGG  AND  GOULD.  ...PRINTERS. 


PREFACE  BY  PROFESSOR  STUART. 


My  young  friend,  who  now  ventures  to  make  his  appearance  before 
the  world  in  the  following  sheets,  feeling  a  diffidence  which  is  natural 
to  youth  and  modest  adventurers  in  a  literary  enterprise,  prefers  an  in- 
troduction of  his  undertaking  and  object  to  the  public  by  me,  rather 
than  to  make  one  for  himself  With  great  readiness  I  yield  to  his  wish- 
es, because  I  have  it  much  at  heart,  to  commend  the  good  work  in 
which  he  has  been  engaged. 

The  study  of  the  Chaldee  language  is  worthy  of  commendation,  on 
various  grounds. 

(1)  A  knowledge  of  it  is  highly  important,  in  aiding  the  student 
more  fully  to  understand  the  Hebrew.  The  basis  of  Hebrew,  Chaldee, 
Syriac,  Arabic,  and  Samaritan,  is  well  known  by  every  good  oriental 
scholar,  to  be  one  and  the  same.  Hence  it  may  be  truly  said,  that  he, 
who  has  a  solid  and  fundamental  knowledge  of  the  genius  of  one  of 
these  languages,  possesses  a  real  knowledge  of  them  all.  The  mean- 
ing is,  that  the  genius,  structure,  idiom,  peculiarities  of  syntax,  and  a 
multitude  of  the  words,  are  substantially  the  same  in  all ;  so  that  he, 
who  has  acquired  a  radical  acquaintance  with  any  one  of  them,  is  pre- 
pared to  make  very  rapid  and  easy  progress  in  them  all.  The  student 
who  understands  the  Hebrew,  has  only  to  read  through  the  pages  of  the 
Grammar  in  the  following  sheets,  in  order  to  be  fully  satisfied  of  the 
correctness  of  this  statement.  And  if  correct,  then  is  it  obvious,  that 
in  every  step  of  his  progress  in  the  study  of  the  Chaldee,  he  is  gaining 
additional  light  and  satisfaction  and  confirmation,  in  regard  to  the 
meaning,  forms,  and  structure  of  the  Hebrew.  Who  will  say  that  the 
study  of  Greek,  Latin,  French  (specially  the  Norman),  and  Saxon,  does 
not  cast  light  upon  the  English  language?  Indeed,  how  can  it  ever  be 
radically  understood,  without  some  knowledge  of  these  languages?  But 
the  Chaldee  is  much  nearer  to  the  Hebrew,  than  any  of  these  languages 
to  the  English. 

(2)  The  most  important  ancient  helps  extant,  for  illustrating  the 
meaning  of  Hebrew  words,  are  in  the  Chaldee  language.     The  two 


IV  PREFACE. 

TarfTums  of  Onkclos  and  Jonathan,  (which  extend  over  the  most  con- 
siderable portion  of  the  Old  Testament),  are  more  to  be  depended  on 
in  difficult  cases,  than  any  other  aid  to  which  we  can  resort,  in  all  the 
store-houses  of  antiquity.  In  all  probability  they  are  older  than  the 
Christian  era,  (excepting  a  few  later  adscititious  passages  that  have 
been  mingled  with  them);  and  inasmuch  as  they  are  substantially  of 
the  same  idiom  with  the  Hebrew,  so  they  often  give  us  the  exact  shape, 
as  well  as  meaning  of  the  Hebrew,  better  than  any  or  all  other  ancient 
versions.  Let  the  attentive  student  note  the  use  which  Rosenmueller 
has,  with  so  manifest  advantage  to  his  commentaries,  often  made  of  the 
Targums.  We  may  reasonably  have  a  confidence  in  such  ancient 
Chaldee  translators,  that  they,  at  least  for  the  most  part,  rightly  under- 
stood their  original. 

(3)  Several  chapters  in  Ezra  and  Daniel,  as  exhibited  in  our  He- 
brew Bibles,  are  in  the  Chaldee  language.  The  student,  then,  who  de- 
signs to  acquire  the  power  of  consulting  all  the  original  Scriptures, 
must  make  himself  acquainted  with  the  Chaldee  language. 

(4)  Whoever  designs  to  pursue  Talmudic  and  Rabbinic  literature, 
or  to  be  able  to  judge  of  quotations  from  the  Talmud  or  the  Rabbins, 
must  have  some  acquaintance  with  the  Chaldee.  The  Gemara  of  the 
Talmud,  is  Chaldaic  in  its  idiom;  and  so  are  nearly  all  of  the  older 
Rabbinical  writings.  All  the  works  of  this  class  are,  indeed,  of  a  cor- 
rupt dialect  and  mixed  nature  ;  but  they  all  Chaldaize. 

(5)  The  Chaldee  is  a  very  easy  conquest  to  the  well-grounded  He- 
brew student.  A  few  weeks  devoted  to  it  will  enable  him  to  read  it 
with  as  much  facility  as  he  does  the  Hebrew.  Buxtorf's  Lexicon  Chald. 
Talmud.  Rabhinicum,  is  a  complete  store-house  of  these  dialects,  and 
is  a  book  which  may  be  procured  for  a  trifle.  It  is  an  "  opus  triginta 
annorum ;"  and  truly  a  paragon  in  this  species  of  lexicography.  Eve- 
ry biblical  student  should  possess  it.  A  Polyglott  Bible  will  present  the 
student  with  all  the  Targums ;  and  Buxtorf  s  Biblia  Rabhinica,  will  not 
only  give  these,  but  all  the  distinguished  Rabbinic  commentaries,  such 
as  those  of  Kimchi,  Jarchi,  Aben  Ezra,  etc. 

The  present  volume  renders  Chaldee  accessible  to  our  American 
students.  Hitherto  the  means  have  not  been  in  their  power,  and  could 
not  be  without  much  expense  and  trouble.  The  price  of  such  works 
as  the  present  must  be  enhanced  among  us,  because  the  cost  of  pub- 
lishing is  so  great,  and  the  sale  so  limited  and  slow.  The  student,  who 
takes  all  those  things  into  consideration,  will  not  complain  of  the  price 
of  the  present  work. 

I  should  not  do  justice  to  my  feelings,  if  I  should  omit  to  say  a  word 
in  this  connection,  respecting  the  publishers  of  this  little  volume.     They 


PREFACE. 


have  engaged  in  the  present  undertaking,  without  any  expectation  of 
pecuniary  remuneration  for  their  labours.  My  meaning  is,  that  neither 
myself  nor  they,  have  thought  it  probable,  that  such  a  volume  as  the 
present  could  find  purchasers  sufficiently  numerous,  in  our  country,  to 
yield  any  profit  to  the  publishers.  And  on  the  same  ground,  the  author 
of  the  volume  has  voluntarily  relinquished  a  part  of  the  reward  which 
his  labours  might  justly  claim  in  other  circumstances.  The  thanks  of 
all  who  are  engaged  in  the  promotion  of  oriental  study  in  our  country, 
are  justly  due,  for  the  generous  adventure  in  which  both  author  and 
publishers  engage,  in  sending  out  this  little  volume  into  the  world. 

Nearly  all  the  sheets  of  the  present  volume  have  passed  under  my 
eye  before  they  were  struck  off.  My  engagements  have  been  so  ur- 
gent during  the  printing  of  them,  that  I  have  not  been  always  able  to 
give  that  minute  attention  to  them  which  I  wished  ;  but  I  have  no  hes- 
itation in  saying,  that  the  student  will  not  find  many  errors  in  the  print- 
ing which  will  give  him  any  serious  annoyance. 

As  to  the  work  itself,  the  plan  and  the  execution  are  throughout 
such  as  I  can  commend.  The  grammar  is  brief;  but  quite  copi- 
ous enough  for  the  student  who  is  well  versed  in  Hebrew.  In  the  text, 
notes,  and  lexicon  of  the  Chrestomathy,  will  be  found  all  that  is  needful 
in  an  introduction  to  the  Chaldee  language.  With  Buxtorf's  Lexicon 
and  the  Targums,  one  can  easily  make  his  own  way,  after  reading  this 
Chrestomathy. 

To  all  lovers  of  oriental  study,  I  commend  the  work,  and  my  young 
friend  who  has  executed  it.  I  hope  and  trust,  that  this  is  only  the  first 
fruits  of  a  golden  harvest  which  he  may  yet  produce,  to  enrich  the  treas- 
uries of  sacred  Literature. 


MOSES  STUART. 


Theol.  Seminary ;  Andover, 
Sept.  1832. 


ADVERTISEMEIVT. 


In  the  tables  of  pronouns  and  numerals,  and  generally  in  the  gram- 
mar, unusual  forms  are  included  in  parentheses. 

In  references  to  the  Scriptures,  where  the  name  of  the  Targum  is 
not  given,  that  of  Onkelos  is  to  be  understood,  when  the  passages  cited 
are  from  the  Pentateuch,  and  that  of  Jonathan,  when  they  are  taken 
from  the  prophets. 

Distinct  meanings  of  words  are  separated,  in  ttie  vocabulary,  by 
semicolons.  Where  two  or  more  words  are  employed  to  express  or  illus- 
trate the  same  definition,  they  are  separated  by  commas. 

I  ought  not  to  omit  this  opportunity  of  expressing  ray  sincere  grati- 
tude to  those  gentlemen  who  have  in  various  ways  rendered  me  assist- 
ance in  the  execution  of  this  work  ;  especially  to  the  Rev.  Prof  Stuart, 
to  whose  revision  nearly  all  the  sheets  have  been  submitted  before  go- 
ing to  the  press,  and  who  has  kindly  prepared  the  above  preface. 


£.  RIGGS. 


Tlieol.  Sem. ;  Andover,  | 
Sept.  183a      j 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

I.VTKOD0CTION.       ChALDEE  LANGUAGE   AND  LITERATURE               ...  9 

GRAMMAR. 

PART  L — Orthography  and  Orthoepy. 

Consonants 17 

Vowels 17 

Dagesh 19 

Mappiq 20 

Accents 20 

Tone-syllable 20 

Of  reading  unpointed  text 21 

PART  II.— Etymology. 

Deriration  and  inflection  of  words  generally 22 

Mutations  of  consonants 23 

Vowel  changes 25 

PRONOUN'S  ;  personal  and  possessive 27 

Suffix  pronouns .28 

Deraouitrative  pronouns 30 

Relative  and  interrogative 30 

VERBS ;  derivation  and  inflection 31 

Conjugations 31 

Moods  and  tenses 33 

Inflection  of  the  Regular  Verb 33 

Notes  on  the  Par.  of  the  Regular  Verb 35 

Personal  inflection  of  the  participles 37 

Unfrequent  Conjugations 38 

auadriliteral  Verbs 38 

Verbs  with  Gutturals 38 

Regular  Verbs  with  Suffix-pronouns 39 

IRREGUL.^R  VERBS 41 

Verbs  Pe  Nun 41 

Avin  doubled 42 

PbYodh 43 

Pe  Aleph 44 

Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh 45 

Lamedh  Aleph        .                46 

doubly  anomalous 48 

defective,  and  mixed  forms 49 

irregular,  with  suffix  pronouns 50 

NOUNS  ;  derivation 52 

gender  and  number 52 

states;  emphatic -54 

Declension 55 

Dec.  T.  II 56 

Dec.  Ill 57 

Dec.  IV.  V .58 

Dec.  VI.  Vn.  VIII 59 

Dec.  IX 60 

Irresular  nouns ;         .        .  61 

ADJECTIVES •        ....  61 

Numerals      .................  61 

P.VRTICLES;  adverbs :  62 

Propositio.i.j ;  63 

Conjunctions 64 

Interjections 64 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 


PART  III.— Syntax. 

PRONOUNS;  personal 65 

Used  instead  of  the  subst.  verb ; 65 

Pronouns;  relative 66 

interrogativQ 66 

reflexive,  how  designated .  66 

indelinito 66 

demonstrative 66 

VERBS  ;  use  of  the  tenses 66 

Peculiar  modo  of  designating  certain  tenses      .        .        i 67 

Use  of  the  Imperative • 67 

' Infinitive 68 

Participles 68. 

Optative  mood 69 

Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  subject 69 

Impersonal  verbs  ;  how  designated 69 

Regimen  of  verbs 70 

Verbs  used  for  adverbs 70 

Constructio  pvaegnans 70 

Ellipsis 70 

NOUNS;  designation  of  cases 71 

Use  of  the  cases 72 

plural 72 

Repetition  of  nouns 72 

ADJECTIVES 73 

comparison  of 73 

NUMERALS ; 73 

PARTICLES  ;  adverbs 74 

Negatives 75 

Interrogat.'ve  particles 75 

PARADIGMS  of  verbs,  nouns,  &c 76 


CHRESTOMATHY. 
PART  I. — Select  sentences  from  the  Targum  of  Onkejlos  .        .   91 

PART  II. — Extracts  from  the  Targums. 

L  History  of  the  fall,  Gen.  3.  Onkelos 93 

II.  The  same.  Gen.  3.  Pseudo-Jonathan 95 

III.  The  same,  Gen.  3.  Jerusalem  Targum 98 

IV.  Story  of  a  dispute  between  Cain  and  Abel,  Gen.  4:8.  Jerusalem  Targum         .        .        .99 

V.  Marriage  of  Samson,  Judg.  14.  Jonathan .100 

VI.  Prediction  of  Messiah's  kingdom,  Ps.  2.  author  of  the  Targum  uncertain         .        .        .102 
VIL  The  praises  of  Jehovah,  Ps.  8.  102 

VIII.  Parable  of  the  vineyard,  Isa.  5:  1 — 7.  Jonathan 103 

IX.  Extract  from  Isaiah's  prediction  of  the  Messiah,  Isa.  52:  13—53:  2.  Jonathan         .        .  104 

X.  Aphorisms  of  Solomon,  Prov.  10:  1 — 12.  Targumist  unknown 104 

PART  III.— The  Biblical  Chaldee. 

I.  Jeremiah  10:  11 106 

II.  Daniel  2:  4—7:  26 106 

III.  Ezra  4:  8—6:  18    : 123 

IV.  Ezra  7: 12— 23 127 

NOTES  on  Part  I i       .....  199 

on  Part  IL        .        .       ; 135 

on  Part  III 144 


VOCABULARY 151 

APPENDIX  A.  Rabbinical  Character  and  Style 175 

APPENDIX  B.  On  the  Syriac  Language  now  spoken  in  the  East 179 


INTRODUCTION. 

CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


The  Aramean,  one  of  the  three  grand  divisions*  of  the 
Shemitish  or  Oriental  languages,  comprises  two  principal 
subdivisions  ;  viz.  the  Syriac,  sometimes  called,  bj  way  of 
distinction.  West  Aramean,  and  the  Chaldee,  or  East  Ara- 
mean. The  appropriate  region  of  the  latter  was  the 
province  of  Babylonia,  between  the  Euphrates  and  Ti- 
gris, the  original  inhabitants  of  which,  (related  in  respect 
of  their  origin  to  the  Hebrews  and  Syrians,  and  who 
should  not  be  confounded  with  the  Chaldeans,  a  tribe 
which  occupied  that  region  much  later,)  cultivated  this 
language  as  a  distinct  dialect,  and  communicated  it  to  the 
Jews  during  the  Babylonian  exile. 

The  Chaldeans  [Xaldaloi,  fi'''7t53]  originated,  as  is  evident  from  a 
comparison  of  the  statements  of  Greek  authors,  (particularly  Xeno- 
phon,)  with  those  of  the  Bible,  in  the  mountains  of  Armenia.  Partly 
overcome  by  the  Assyrians,  they  removed  to  the  plains  of  Mesopota- 
mia, and  especially  of  Babylonia,  in  the  seventh  century  B.  C.  They 
afterwards  not  only  gained  their  own  independence,  but  rose  to  univer- 
sal dominion  on  the  ruins  of  the  great  Assyrian  Monarchy.  The 
name  Babylonians  (Ezra  4:  9)  we  apply,  on  the  other  hand,  to  the  ori- 
ginal inhabitants  of  Babylonia,  who  were  of  a  Shemitish  (Aramean) 
stock.  To  them  belonged  the  language  of  which  we  are  treating  ;  and 
it  may  therefore  not  inappropriately  be  termed  Babylonish.  For,  that 
the  Chaldeans  did  not  speak  the  same  language  as  the  descendants  of 

*  Aramean,  Hebrew  and  Arabic. 

2 


10  CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 

Abraham  who  settled  in  Palestine  did,  nor  even  a  kindred  dialect,  is 
clear  from  the  Chaldaic  names  of  gods,  kings,  and  offices,  which  appear 
in  the  Old  Testament  after  the  time  of  Nebuchadnezzar,  and  which 
are  connected  with  the  Medo-Persian  language,  (see  Gesenius'  Ge- 
schichte  der  Hebr.  Sprach.  p.  62  seq.),  but  which  admit  no  adequate 
explanation  from  the  Shemitish. 

The  appellation  Aramean  (language)  is  derived  from  2  Kings  18: 
26.  Isa.  36:  11.  Ez.  4:  7,  and  Daniel  2:  4.  In  the  first  two  passages 
the  name  n"';^"^i<  is  applied  to  the  dialect  through  which  the  Assyrian 
and  Chaldean  officers  made  themselves  understood  in  conversation  with 
Hebrews  [Jews]  ;  i.  e.  the  universal  language  of  the  inhabitants  of  the 
Assyrian  [Chaldean]  kingdom  on  this  side  the  Tigris.  See  Gesenius 
Com.  zu  Jes.  .Vol.  I.  p.  956  seq.  In  the  last  case,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
Chaldean  magians  address  Nebuchadnezzar  in  Aramean ;  which  is 
indeed  remarkable.  It  is  manifest  however  that  the  same  dialect  is 
meant  from  the  sequel,  in  which  the  speech  of  the  magians  is  inserted 
in  the  Chaldee  dialect,  now  so  called.  In  the  Greek  and  Latin  lan- 
guages the  term  Aramean  is  not  wholly  wanting,  (comp.  Strabo  I.  p. 
212.  Ed.  Siebenkees),  although  Syriac  is  very  extensively  used  in 
respect  to  Syria,  Mesopotamia  and  Babylonia,  and  specially  of  the 
Zan^Mo^es  of  these  countries.  Comp.  Xen.  Cyrop.  7,  5,  31.  Jerome 
on  Dan.  2:  4.  Strabo  II.  p.  58. — On  the  name  applied  to  the  Chaldee 
by  the  Talmudists,  see  Lightfoot  Hor.  Heb.  on  John  4:  2.  and  below 
No.  2. 

Chaldaic,  [C'^'^ips 'ji\rr]  in  the  Old  Testament,  signifies  the  lan- 
guage of  the  inhabitants  of  Chaldea  proper,  which,  according  to  Dan. 
1:  4,  was  the  court  language  under  Nebuchadnezzar.  On  the  other 
hand,  Philo  uses  Xuldu'i'oil  of  the  Babylonian  also,  and  even  of  the  an- 
cient Hebreiv. 

To  what  extent  the  Babyloneo-Aramean  was  cultivated  as  a  sepa- 
rate dialect,  and  whether  it  ever  became  the  language  of  books,  histo- 
ry does  not  inform  us.  That  it  continued  in  Babylonia,  in  connexion 
with  the  proper  Chaldee,  as  the  language  of  ordinary  intercourse,  is 
evident,  partly  from  the  above-quoted  Scripture  passages  and  from  sev- 
eral passages  in  Xenophon's  Cyropaedia,  but  especially  from  the  well 
known  circumstance,  that  the  exiled  Jews  found  the  Babylonish,  as  a 
living  language,  in  the  provinces  to  which  they  were  carried.  It  a]> 
pears  also,  from  the  remains  of  the  Pehlvi  dialect,  that  the  Babylonish 
produced  a  very  great  influence  upon  the  ancient  language  of  the  Chal- 
deans, (i.  e.  the  Median.)     See  Gesenius  Com.  iiber  Jes.  Vol.  I.  p.  947. 

2.   Bj  means  of  the  Jews  \\\e  Chaldee  was  transplant- 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE.  1  1 

ed  into  Palestine,  where  it  became  the  vernacular  tongue, 
and  was  employed  by  them,  as  it  had  been  in  Babylonia, 
as  the  language  of  books.  Though  the  Aramean  as  spo- 
ken by  Jews  partook  somewhat  of  the  Hebrew  charac- 
ter, no  entire  or  very  important  corruption  of  it  took 
place;  and  to  this  circumstance  alone  the  Babylonians  are 
indebted,  for  the  survival,  or  at  least  the  partial  preser- 
vation, of  their  language,  which,  even  in  the  mother  coun- 
try, has,  since  the  spread  of  Islamism,  been  totally  ex- 
tinct. 

The  Jews  however  did  not,  immediately  after  their  return,  adopt 
the  Chaldee  exclusively.  It  was  not  until  the  time  of  the  Maccabees, 
that  this  language  completely  displaced  the  Old  Hebrew,  as  Gesenius 
has  demonstrated.  Gesch.  d.  Heb.  Spr.  p.  44.  Concerning  the  Chal- 
dee as  the  language  of  books  among  the  Jews,  see  No.  3.  It  is  clear 
from  Ezra  4:  7,  8,  that  it  was  also  the  government-language  of  the 
western  provinces  of  the  Persian  empire.  The  Samaritans  also  spoke 
a  dialect  very  nearly  resembling  the  Chaldee. 

In  later  times,  the  name  Hebrcio  (tj^gcc'ig,  t^galg  diaXfKTog,  yXma- 
aa  7C0J'  i§Qaio)v,  t^^ja'Cati,)  was  transferred  to  the  Babylonish  dialect; 
comp.  Prol.  to  Sirach,  John  5:  2.  19:  13.  Acts  21:  40.  22:  2.  26: 
14.  Rev.  9:  11.  16:  16.  Jerome  Prol.  to  1.  Mace.  It  was  even  cal- 
led TittiQioQ  ylMOGu,  ^(avrj.  2  Mac.  13:  37.  Joseph.  Jewish  Wars 
Pref  §  1.  The  Talmudists,  on  the  other  hand,  call  the  Chal- 
dee, in  distinction  from  the  Old  Hebrew,  'ins^  'H5>n  "jllUb-  See 
Lightfoot  on  John  5:  2.  Also  '^D"nD  [Syriac]  Baba  Kama  fol.  83,  1, 
Sot.  49.  2.  Pesach.  61.  1.  Compare  C.  H.  Zeibich  de  lingua  Jud. 
Heb.  tempore  Christi.  Viteb.  1741.  The  name  Chaldaic  did  not, 
however,  become  totally  obsolete.  We  find  it  again  in  Jerome,  Prol. 
ad  Tob.,  Judith. 

It  is  plain,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  that  the  Babylonish  lan- 
guage would,  as  spoken  and  written  by  Jews,  i.  e.  by  those  who  inhab- 
ited Palestine,  receive  something  of  the  Hebrew  character.  That  such 
was  the  fact  will  be  more  particularly  shown  below,  No.  3.  Still  the 
assertion  is  incorrect,  that  the  Chaldee  which  we  have,  (and  which  has 
come  to  us  only  through  the  Jews,)  has  been  extraordinarily  corrupted 
by  them,  or  is  a  mixture  of  Hebrew  with  pure  Babylonian.  See  Mich- 
aelis  Abh.  v.  d.  Syr.  Spr.  36  seq.  Wahl  Geschichte  d.  morg.  Sprachen. 
§  78  seq.  Meyer  Hermeneut.  d.  A.  T.  vol.  I.  p.  266.     Comp.  Jahn  Ein- 


12  CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 

leitung  ins  A.  T.  I.  248,  284.  For,  from  a  comparison  of  the  Chaldee 
(as  it  is  found  in  the  old  Targums,  for  example,)  with  the  Syriac,  which 
we  learn  from  native  Syrian  authors,  it  is  evident  that  the  Chaldee  has 
all  the  most  important  peculiarities  of  grammatical  form  and  syntactical 
construction,  as  well  as  the  greatest  part  of  its  stock  of  words — copia 
vcrborum,  in  common  with  the  Syriac.  Its  prominent  features  are 
those  of  an  Aramcan  dialect.  On  the  other  hand,  those  traits  in  which 
the  Chaldee  differs  from  the  Syriac  and  agrees  with  the  Hebrew,  are 
few ;  and  those  few  relate  mostly  to  orthography  and  punctuation. 
See  No.  4.  But  why  may  not  all  this  be  regarded  as  dialectic  differ- 
ence ?  As  widely  as  the  Aramean  was  extended,  it  was  natural  that, 
like  other  languages  extensively  in  use,  it  should  split  up  into  different 
dialects.  The  Hebrew  and  Phenician,  notwithstanding  their  original 
relation  and  vicinity,  exhibit  variations  of  this  kind.  Besides,  it  would 
be  difficult,  on  the  other  supposition,  to  say  why  the  Jews  varied  from 
the  Aramean  character  in  so  few  points,  and  those  such  as  differed 
from  the  Hebrew  not  more  than  others  which  they  have  left  untouch- 
ed :  why  for  example,  they  said  bpp'^  instead  of  btpp: ,  N-taj?  instead 
of  i^rtSJiT:,  which  certainly  did  not  savor  more  of  foreign  idiom  than 
^•'Sr^  for  S'GbTo  ,  N^ii  for  Qi'r;  or  bDp'J  for  ^Uf:: . 

The  periods  of  Persian  and  Grecian  supremacy  introduced  some 
Persian  and  Greek  words  into  the  Babylonish  (though  less  than  into 
the  Syriac)  ;  whence  even  the  Targum  of  Onkelos  is  not  free  from 
Greek  words.  But  the  Saracen  dominion,  which  commenced  with  the 
invasion  of  Babylonia  by  the  hosts  of  the  Kaliphs,  A.  D.  640,  soon  to- 
tally annihilated  the  ancient  language  of  the  country,  so  that,  at  the 
present  day,  not  a  relic  of  it  exists  in  the  East :  and  the  story  that  the 
Chaldee  is  now  spoken  in  some  villages  near  Mosul  andMardin,  (Nie- 
buhr  Reise  II.  363),  is  without  probability  and  is  not  confirmed  by 
more  recent  travellers.  For  another  account,  which  however  is  not 
well  attested,  see  Eichhorn's  Bibliothek  VIII.  435.  But  see  Appendix 
on  this  subject. 

3.  The  principal  remains  of  the  Chaldee  dialect  in 
our  possession  are'  the  following  (l)  In  the  canonical 
books,  Ezra  4:  8—6:  18.  7:  12—26.  Daniel  2:  4—7:  28. 
Jerem.  10:  11.  (2)  A  class  of  translations  and  paraphra- 
ses of  the  books  of  the  O.  Test.  [Targums]  which  have 
originated  in  different  ages,  and  which  exhibit  very  consid- 
erable varieties  of  linguistic  and  exegetical  character. 

Note  I.  In  respect  to  linguistic  character,  with  which  alone  we  are 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE.  13 


at  present  concerned,  these  remains  of  the  Babylonish  dialect  may  be 
divided  into  three  classes.  The  purest  Chaldee,  (i.  e.  the  freest  from 
Hebraism,)  appears  in  the  Targum  of  Onkelos  on  the  Pentateuch. 
Similar  to  this  in  respect  to  words,  orthography  and  grammatical  con- 
struction, but  somewhat  inferior,  is  the  Biblical  Chaldee,  which  is  in- 
terspersed throughout  with  Hebrew  peculiarities ;  e.  g.  the  substitu- 
tion of  M  for  N  whether  quiescent  or  not,  the  Plural  termination 
d"^— ,  the  Dual  form,  the  conj.  Hophal.  Finally,  the  remaining 
Targums  are  composed  in  a  language,  not  only  abounding  in  foreign 
words,  but  exhibiting  many  peculiar  fijrms,  (e.  g.  Hiphil  tl'^pni*  from 
Cnp ,  12  preformative  of  the  Infin.  Pael,  Ithpeel  and  Ithpaal,)  part  of 
which  resemble  the  Syriac  or  Rabbinic,  (as  2  prefixed  to  the  3d  p. 
Fut.  and  the  syllable  n3  prefixed  in  Passives,)  and  part  arise  from  con- 
tractions, (as  in  the  numerals).  These  peculiarities  have  been  noti- 
ced, though  inadequately  by  Eichhorn  (Einl.  ins  A,  T.  H.  6  seq.  00 
seq).  They  deserve  indeed  to  be  collected  into  a  separate  treatise.  In 
the  sequel  the  later  Chaldee  will  constantly  be  distinguished  from  the 
earlier. 

Note  2.  The  language  of  the  Talmud  is  commonly  termed  Chaldee. 
The  Mishna  and  the  Gemara  are  however  very  different.  The  former 
is  written  in  a  dialect  nearly  resembling  the  Hebrew,  and  is  only  dis- 
figured by  some  Chaldee  forms  ;  the  style  of  the  Gemara  exhibits  the 
fundamental  characteristics  of  Chaldee,  both  in  respect  to  the  roots  of 
words  and  their  grammatical  conformation — still  it  is  to  be  regarded, 
especially  the  Jerusalem  Gemara,  as  a  very  corrupt  Chaldee.  Its 
grammar  needs  therefore  to  be  treated  separately.  See  J.  E.  Faber 
Anm.  z.  Erlernung  des  Talmud,  und  Rabbin.  Gott.  1770. 

Note  3.  The  Chaldee  [Syrochaldaic]  originals  of  several  of  the 
Apocryphal  books  [those  which  were  written  in  Palestine]  are  lost. 
See  Jerome  Prol.  ad  Tob.,  Judith,  I.  Mace,  and  the  Tntrr.  of  Eichhorn, 
Bertholdt  and  De  Wette.  Josephus  also  wrote  his  work  on  the  Jewish 
War  in  the  Syrochaldaic  language,  (Jewish  War,  Preface  §  1). 

4.  The  Chaldee  with  which  we  are  now  concerned 
sustains,  as  is  apparent  from  the  shghtest  observation,  a 
near  relation  to  the  Syriac,  and  shares  with  that  dialect 
all  its  essential  peculiarities,  both  in  respect  to  the  forms 
of  words  and  their  themes,  but  differs  from  it  in  details 
sufficiently  to  claim  separate  individuality  as  a  dialect. 
These  variations  concern  rather  the  grammatical  forms 
than  the  themes  of  words,  and  especially  punctuation,  in 


14  CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 

which  the  Chaldee   nearly  accords  with    the  old   Pheni- 
cian  and  Hebrew. 

Note  1.  On  the  connexion  of  Chaldee  with  Syriac,  see  Michaelis 
Abhandl.  von  der  syr.  Sprache,  pp.  12  seq. 

Note  2.  A  full  consideration  of  Chaldee  ground-forms  would  be 
out  of  place  here.  I  shall  only  notice  the  change  of  letters  for  others 
of  somewhat  different  sounds,  in  such  words  as  the  Chaldee  has  in 
common  with  the  Hebrew.  In  consequence  of  that  flat  pronunciation 
which  characterises  the  Aramean  dialects,  we  frequently  find  n  and  n 
substituted  for  the  Hebrew  f  and  ':ji ;  e.  g.  ni'7  to  offer  (sacrifices),  an'7 
gold^  ^^'l  seed,  'nin  to  break  in  pieces,  *i^n  an  ox  ;  and  'c  for  ^,  as 
^^D  «  rock,  NUy  counsel.  Besides  these,  j{  is  used  almost  constantly 
instead  of  fn  final,  i£  is  sometimes  changed  into  y,  as  yiN  [7~i.J<].  (On 
the  cause  of  this  change,  compare  Gesenius  Heb.  Lex.  letter  v) ;  2  in- 
to b,  as  NbJab.N  a  ividoio.  Finally,  it  is  scarcely  necessary  to  remark, 
that  letters  of  the  same  organ  may  be  interchanged  ;  e.  g.  n''")i3  [Heb. 
rT'-jS^J  brimstone,  i'^ip  [Heb.  5-n'i3]  a  helmet,  iUVJO  [Heb.  n:^n]  to 
tvander. 

Note.  3.  In  respect  to  grammatical  forms,  the  Chaldee  shares  the 
following  peculiarities  in  common  with  the  Syriac. 

(1)  The  same  forms  of  words  are  pronounced  with  fewer  vow- 
els than  in  Hebrew,  so  that  the  consonants  predominate  in  grammati- 
cal formations;  as  !:Dp  ,  ^b^^  ,  b''pp  • 

(2)  The  emphatic  state  (of  nouns)  equivalent  to  the  article  in 
Hebrew  and  Arabic. 

(3)  1:  as  a  mark  of  the  Accusative. 

(4)  The  termination  ']'i_.  for  the  plural  of  masculines. 

(5)  Distinction  of  genders  in  the  3d  p.  plur.  Pret.  of  verbs. 

(6)  The  formation  of  Passives  by  prefixing  the  syllable  nw^. 

(7)  The  formation  of  the  third  conjugation  like  Vl?.i^N  • 

(8)  Imperatives  Passive. 

(9)  Two  participles  in  the  Actives  of  the  second  and  third  Conj. 

(10)  The  use  of  the  participles  with  pronouns  for  a  separate  tense. 

(11)  The  preference  of  N  to  n  as  a  termination  of  words  ;  e.  g. 
fObJ2  a  queen,  and  the  consequent  confusion  of  verbs  Nb  and  rh- 

(12)  The  use  of  pleonastic  suffixes  before  the  Genitive. 

(13)  The  use  of  the  3d  p.  pi.  of  Actives  in  a  Passive  sense. 

Note  4.  Peculiarities  of  the  Chaldee,  in  which  it  differs  from  the 
Syriac,  and  more  nearly  resembles  the  Hebrew.  (1)  Preference  of 
the  clearer-sounding  vowels.  Thus  a  is  often  substituted  for  the  Heb. 
and  Syr.  o  ;  e.  g.  Sn3  ,  Syr.  Is  As ;  N^^N  ,  Syr,  ]  C)^  ;  D^y ,  Heb. 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE.  15 

,  p 

fibi3>;  d3N:,  Heb.  uJSN;  bf?  ,  Heb.  V^p;   ^np  ,  Syr.  \f£)  ;    the  plural 

termination  of  feminines  ]_  instead  of  Syr.  y_.     So  the  Chaldee  often 

has  T  where  T   occurs  in  Syriac,  e.  g.  Hs  ,y^  ;  and  _  for  the  Syr.  _  ; 

e.g.  ^ppn  Syr.  N5ia.^£)Z. — (2)  Avoiding  diphthongs;    compare  N73i"^ 

with  f.lDQj. ,  ^^b^  const,  st.  with  >_.^l:;.i£) ,  T'^.iN  with  r-^o|,   ib^  with 

alii.v«^  also  otiant  letters  ;  compare  iD^tt  my  king  with  ^-.S-i^bo  ,  •«^t:p 

with  v_i!!:::5.a.^£)  ,  Nbt2p  with  ^!b:;k.^\£;. — (3)  The  possibility  of  doubling 

letters  not  guttural ;  as  biap  ,  ^.^^  . — (4)  The  tone  regularly  on  the 

ultimate  ;  nb'bf^  ,  ( "^  \v^  . — (5)  The  formation  of  the  Inf  except  in 
Peal  without  the  prefix  73,  &:.c. — In  respect  to  orthography,  it  may  be 
remarked  here  that  the  scriptio  jjlena,  or  full  mode   of  writing  quiss«tr: 
cents,  is  decidedly  prevalent  in  Chaldee.  '^\\!^*' 


>7 


'"       or  THE 

THE  FOLLOWING  ARE  THE  PRINCIPAL  HELParEBltty  E  K  S  I>T 
STUDY  OF  CHALDEE.  \s<C^  ?•  »f  ^         *  V 

I.  Lexicons. 
J.  Buxtorfii  (tl629)   Lexicon  Chaldaico-Tahnudico-Rabbinicum. 
Basil.  1640.  fol. 

Edm.  Castelli  Lexicon  Heptaglotton.  London  1669.  fol.  (This  work 
contains  a  complete  Chaldee  Vocabulary). 

M.  J.  Landau  Rabb.  Aram.  Deutsch.  Worterbuch  zur  Kenntniss 
des  Talmud.,  der  Targum.  u.  s.  w.  Prag.  1819. 

.  II.  Grammars. 

(a)  Of  the  Shemitish  dialects  generally,  or  at  least  of  the  Aramean 
dialects. 

J.  Buxtorf.  Gram.  Chald.  et  Syr.  Basil.  (1615)  1650.  8vo. 

Lud.  de  Dieu  (tl642)  Grammatica  Ling.  Orient.  Heb.  Chald. 
et  Syr.  inter  se  collatarum.     L.  B.  1628.  4to.     Frcf  a.  M.  1683.  4to. 

J.  H.  Hottinger  (tl667)  Gramm.  quatuor  linguar.  Heb.  Ch.  Syr. 
et  Arab.  Tigur.  1649.  4to.  Heidelb.  1658. 

Andr.  Sennert  (11689)  Hypotyposis  harmonica  ling.  Or.  Chald. 
Syr.  et  Arab,  cum  matre  Heb.  Viteb.  1653.  4to. 

Car.  Schaaf  (tl729)  Opus  Aram,  complec.  Gram.  Chald.  Syr.  &c. 
L.  Bat.  1686.  8vo. 

Ign.  Fessler  Instt.  Ling.  Orient.  Heb.  Ch.  Syr.  et  Arab.  Vratisl. 
1787,  89.  2  vols.  8vo. 

i  The  obelisk  designates,  throughout  this  list,  the  year  of  an  author's  decease. 


1  6  CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 

J.  Gottfr.  Hasse  (tl80G)  Prakt.  Handb.  der  aram.  Sprache.  lena 
1791.  8vo. 

J.  Jahn  (tl8l7)  Aram,  oder  chald.  u.  syr.  Sprachlehre.  Wien 
1793.  8vo. — Elementa  Aram.  s.  Ch.  et  Syr.  ling.  lat.  redditaet  acces- 
sionibus  aucta  ab  Andr.  Oberleitner,  Vindob.  1820.   8vo. 

J.  S.  Vater,  Handbuch  der  hebr.  syr.  ch.  und  arab.  Grammatik 
Leipzig.  (1802)  1817.  8vo. 

(b)  Of  the  Chaldee  language  only. 

Chph.  Cellarii  (f  1707)  Chaldaismus  sive  Grammatica  nova  Lin- 
guae Chaldaicae.     Cizae.  1685.  4to. 

Henr.  Opitii  (tl712)  Chaldaismus  targ.  talm.  rabb.  Hebraismo 
harmonious.  Kil.  1696.  4to. 

J.  Dav.  Michaelis  (t  1791)     Grammatica  Chald.  Goett.  1771.  8vo. 

Wilh.  Fr.  Hezel  Anweis.  zum  Chald.  bei  Ermangelung  alles  miindl. 
Unterrichts,  Lemgo.  1787.  Svo. 

N.  W.  Schroder  (tl798)  Instt.  ad  fundam.  Chaldaismi  bibl.  bre- 
vissime  concinnata  (1787)  ed.  2.  aucta  et  emend.  Ulm.  1810.  Svo.  (a 
proper  appendix  to  the  Hebrew  grammar  of  this  author.  See  Eich- 
horn's  Bibl.  VIII.  694.) 

F.  Nolan,   An  Introduction  to  Ch.  Grammar.  Lond.   1821.  12mo. 
W.  Harris,  Elements  of  the  Chaldee  language,  Lond.  1822,  24  pp. 

Svo.  (republished  at  N.  York.) 

*  G.  B.  Winer,  Grammatik  des  biblischen  und  targumischen  Chal- 
daismus, Leipz.  1824.  Svo.  (the  basis  of  this  work.) 

HI.  Chrestomathies  and  Readers. 

Geneseos  ex  Onkelosi  paraphr.  Chald.  quatuor  priora  capita  una 
cum  Dan.  c.  2.  Chald.  Ed.  W.  Fr.  Hezel.  Lemgo  1788.  Svo. 

Geo.  Lor.  Bauer  (f  1806.)  Chrest.  e  paraphras.  Chald.  et  Talrnude 
delecta  c.  nott.  et  ind.  NiJrnb.  1792.  Svo.  (See  Eichhorn's  Bibl.  IV, 
895,  seq.) 

J.  Jahn,  Ch.  Chrestomathie  grosstentheils  a.  Handschrift.  Wien 
1800.  Svo.  (without  a  vocabulary.) 

H.  Adolf  Grimm  (tl813.)  Chald.  Chrestomathie  mit  einem  voll- 
Btandigen  Glossar.  Lemgo.  1801.  Svo. 

G.  B.  Winer,  Chal.  Lesebuch,  aus  den  Targ.  d.  a.  T.  ausgewahlt, 
Leipz.  1825.  Svo. 

The  Hebrew  Lexicons  generally  contain  also  the  Chaldee  words 
which  occur  in  Daniel  and  Ezra.  The  older  Hebrew  Grammars,  (com- 
pare those  of  Alting  and  Danz,)  contained  also  brief  instructions  for 
the  Chaldee. 


CHALDEE    GRAMMAR. 


PART  I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  ORTHOEPY. 


§  !•  Consonants. 

The  Chaldee  is  written  with  the  same  characters  as 
are  employed  in  Hebrew;  and,  so  far  as  we  can  trace  its 
ancient  history,  was  never  expressed  by  any  others. 
With  much  more  certainty  has  it  been  decided,  after  un- 
prejudiced critical  investigation,  that  the  square  character, 
now  termed  Hebrew  by  way  of  distinction,  belonged  orig- 
inally to  the  Chaldeans  [Babylonians,]  and  first  took  the 
place  of  the  old  Hebrew  character  among  the  Jews  in 
the  age  succeeding  the  Babylonish  exile. 

For  a  full  account  of  the  age  and  origin  of  the  square  character,  see 
Gesenius  Gesch.  d.  Heb.  Spr.  u.  Schr.  (Leipzig.  1815.  8vo)  p.  140  seq. 
Eichhorn  (Einl.  ins  A.  T.  4th  Ed.  Pt.  I.  p.  204  seq.)  exhibits  a  result 
somewhat  different. 

§  2.  Punctuation. 

1.   The  vowel-points,  which  are  employed  in  Hebrew, 
have  been    transferred    to   the    Chaldee,  and    appear  in 
many  manuscripts,  and  most  editions  of  the  Chaldee  text. 
3 


18  <§  2.     PUNCTUATION. 


Since  it  is  evident  that  these  points  are  the  work  of  the 
Jews,  and  were  invented  several  centuries  alter  Christ, 
it  is  plain  that  the  Chaldee  must  originally  have  been 
written  without  vowel-points.  Thus  the  Palmyrene  in- 
scriptions exhibit  no  vowel-marks.  But  the  letters  &<  1  '' 
[rnatres  lectionis]  were  earlier  employed,  in  doubtful  cases, 
as  a  guide  in  reading. 

The  last  mentioned  fact  is  clear  from  such  orthographical  phenome- 
na as  i^XjriTn,  ^:£N'43^3  ,  nab'q  ,  Dan.  2:  35,  etc.  and  from  the  abun- 
dant use  of  the  scriptio  plena  throughout. 

2.  The  transfer  of  the  Hebrew  vowel-points  to  the 
Chaldee  took  place  in  an  age  when  the  vowel  system  of 
the  Jews  was  yet  in  an  imperfect  state ;  and  in  later 
times,  the  pointing  of  the  Chaldee  text,  especially  that  of 
the  Tarofums,  did  not  receive  the  same  attention  which 
was  devoted  to  the  Hebrew.  These  circumstances  ex- 
hibit clearly  the  reason  why  the  punctuation  of  the  Chal- 
dee writings  appears,  at  present,  far  less  regular  than  that 
of  the  Hebrew.  This  irregularity  is  indeed  so  great  that 
not  only  do  different  copies  and  editions,  (especially  those 
of  London  and  Venice,)  differ  widely  from  each  other, 
but  there  prevails  throughout  an  extreme  variableness  in 
the  use  of  the  long  and  short  vowels. 

On  the  variable  punctuation  of  the  Targums,  see  Eichhorn  Einl.  ins 
A.  T.  Part  2.  p.  24  seq. 

3.  Long  vowels  sometimes  occur  in  a  mixed  syllable  without  the 
tone,  and  vice  versa,  short  vowels  in  a  simple  syllable.  (Especially  are 
1  and  _  employed  altogether  promiscuously,  to  which  usage  only  a  slight 
tendency  is  noticeable  in  Hebrew.  See  Gesenius  Lehrgebaude  p.  60.) 
For  examples  of  the  former  comp.  PiS'^Din  Deut;  23:  16.  "jlSTi^N  Jer. 
49:  19.     -J-^Vi"  [allin]  Dan.  4:  4.  ;  of  the  latter  =l!:Dp.  . 

4.  The  violation  of  the  rule  of  Qamets  Hhateph,  in  such  cases  as 
N732in  is  only  apparent.  The  T  is  only  a  superfluous  mater  lectionis 
and  is  by  no  means  to  be  regarded  as  quiescing  in  Qamets  Hhateph,  or 
as  a  consonant  [Hhdvchma']  since  it  is  written  without  Sheva.  In  gen- 
eral however  Qamets  Hhateph  seldom  occurs  in  Chaldee  words. 


§  2.     PUNCTUATION  J  DAGESH.  19 

DAGESH. 

5.  Dagesh  lene  is  subject  to  the  same  general  rules  as 
in  Hebrew. 

a.  The  pron.  sufF.  "JTS  and  "JO  never  receive  it. 

b.  In  some  editions,  ")-.  in  the  middle  of  a  vpord  is  treated  as  a  diph- 
thong, and  the  next  letter  does  not  receive  Dagesh  lene  ;  as  '^ri'^a  baithi. 
Generally  however  "^  is  regarded  as  a  proper  consonant,  and  we  find  "^Pi^a 
ri*;^-)  bay-ti,  gday-td. 

c.  Nouns  of  the  form  ^b73  (Heb.  ^b.a)  are  treated  as  though  the 
ground-form  was  ^b^,  and  Dagesh  is  inserted  in  the  3  where  a  mixed 
syllable  precedes ;  as  N3b?3,  "'S^^. 

6.  Dagesh  forte  compensative 

a.  Is  inserted  in  the  first  radical  of  verbs  V^  ;  e.  g.  p'=T.N  for  pi?,']N  , 
Aphel  from  pj?" . 

b.  In  n  of  the  passive  prefix  nj<  it  compensates  for  the  omission  of 
N  the  characteristic  prefix  of  Aphel,  e.  g.  bt:prii<  for  btOpNHN  . 

Note.  The  peculiarity  of  the  Chaldee  in  both  these  cases  is,  that  the 
letter  for  which  compensation  is  made  would,  if  the  word  were  fully 
written,  have  succeeded  the  letter  in  which  Dagesh  forte  is  inserted. 
In  Hebrew  this  is  unusual,  and  where  it  occurs  might  perhaps  be  de- 
nominated Chaldaism.     Comp.  Heb.  Gr.*  §  261. 

c.  Sometimes,  especially  in  ^he  later  Chaldee,  it  compensates  for  the 
omission  of  quiescents  and  consequent  shortening  of  the  vowel  preced- 
ing the  letter  in  which  Dagesh  forte  is  inserted  ;  as  N^'^N  instead  of  N3b''N 
Gen.  3:  2.  Pseud.  Jon.  The  converse  of  this  also  takes  place ;  §  7.  a.  (2). 

7.  Forms  which  regularly  exhibit  Dagesh  forte,  but 
sometimes  appear  with  a  different  orthography. 

a.  The  letter  3  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  Dagesh  forte,  even 
where  the  radical  form  does  not  exhibit  a  3;  e.  g.  bi:3~  Dan.  2:  25,  in- 
stead of  bi;:!  or  !:i;N  from  bz?..  This  may  have  arisen  from  an  imper- 
fect acquaintance  with  Chaldee.  A  Jew,  on  perceiving  that  3  was  ex- 
pressed in  Chaldee  in  many  cases  where  his  own  language  required 
Dagesh  forte  or  a  long  vowel  compensating  for  it,  would  perhaps  be 
liable  to  employ  it  even  where  it  was  not  required  by  good  Chaldee  usage. 
See  below  §  6.  a.  note.     Gesenius,  Lehrg.  §  33.  3. 

6.  Very  frequently  no  compensation  is  made  for  the  exclusion  of 
Dagesh  forte  from  gutturals  ;  e.  g.  ■5=i:2npn  Gen.  3:  3.  UJhD  2  K.  21:  6. 

c.  As  in  Hebrew,  Dagesh  forte  is  sometimes  dropped  when  the  letter  in 
which  it  would  regularly  be  inserted  has  Sheva.  Heb.  Gram.  §73.  note  3. 

•  The  Hebrew  Grammar  referred  to  throughout  this  work,  is  that  of  Prof.  Stuart,  4th  edit. 


20  §  3.    TONE-SYLLABLE. 


MAPPIQ. 

8.  Mapplq  is  inserted,  as  in  Hebrew,  in  Jl  where  it  is 
not  quiescent. 

a.  In  the  Pronominal  suffixes  ri-  and  n_  ,  comp.  §  8. 

b.  In  rt  when  it  occurs  as  the  last  radical  of  a  verb  or  noun  and  is 
not  quiescent;  e.g.  Pina  Ps.  131:  1.  n^N  Dan.  2:  28. 

ACCENTS. 

9.  a.  In  the  Chaldee  portions  of  the  original  Scriptures, 
the  same  accents  are  employed,  and  subject  to  the  same 
rules,  as  in  Hebrew,  only  that  the  half-accent  Metheg  is 
much  less  regularly  and  less  frequently  inserted  than  in 
Hebrew. 

b.  In  the  Targum  of  Onkelos,  the  train  of  accents  is 
substantially  the  same  as  in  the  original  text.  See  Chres- 
tomathy  Part  I.    Note  on  No.  I. 

c.  To  the  text  of  the  other  Targums  no  accents  have 
been  appended. 

§  3.   Tone-syllable. . 

m 

The  tone  falls  in  Chaldee,  (as  in  Hebrew,)  usually  on 
the  last  syllable.  The  following  forms  are  exceptions, 
and  are  accented  on  the  penultimate. 

1.  Segolate  nouns  which  follow  the  Hebrew  form;  as 
'^T'p,  tlD^D,  1']|S,  which  however  occur  almost  exclu- 
sively in  the  biblical  Chaldee. 

2.  Verbal  forms  terminating  in  n    it-    ii3    '^_  and  V, 

as  n^Bj?,  ^iVo]?,  i«5^.Pp,  "^bpp,,  "h'pp^. 

3.  The  suffixes  ^L^  fi<"n_  i^Dl.  ^t]ij"^tf);  e.g.  i^h^bl^, 

^^^^^ '  ''3h}?li J^ ,  &c.     "    ^  ^ 

The  German  and  Polish  Jews  place  the  tone  in  Chaldee  (as  they 
also  do  in  Hebrew)  on  the  penult.      Whether  this  was  the  ancient 


i^ 


§  4.  OF  READING  UNPOINTED  TEXT.  21 

Babylonish  accentuation,  cannot  be  decided  from  the  accentuation  pre- 
valent in  Syriac  ;  since  two  closely  related  dialects  may  differ  widely 
in  this  respect.  Were  the  vowels  of  the  Chaldee,  as  we  have  them,  en- 
tirely conformed  to  the  old  Babylonish  pronunciation,  we  should  have, 
in  them,  a  clew  to  the  ancient  accentuation. 


^  4.  Of  reading  unpointed  text. 

As  points  have  not  been  attached  to  all  the  Chaldee 
text,  and  since  the  unpointed,  (besides  the  use  of  the  ma- 
tres  lectionis  i<,  1,  'i ,  which  obtains  likewise  in  Heb.)  pre- 
sents some  peculiarities,  it  may  be  well  here  to  notice,  as 
an  assistance  in  reading  without  vowels,  one  usage  at  least, 
which  obtains  in  the  Targums,  viz.  that  a  double  1  or  "^  is 
sometimes  employed. 

(a)  In  the  middle  of  a  word  :  either  to  indicate  that 
these  letters  are  moveable;  as  J{nl1!252  i.  e.  J^DIli'D, 
i^D^'^'Dn  i.  e.  i^D*^]?!;   or   that   they  are  to   be   pronounced 

double;  asnnii^n5<  i. e.  nniMnwx,  i^n^^n  i.e.  pn^n . 

(6)  In  the  end  of  a  word,  especially  when  it  is  neces- 
sary to  distinguish   between  the  pronouns  *^_  and  ''_ ;   as 

'i^^i-l  i.  e.  ^h^;^. 

Note.  Only  one  abbreviation  occurs  in  the  Targums,  viz.  '^■'  for  liliT^ . 
The  Talmud  abounds  with  them.  See  J.  Buxtorf  De  Abbreviat.  Hebr. 
Basil.  1640.  8vo. 


PART  II. 


ETYMOL,OGY 


CHAPTER  I. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  WHICH  REGULATE  THE  DERIVATION  AND 
INFLECTION    OF    WORDS. 


§  5.  The  subject  generally. 

1.  Before  entering  upon  the  derivation  and  modifications 
of  the  various  parts  of  speech,  it  Avill  be  necessary  to  no- 
tice briefly  the  general  principles  according  to  which  these 
changes  take  place.  In  Chaldee,  as  in  every  other  lan- 
guage, these  changes  respect  partly  consonants,  and  part- 
ly vowels,  which  will  naturally  divide  this  subject  into  two 
parts. 

2.  It  is  proper  to  distinguish,  among  the  changes  of 
consonants  and  vowels  with  which  we  meet  in  the  inflec- 
tions of  the  parts  of  speech,  between  those  which  are 
necessary,  and  those  which  are  the  result  of  euphony. 
The  former  class  includes  those  changes  which  are  es- 
sential to  permanent  forms, — those  which  run  through 
the  language,  and  which  form,  so  to  speak,  its  substratum. 
Such  are  the  terminations  of  the  persons  in  verbs,  and  of 
the  numbers  in  nouns.  Those  changes,  on  the  other 
hand,  may  be  reckoned  euphonical,  which  are  not  essential 
to  the  form,  but  result  simply  from  facility  of  utterance  ; 


<^  6.    MUTATIONS  OF  CONSONANTS.  23 

as  Vb'Op  instead  of  ^Vjp  ,  'l^^ii^'2  instead  of  'J'^'T&in  , 
innD>^  instead  of  inOni^t.  So  in  Latin  we  have  immi- 
nutus  for  inminutus,  mi  for  mihi,  hodie  for  hoc  die,  &c.  It 
is  plainly  with  this  latter  class  of  changes  that  we  are 
at  present  chiefly  concerned. 

§  6.  Mutations  of  Consonants. 

The  derivation  and  inflection  of  words,  so  far  as  they 
depend  on  the  consonants,  are  effected  .by  other  letters 
(beside  those  which  compose  the  root),  being  prefixed,  in- 
serted or  suffixed  ;  or  by  the  radicals  themselves  being 
omitted,  doubled  or  commuted  with  other  letters;  e.  g. 
b'OJ^P,,  ^VJp.,  &«5Vop,,  ^Ipp_  from  yjp;  nD  from  niD; 
'^\^  from  i^by .  For  these  purposes  the  Chaldee  em- 
ploys the  letters  j^,  51, 1,  %  12,2,7] .  It  belongs  to  the  details 
of  etymology  to  exhibit  the  manner  in  which  these  servile 
letters  are  employed  in  each  particular  case.  Those 
changes  only  will  be  noticed  in  this  place,  which,  in  the 
formation  and  inflection  of  words,  are  the  results  of  eu- 
phony. Such  are  the  assimilation,  transposition,  omission, 
commutation  and  insertion  of  consonants. 

a.  Assimilation  takes  place  regularly,  (l)  Of  the  letter 
3,  when  it  occurs  as  the  final  consonant  of  a  mixed  syllable 
and  immediately  precedes  another  consonant.  Thus  instead 
of  pSD*]  is  commonly  written  pS*^,  Dn!D'Q  instead  of  Dn!l)3^. 
Comp.  §  18. — (2)  Of  n  in  the  passive  prefix  n^i  with 
a  succeeding  D  or  'I ,  more  rarely  with  any  other  letter. 
See  §  10.  5. 

Note.  The  converse  of  this  takes  place,  when,  instead  of  doubling  a 
consonant,  the  letter  3  is  inserted ;  e.  g.  ""rirp  for  '^iip ;  nni:^  for  nzN 
Job  31:  12.  Dan.  4:  9.  (This  takes  place  however  in  only  a  few  words 
which  must  be  learned  by  practice.) — "^  also  is  so  used  in  the  later  Tar- 
gums  ;  e.g.  "jn^il^iit  instead  of  p'-ip^N  Gen.  38:  9.  Pseudo-Jon.  ''^'^73  in- 
stead of  -^^12  Eccl.  10:  12. 


24  §  6.    MUTATIONS  OF  CONSONANTS. 

b.  Transposition.     The  D  of  the  passive  preformati've 
Dfii  regularly  changes  places  with  the  first  radical,  when    . 
that  happens  to  be  a   sibilant  (t,  D,  2,  ^   or  "iD);  e.g. 

c.  The  following  letters  are  dropped,  (l)  "^  and  3  in 
some  forms  in  which  they  would  stand  in  the  beginning  of 
a  word  without  a  vowel;  e.g.  pS  instead  of  pSD  ,  ^l 
[Imp.]  for  S?'!']. — (2)  Consonants  destitute  of  vowels,  by 
contraction;  e.g.  "idrii^J  instead  of  ^^'xrii^,  lO'^nri  in- 
stead of  "1D57  'i^in.  Here  belong  also  "TSJ^  instead  of 
"TSwyj^,  >iniD  instead  of  iXni^'D  Ex.9:  31.  Jon.— (3)  3 
without  a  vowel  and  in  the  end  of  a  syllable,  of  partici- 
ples changed  into  tenses  ;  e.  g.  lirT^^Dp  for  ]'^n3''^Dp . — 
(4)  Very  frequently  the  quiescents  ;  e.  g.  ITll^^  instead  of 
11152.^'^,  'inm  instead  of  '^n&{Tn.— (5)  n  in' the  end  of 
words,  constantly  in  the  absolute  state  of  feminine  forms 
like  n'lD^'Q;~also  in  the  later  Targums  '^IS  for  n^'S  Gen. 
22;  19.  Jonath. 

d.  Commutation  takes  place,  especially  of  quiescents ; 
(l)  When  one  quiescent  letter  is  exchanged  for  another 
capable  of  quiescing  in  the  same  vowel ;  as  ^1^1^  instead 
of  "l^JilO ,  (which  is  merely  an  orthographical  change;) 
— (2)  When  a  quiescent,  homogeneous  with  the  charac- 
teristic vowel  of  a  particular  form,  is  substituted  for  one 
which  would  be  heterogenous  ;   as  G'^pJi  for  CIpN  (Dlpi^). 

But  those  numerous  cases  of  verbs  Nb  do  not  belong  here,  in  which  "^ 
appears  instead  of  N ;  nor  such  instances  as  ^jn'^anjo  instead  of  Nni<^"ij5  ; 
for  in  these  cases  the  "^  is  only  the  original  consonant  (which  had  been 
displaced  by  another),  restored.    See  above. 

e.  Insertion.  X  prosthetic  is  sometimes  inserted  in  ca- 
ses where  otherwise  a  syllable  would  commence  with 
two  consonants  ;    e.  g.   ^T\'dlii ,  *'*^ni^  •     Here  belong  also 


§  7.   VOWEL-CHANGES.  25 


such  cases  as  l.^ril^  instead  of  ")5i^n>{ ,  !:t3p^l^i  instead  of 
7Dpi;{n>}.  For  Dogesh  Jorte  is  here  euphonic,  being  pri- 
marily designed  to  shorten  the  pronunciation,  (see  Gese- 
nius  Lehrgeb.  p.  860)  though  it  constantly  indicates  the 
doubling  of  the  consonant;  and  for  this  purpose  the  vol 


el  of  the  i^5  falls  back  to  the  H  of  the  prefix,     j^^^^  LIB^J' 

OF  THB  ^ 

.n  T.    7  .  ,;U1TIVEIISIT7 

§  7.   Vowd  changes.  \  /> j,       ob-        ^  k 

The  derivation  and  inflections  of  words  are  effected,  in 
the  second  place,  by  vowels,  when  forms  of  words  de- 
rived from  the  same  ground-form  are  characterized  by 
different  vowels ;  ex.  '^bp  from  "^bp ,  ^ I2p  from  7Dp , 
^^D  from  7^D .  It  is  impossible  to  decide,  in  each  par- 
ticular case,  why  such  and  such  vowels  have  been  select- 
ed as  characteristic  of  the  form.  We  can  distinctly  as- 
certain, however,  what  are  the  characteristics  of  particular 
forms:  and  this  again  must  be  referred  to  the  details  of 
etymology.  Only  some  variations  from  the  general  prin- 
ciples which  regulate  these  forms,  and  some  other  modi- 
fications of  vowels  which  result  from  facility  of  pronun- 
ciation, will  be  noticed  here.  Vowels,  in  the  course  of 
formation  and  inflection,  are  commuted,  transposed,  dropped, 
or  inserted. 

a.  Commutation  of  vowels;  (l)  Short  for  long,  when 
a  mixed  syllable  loses  the  tone;  as  'j'^il^S  from  7b,  (HSH 
from  in,  "1j5l?  const,  state  of  "lp5^.  In  these  cases  'I  pure 
generally  becomes  _  ;  and  _ ,  _ .  When  the  long  vowel 
remains  unchanged,  either  that  is  impure,  or  the  last  con- 
sonant of  the  ground-form  is  thrown  forward  and  pro- 
nounced with  thesuflfix;  e.g.  "jisa'^d  Dan.  3:  31.  So  con- 
stantly  in   Hebrew;    as  ^TjID'l.       See   above    §  2.  2. — 


26  (^i  ^'    VOWEL-CHANGES. 


(2)  Long  vowels  take  the  placo  of  short; — in  pause;  as 
DDD  Dan.  2:  32.   l^X  Dan.  4: 6,  nwX  Gen.  4:  11.  vhm  Ex. 

'at  :  IT  v;  :  ^T  IT  T     • 

4:  13.  (though  this  is  not  universally  the  case  ;  comp. 
Dan.  2:  9,  17.); — before  a  guttural  which  would  regular- 
ly be  doubled ;  as  T^nn^Q  instead  of  'rjnS^^ ,  ii^^l^^^,  in- 
stead of  i^5'"li^^,  (although  this  likewise  is  not  without  e  x 
ceptions,  especially  if  the  guttural  be  n  or  H  •  Dan.  4:  16, 
24.); — before  other  consonants,  less  frequently  ;  as  ']i"1j?'^^ 
Instead  of  'ji"lp5^  Gen.  38:  9.  Ps.  Jon.  see  §  6.  a. ; — when 
a  quiescent  which  would  regularly  have  a  composite  She- 
va,   drops    it  and  quiesces  in  the    preceding   vowel ;     as 

yy^b  instead  of  in^^.^.'— (^)  ^^  ^^  ^^^  ^^^  ^^^^  o^  ^"■ 
phony  that,  in  final  syllables  which  terminate  in  a  guttural, 
Pattahh  is  usually  found  before  it,  instead  of  the  usual  char- 
acteristic vowel ;  as  TlbjD)  instead  of  H ^^Ui"] ,  HSp  instead 
of  nUltD;  also  that  when  a  syllable  terminates  in  a  quies- 
cent preceded  by  a  heterogeneous  vowel,  that  vowel  be- 
comes homogeneous;   e.  g.  5]'^D1i^  instead  of  jTj'^DIi^. 

The  case  of  simple  syllables,  in  which  long  vowels  have  displaced 
the  short  ones,  does  not  belong  here.  In  most  of  these  instances,  the 
punctuators  probably  employed  the  short  vowels ;  and  such  forms  as 
^Sjyii  ,  ^"iJ^S  occur  only  in  particular  editions. 

b.  Transposition  of  vowels  takes  place  in  some  mono- 
syllabic forms  of  verbs,  the  vowel  of  which  is  between 
the  two  last  radicals,  when  they  receive  a  pronominal  suf- 
fix; as  fl^Dj?  from  7C3p  ; — also  in  some  contracted  forms 
of  verbs  y^  ;  as  'p'V  for  'p'p^'^', — and  finally,  in  cases  like 
Dip  for  Dip,  ^ri)2  for  "^ITlfi^^,  ?  when  the  moveable  &{  or  T , 
etc.  throws  back  to  the  preceding  consonant  its  own 
vowel,  for  the  sake  of  quiescing  in  it. 

c.  Vowels  are  dropped^  in  the  final  syllable  of  ground- 


^  8.    PERSONAL  AND  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS.  27 


forms,  only  when  formative  syllables  are  added,  and  then 
much  less  frequently  than  in  Heb. ;  e.  g.  i^l2bp  from  Q^y , 
'I'^bp;^^  from  VJj'P,  i6l1p_  from  t?nS,  ]'lb^'p,)  from  ^DJ?']. 
The  vowels  most  frequently  omitted  are  Pattahh,  Tseri 
and   Hhireq. 

d.  Finally,  vowels  are  inserted;  (l)  When  two  conso- 
nants would  otherwise  stand  together  without  a  vowel  in 
the  beginning  of  a  syllable;  as  pDp*^  from  pDp,  '^'^.^.^ 
from  Y>p  .  The  vowel  most  commonly  employed  in  such 
cases  to  facilitate  pronunciation  is  Hhireq.  But  when  the 
following  consonant  is  a  guttural,  and  has  a  composite  She- 
va,  the  preceding  consonant  takes  the  short  vowel  cor- 
responding with  this  Sheva  ;  as  iiD5<1,  iDiSJ'P . — (2)  In 
cases  like   llinj'n  Ez.  7:  18,  n^innn   Ez.  4:"  15,  instead 

'         :  ~  r  -  :  T  IT 

of  "llinjTl  ,nillinn;  where  three  consonants  would  come 

together,  in  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  without  a  vowel. 

Note.  In  case  (1)  the  inserted  vowel  regularly  belongs  to  the  first 
of  the  two  consonants  which  would  have  been  without  vowels.  In  the 
later  Targums,  a  practice  somewhat  different  prevails  to  considerable 
extent.  Instead  of  a  sJiorf  vowel  under  the  first  consonant,  a  long  vow- 
el appears  under  the  second;  e.  g.  "^HN"]  instead  of  T3N;!i  Gen.  3:  1. 
Ps.  Jon.  et  passim.    Nb''r):^1  instead  of  Nb'^n^T  Gen.  3:  24.  Ps.  Jon. 


CHAP.  II. 
PRONOUNS 


^  8.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 

1.  Personal  pronouns  are  divided,  as  in  Hebrew,  into 
two  classes,  separate  and  suffixed.  The  former  express, 
with  some  exceptions,  the  nominative  case,  and  the  latter 
the  oblique  cases. 


28 


^  8.    PERSONAL  AND  I'OSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


TABLE  OF  THE   SEPARATE  PRONOUNS-  OR   GROUND-FORMS. 


Singular. 

I.e. 

N;N ,  {'rr-^) 

/ 

2.  c. 

riN,  n;N  (nn:i<) 

thou 

3.  m. 

N^n  (=in\^i,  in:N 

=in 

Prov.  25:20.  like  the  Syr.)       he 
3.  f.       N^n(Nn'^NOn\^,)        she 


I.e. 

2.  m. 

2.  f. 

3.  m. 

3.  f. 


Plural. 

■  \  "ji/an,  i?an  >      they 

2.  The  suffix  (or  inseparable)  pronouns  are  appended 
to  verbs,  to  the  signs  of  cases  (§  60)  and  prepositions,  or 
to  nouns.  In  the  last  case  they  are  usually  translated  by 
possessive  pronouns,  though  the  Genitive  of  personal  pro- 
nouns would  more  exactly  express  them ;  exactly  as  in 
Greek,  naxrjg  fiov,  &c.  The  following  are  the  suffixes  at- 
tached to  verbs. 

2.m.  ^_) 

2.f.  r-.,"]^.,  r^.y 


3.m. 
3.  f. 


me 
thee 

n-,  (Nn,)  her 


us 


you 
them 


Which  of  the  forms  is  to  be  used  in  each  particular  case,  is  explain- 
ed in  §  16.  where  also  will  be  found  an  explanation  of  the  §o-called 
Nun  epenthetic,  which  is  frequently  inserted  between  the  verbal  form 
and  its  suffix. 

3.  The  suffixes  of  nouns  are  divided  again,  into  two 
classes,  viz.  those  attached  to  nouns  singular,  and  those  at- 
tached to  nouns  plural.  The  latter  are  expressed  by 
somewhat  lengthened  forms,  in  which  the  '^  of  the  plural 
termination  commonly  appears.  They  are  generally  the 
following. 


I.e.   ••_ 


I.    SUFFIXES  TO  NOUNS  SINGULAR. 

Singular  suffixes.  Plural  suffixes. 

7111/  n:_ 

2.f  ^;.,  ^v(  %         ]l^'  ^'"^    } 

3.m.n^.  his  -T-j   /j3^j^) 

3.  f  n_  ,  (in.  bibl.  Ch.  r-,^)     her  y 


2.m.^_  ) 


pn,(nin)) 


our 
your 

their 


^  8.    PERSONAL  AND  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


29 


Note  1.  Twice,  instead  of  n_  appears  N-  Dan.  4:  15.  5:8;  the 
Targumists  wrote  likewise  "^Tii  Gen.  1: 12, 21.  or  with  the  full  orthogra- 
phy n"'_  ..  Appended  to  the  words  iN ,  hN  and  tih  which  before  sufF. 
take  the  forms  t:iN  ,  etc.,  the  suff.  of  the  2d  and  3d  per.  sing,  take  the 
forms  ^  ,'^ri ,  Nrj ;  which  forms  do  not  elsewhere  occur  as  noun-suffixes. 

The  same  forms  are  attached  to  prepositions,  (excepting  such  as  are 
originally  plural  nouns,  §  44.  2.)  and  to  the  signs  of  cases  b  ,  n^  ,  etc. ; 
as  ■'b  ,  ""S ,  nn^ ,  etc.   See  below  §  44. 

II.  SUFFIXES  TO  NOUNS  PLURAL. 


Singular  suffixes. 

1.  c. 

'I 

2.  m. 

t--H  } 

2.  f 

T.-->^^.>  * 

3.  m. 

■^m,  •>! 

my 
thy 

his 
3.  f    Nn  J  ,  (n-*^  Dan.  7:7,19.)  her 


Plural  suffixes. 

N3''_*  our 


your 
their 


Note  1.  These  suffixes  are  regularly  appended  however,  only  to  plu- 
rals masculine.  Indeed,  it  is  from  the  termination  of  such  nouns,  that 
the  ■*  comes,  which  appears  in  the  suffix  of  the  2d  per.  sing,  and  in  all  the 
plural  suffixes.  Feminines  frequently  take  the  sing.  suff.  ''_. ,  fi_,  etc. 
Gen.  20:  17.  Dan.  2:  32.  5:  2.  Ez.  4:  17.  6:  18.  Is.  1:  4.  Prov.  1:  18. 
Gen.  47:  9.  In  Syriac  this  is  constantly  the  case.  The  Chaldee  ex- 
hibits a  medium  between  the  usage  of  the  Hebrew  and  that  of  the  Sy- 
riac. 

Note  2.  The  suffix  !]"'_  is  in  some  editions  written  ^^^_  or  '^'^■'.-;  • 
Frequently  it  appears  abbreviated  ^_  Dan.  5:  10.  2  Sam.  11:8,24.  Ps. 
119:  4. — So  also  the  feminine  '!^1_  is  in  many  editions  written  ^—  ,  so 
that  the  genders  are  not  distinguished.  Isa.  49:  18.  Ven. 

Note  3.  The  possessive  pronoun  may  be  expressed  separately  from 
its  noun  by  appending  suffixes  to  b'^'7  (comp.  of  the  relative  '^"7  ,  and 
b  ,  sign  of  the  dative  case;)  or,  more  rarely,  to  T'n  (comp.  of  '^'7  relative 
and  "  ,  sign  of  the  genitive  case,)  e.  g.  ^b'^'7  ^btt  ,  thy  king,  lit.  the  king 
who  [is]  to  thee.  Usage  has  however  made  these  particles  mere  signs  of 
the  genitive  ;  for  even  to  them  '7  (relative)  is  prefixed. 

Note  4.  Prepositions  which  are  originally  plural  nouns  take  the  suf- 
fixes of  pi.  nouns ;  e.  g.  """ins ;  "TfiTsni?  ,  "^niby  ,  l^D''?.''? .  See  §  44;  2. 
So  also  do  n\\  [=Heb.  •>:;.■;]  and  iSas  ,  as;  e.  g.  "^nW^ ,  ''nirT'N  ,  ]itl'^^.3, 
and  the  suffix  must  be  rendered  in  the  nominative  case. 


30  §  ^-    OTHER  PRONOUNS. 

§  ^'  Other  Pronouns. 

1.  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are,  sing.  masc.  '?|'l 
(^i'^'l  Gen.  37:  19.  "^^^^  Job  9:  24.),  "j'^,  'j'^'^  ('j'^'in  Jer. 
26:  9.);  fem.  '^m,  «'l;  com.  'jS'n,  fiiD'l,  (HD^,,)  'j3'^  (Ps. 
24:  6,  52:  8.);  this,  that;  plur.  com.  ^^'i^^,  nVfii,  't?i?.,  '^^.i? 

Note.  With  the  Hebrew  article,  Nirtrr ,  iC^N"  (Ex.  20: 1.)  are  equiva- 
lent to  our  expressions  this  very,  precisely  this.  So  also  are  the  forms 
«in^N ,  N'^n'^it,  Nn\\  (Ruth  1: 16.  Lam.  1:  4.) 

2.  The  Relative  Pronoun  Is  "^  (as  a  prefix),  or  ^''^  (as  a 
separate  word),  of  both  genders  and  both  numbers.  It 
designates  regularly  the  Nominative  or  Accusative.  How 
the  other  obhque  cases  are  indicated,  see  in  Syntax  §  60. 

3.  The  Interrogative  Pronouns  are  expressed,  sometimes, 
according  to  the  Hebrew  analogy,  by  1^  who?  of  per- 
sons, (whence  13^  for  in  1^  Prov.  20:  6.  27:  4.)  and  i«^ 
(n^)  what?  of  things;  sometimes,  by  prefixing  the  inter- 
rogative particle  "^i^  iothe  demonstrative  pronoun-,  ■j'^T'l^  m. 
5<T^fi<  f.  The  latter  mode  is  rather  more  expressive,  who 
indeed  ? 

On  the  mode  of  designating  the  reflexive  and  recipro- 
cal sense  of  pronouns,  compare  Syntax,  §  49,  1. 


<5,  10.    VERBS  j    DERIVATION  AND   INFLF.CTION. 

CHAPTER  III. 

VERBS. 


31 


§  10.  Derivation  and  injlection  of  verbs  generally. 

1.  Verbs,  as  in  Hebrew,  are  generally  primitive.  A 
few  are  formed  from  nouns,  and  are  called  denomina- 
tives;  e.  ff.  DID  to  eradicate,  Ilj"]ntl)>i  to  take  root,  from 
tJniri  a  root;  ^^tli^Tl  to  pitch  a  tent,  from  i<7rii<  a  tent; 
y^ll^ntlJJ^  to  be  acquainted,  from  y^i\l2  an  acquaintance. 

2.  The  roots  of  verbs  consist,  generally,  of  those  con- 
sonants which  are  pronounced  in  one  syllable  with  the 
vowel  _  under  the  middle  radical.  A  few  consist  of  four 
consonants  [quadriliterals],  and  are  pronounced  with  _.  __ ;  as 
^31&  to  cover.  The  root  is  the  third  person  singular  mas- 
culiiie  Praeter,  and  from  this  are  derived,  not  only  the  oth- 
er parts  of  the  active  voice,  but  a  passive  consisting  of 
the  same   moods  and  tenses. 

Other  Conjugations. 

3.  As  in  Hebrew,  other  forms,  derived  from  the  root 
and  analogous  to  it,  are  employed  to  express  various 
modifications  of  the  original  sense.  These  also  are  con- 
jugated through  an  active  and  a  passive  voice.  They 
are  generally  two,  pDj?  and  ?tpj?&5-  These,  as  well  as 
the  ground-form,  are  called  conjugations ;  so  that  we  may 
reckon  in  Chaldee  three  usual  conjugations,  each  inclu- 
ding an  active  and  a  passive  voice.  For  the  unusual 
conjugations,  Shaphel,  Poel,  Pilel,  see  §  14. 

4.  Characteristics  and  signification  of  the  conjugations, 
(l)  The  2d  conjugation  or  Pael  is  characterised,  like  the 
Hebrew  Piel,  by  Dagesh  forte  in  the  2d  radical,     (a) 


32  §  10.    VERBS  ;    DERIVATION  AND  INFLECTION. 

Its  signification  is  usually  causative^  v\'hcn  Peal  is  intran- 
sitive ;  as  DDn  to  be  wise,  QSH  to  make  wise ;  "lln  to 
be  white,  IIH  to  make  white,  to  wash.  (6)  Fi'cquently 
Pael  has  merely  the  sense  of  exhibiting,  regarding,  or  treat- 
ing a  person  as  being  or  doing  what  is  expressed  in  Peal ; 
e.  g.  2'TD  to  lie,  D'lS  to  regard  one  as  a  liar,  to  convict  one 
of  falsehood,  (c)  Sometimes  it  is  privative;  as  'Jui'M  to 
remove  ashes  ;  'ppD  to  clear  out  stones. 

(2)  The  characteristic  of  the  3d  conjugation  or  Aphel 
is  i>i  (sometimes  t])  prefixed  to  the  root,  and  the  vowel 
_  (or  _)  in  the  last  svHable.  In  signification  it  is  usually 
(a)  causative  of  Peal  (especially  in  verbs  which  want 
Pael,  though  both  are  sometimes  found;  e.  g.  p'QD ,  'p')p)' 
Thus  'ujjb  to  put  on,  HJilVfi^  to  cause  [another^  to  put  on, 
to  clothe,  JiCJn  to  sin,  "^l^TM^  to  seduce  or  entice  to  sin. 
Sometimes,  (6)  like  Pael,  it  has  merely  the  sense  of  exhibit- 
ing, &c.  e.  g.  P'm2J<  to  show  [a  persoti]  to  be  righteous,  to 
treat  as  righteous,  to  acquit. 

Note.  The  same  conjugations  are  not  in  use  in  all  verbs.  A  large 
number  appear  only  in  Peal,  others  in  Pael  only  ;  for  examples  of  the 
later  compare  "i73t ,  liJl ,  fjID  ,  nbO  .  Where  the  same  verb  has,  both 
Pael  and  Aphel,  these  two  conjugations,  for  the  most  part,  have  different 
senses  ;  e.  g.  '^\')2  to  advise,  ^^HN  to  constitute  a  king. 

5.  The  Passives  of  all  the  conjugations  are  character- 
ized by  the  preformative  syllable  flJi .  The  n  of  this 
prefix  is  sometimes  assimilated  to  the  succeeding  letter,  or 
transposed  with  it,  as  follows. 

(a)  When  the  active  form  commences  with  *! ,  tJ  or  D , 
the  n  of  the  passive  prefix  is  assimilated,  and  expressed  by 
Dagesh  forte  in  the  following  letter;  e.g.   '^D'^^{,  riSuDi^, 

"l!3n^{,  from  1^1,  D'Dp  and  "linn  .  Less  frequently,  and 
only  in  the  later  Targums,  does  the  same  assimilation  take 
place   before  other  letters  ;   e.  g.  D'^flSJ^  it  is  written,  for 

n^nsriwv,  Eccl.  12:  10. 


§    11.    REGULAR  VERBS  ;  INFLECTION.  33 

(b)  U  the  ground-form  commences  with  a  sibilant,  [T, 
0,2,  123  or  dj  the  D  is  inserted  after  that  letter ;  e.  g. 
pDn  a3^{ .  But  after  T  j  it  is  changed  into  1 ;  as  'jS'^Ti^ 
from  "jlDT. 

The  signification  of  these  forms  is  not  merely  passive, 
but  sometimes  reflexive  or  reciprocal;  as  tlP^QriJi  to  con- 
sult together ;  frequently,  even  in  the  sense  of  the  Greek 
middle  voice;  e.  g.  "jDnDi^t  to  get  an  advantage. 

Moods  and  Tenses. 

6.  All  these  conjugations  have,  in  both  active  and  pas- 
sive voices,  the  Praeter  and  Future  tenses,  the  Infinitive 
and  Imperative  moods,  and  the  Participle.  The  actives 
have  two  participles  throughout.  All  these  arise  out  of 
the  ground-form,  mediately  or  immediately,  by  the  inser- 
tion of  formative  letters,  or  by  a  different  pronunciation  of 
the  radicals,  or  by  both  together.  The  different  per- 
sons of  the  Praeter  and  Imperative  are  formed,  as  in  He- 
brew, by  suffixes,  and  the  Future  by  prefixes  and  suffixes, 
originally  fragments  of  personal  pronouns. 

7.  Verbs  are  either  regular  or  irregular.  The  former 
class  includes  all  those  verbs,  the  radicals  of  which  re- 
main unchanged  throughout  all  their  inflections  ;  the  lat- 
ter, those  which  suffer  a  change  or  omission  of  one  or 
two  radicals. 

§  11.  Inflection  of  the  Regular  Verb. 

1 .  Most  nearly  connected  with  the  Praeter  stands  the 
Imperative,  from  which  the  future  is  derived.  The  Im- 
perative of  Peal  is  characterised  by  the  vowel  _  ,  those 
of  Pael  and  Aphel  are  pronounced  like  the  Praeter. 

2.  The  Future  is  derived  from  the  Imperative  by  pre- 
fixing '1 ;  which  is  pronounced  in  Peal  with  _ ,  in  Pael  with 

5 


34  <^  1 1 .    REGULAR  VERBS  ;    INFLECTION. 

_ ,  in  Aphel  (where  the  5^  suffers  eHslon)  with  _  ,  and 
in  all  the  Passives  with  _.  [n**]. 

3.  The  Infinitive  is  formed  from  the  Praeter  in  two 
ways,  (a)  In  Peal  by  the  prefix  !Q .  (6)  In  the  other 
conjugations  and  in  all  the  Passives,  by  the  sufformative 
syllables  >? 

4.  The  Participles  are  also  derived  from  the  Praeter, 
and  are  formed,  (a)  In  Peal,  by  merely  changing  the  vow- 
els, 7Ljp ,  p'^Dp  ;  (6)  In  all  the  other  conjugations  and  in 
the  Passives,  by  prefixing  12  which  is  pronounced  m  Pael 
with  _ ,  in  Aphel  with  _  and  in  the  Passives  with  _ ,  ri'Q . 
Of  the  two  Participles  in  the  Active  forms,  the  first  has 
_  constantly  in  the  last  syllable,  and  is  active  ;  the  second 
has  _  in  the  ultiaiate,  with  a  passive  signification. 

5.  The  formation  of  the  persons  is  more  simple  in  the 
Praeter  and  Imperative,  in  the  Future  more  complex. 
The  following  table  exhibits  the  letters  and  syllables  em- 
ployed in  forming  the  different  persons. 

Sing.       3.  m.         3.  f.      2.  m.        2.  f.        I.e.      PI.  3.  m.      3.  f.        2.  m.        2.  f.  I.e. 

Praeter.       _      n_      rj-      n_     n_  1_      N_    I^Pl-      "JP!-     it3- 

Imperat.  -.       ">-  T_    n:_ 

Future       _"     _n      _n  '}"'_n    _S<      '}1_"'     'j-"'    -jri-n    l-Pi       _2 

6.  When  sufformatives  are  added  which  take  the  tone, 
(a)  The  vowels  _,  _  and  _   (the  latter  only  in  the  Fut. 

Peal)  of  the  final  syllable  of  the  ground-form,  are  dropped, 
provided  the  sufformative  commences  with  a  vowel. 
Those  which  precede  ^  and  i<—  of  the  .3d  person  plural 
Praeter,  and  the  termination  of  the  Imp.,  since  these  suf- 
formatives do  not  take  the  tone,  are  retained. 

(6)  In  the  3d  pers.  fem.  and  1st  pers.  com.  sing.  Praet. 
in  Peal  and  Ithpeel,  where  two  consonants  would,  accord- 
ing to  the  above  rule,  come  together  without  a  vowel, 
Hhireq  is  introduced  to  facilitate  pronunciation. 


§  12.  REGULAR  VERBS  J  NOTES  ON  THE  PARADIGM.      35 

Note.  The  principal  variations  of  the  Chaldee,  from  the  mode  of 
forming  the  persons  in  Hebrew,  are,  that,  in  the  former,  the  2d  p.  sing. 
Praet.  has,  generally,  no  distinction  of  gender,  while  the  3d  p.  plur.  has  ; 
and  that  the  3.  plur.  fem.  Fut.  takes  "^  instead  of  n  for  its  preformative. 
The  sufFormatives  of  the  Future  (e.  g.  ■}_)  are  capable  of  an  easier  ex- 
planation than  in  Hebrew. 

^  12.  JYotes  on  the  paradigm  of  the  Regular  Verbs. 

I.  Generally. 

1.  Forms  with  _  are  often  written  fully  ("'_.)  or  even  with  —  ,  e.  g. 

a.  Ising.  and  2.  f  plur.  Praeter  ;  as  n"'r:q'4J  Gen.  3:  10.  (n"^3?7:'4; 
Pseudo-Jonathan,)  ]"'ri155'.  Ex.  1:  18.    Ps.  Jon. 

b.  Pael  and  Aphel ;'  e.  g.  ■j-'pnN  2  K.  6:  23.   nb^V.^  Ps.  16:  2. 

c.  The  Part.  act.  in  Pe.  e.  g.  nrt;  Dan.  4:  10,' 20.  rT^D:  Gen.  3: 15. 
Jeru.  Targ.     "lip  Gen.  3:  9.  Pseudo-Jon.  should  doubtless  be  read  ^iD  . 

d.  The  Participle  Peil  sometimes,  though  seldom  appears  in  a  con- 
tracted form  ;  as  bpn  Dan.  5:  27. 

2.  Praeter.  The  2.  p.  sing.  masc.  sometimes  as  Nribl^JP  Prov.  2^:  8. 
2  Sam.  14:  13.  The  1  st  pers.  sing.  m.  sometimes  appears  in  the  form 
rr^btsp  ,  Gen.  3:  10,  13.  Pseud.  Jon. ;  or  even  like  the  2d  person;  e.g. 
N^Tp?  >  Cren.  3:  22.  Pseud.  Jon.  The  3.  p.  pi.  m.  sometimes  in  the 
later  Targums  takes  a  paragogic  );  e.g.  "JTI^?:  Gen.  3:  7.  ']in3'v23 
Ps.  148:  7.  The  fem.  sometimes  appears  ending  in  "]-;  as  'j'^'^Nt 
Ruth  1:  10.   'i^J2ii  1:  19. 

3.  Future.  Instead  of  the  formative''  the  Targum  of  Proverbs,  in 
accordance  with  the  Syriac,  exhibits  also  3 ;  e.  g.  b^3T3  Prov.  16:  10, 
etc.  Compare  Dathe,  de  ratione  consensus  version.  Chald.  et  Syr,  Prov. 
Leipzig  1764.  4.  pp.  16.— Instead  of  "iT,  appears  n  as  termination  of  the 
3dp.pl.  m.  Ez.  4:  12.  ^Itonv 

4.  Infinitive.  The  biblical  Chaldee  has  nl  sometimes  instead  of 
ixl  termination  of  all  the  Inf  excepting  Peal.  Dan.  2: 12,  14.  Ez.  7: 14. 
Dan.  6:  4.  In  the  Targums  sometimes  appears  m  (without  suffixes) 
Esth.  1:5.  Ps.  102:23.  Sometimes  the  characteristic  ending  N_  is 
omitted ;  as  1  Sam.  26:  25.  30:  8.  Pael,  Aphel  and  the  Passives  have 
sometimes  a  73  prefixed  to  the  Inf.  e.  g.  NoVn^a  Sol.  S.  1:  7.  N'v^NSa 
Deut.  32:  23.  Jerusalem  Targ.  Forms  like  "^sibn  Lev.  13:  7.  Jon. 
■^binnN  Job  1:  13.  ""qiDpN  Deut.  18:  10.  Jer.  T.,  with  paragogic  ■•_, 
are  more  rare. 

5.  Passives.  In  the  later  Targums,  instead  of  riN  ,  occurs  for  the 
1st.  conj.  n: ;  e.  g.  ~)D'3n;  1  Sam.  23:  7  ;  and  this  agrees  with  the  Rab- 
binical conj.  Nithpael.  In  the  Inf  of  all  the  conj.  n53 ;  as  N73j53n73 
Ex.  21:  20.  Jer.  T.    i^p^Vnpyq  Deut.  32: 1.  Jer.  T. 


36      ^   12.  REGULAR  VERBS  ;  NOTES  ON  THE  PARADIGM. 

II.  Notes  on  the  several  conjugations. 

1.  Peal.  a.  Some  verbs,  especially  such  as  are  intransitive,  take  _ 
(■'_)  or  _  ("^_)  and  a  few  T  as  the  characteristicvowel  of  the  Praeter ; 
e.g.  TrN^  to  be  evil,  sNitO  to  be  good,  '2n'^  to  sit,  ^^'D''^  to  lie  (recline), 
?lj5n  to  be  strong,  T^iQ^  to  sleep.  Gen.  2:  21.  ii'lh  to  be  dry.  These 
vowels  remain  in  those  persons  where  _  is  usually  retained ;  e.  g.  nVNip 
Prov.  30:  7.  N3rN\p  Ez.  5:  9.  =ipVD  4:  12.  iniiri  Jer.  49:  4.  The  3d 
p.  sing.  fern,  also  retains  its  vowel ;  as  ri^l3l2  Ez.  4:  24.  n5"i"lf.  Ezek. 
26:  2. — Such  verbs  in  _  or  _  form  the  Imp.  in  _  ,  _  or  _  ;  as  '•:J/^b 
1  K.  22:  30.  b.TN  Gen.  22:  2.  n-ip  Job  2:  5;  the  Future  in  ^ ,  _  or 
1 ;  as  uJ3Dn  Dan.  5:  16.  n-inPi  Deut.  28:  30.  f]ipn^  Gen.  31:  35. 
When  two  forms  of  the  Future,  as  -  and  _ ,  or  -..  and  T  coexist  in  the 
same  verb,  they  have  different  significations ;  e.  g.  ahp/]  Num.  1:  51. 
[who]  will  approach,  (Future),  '^^p.l  Isa.  5:  19.  let  [it]  approach,  (Opta- 
tive), etc.     But  verbs  in  i  form  the  Fut.  in  =1 ;  e.  g.  '!]T/3n';  Ps.  121:  4. 

b.  The  Infinitive,  in  the  later  Targums,  has  sometimes  the  termina- 
tion N_;  e.g.  tV'iJ'Da  Ps.  118:  7.  Sometimes  it  has  the  form  -tip's. 
Job  29:  6.  Ruth  4:  6;  less  frequently  like  the  Heb.  biDj^  or  bit:p ; 
e.  g.  Gen.  49:  6.  Ruth  2:  1.  Ps.  105:  14.  (even  with  suff.),  or  as  Inf. 
absol.  "^biup  Lev.  13:  7.  Pseud.  Jon. 

c.  The  Imperative  exhibits,  in  a  few  instances,  the  full  orthogra- 
phy b=lt:p  ,  2  Sam.  13:  20.  Ps.  31:  24.  It  sometimes  occurs  with  Hho- 
lem  in  accordance  with  Hebrew  analogy  ;  as  pna  Ps.  26:  2;  especially 
with  suffixes;  e.g.  "'^bitip  1  Sam.  20:  8. 

2.  Ithpeel.  The  last  syllable  sometimes  takes  _  ("'_) ;  e.  g.  pnr[i'ipl^ 
Dan.  2:  44.  comp.  2K.  7:  4.  Prov.  3:  5.  Gen.  9:  7.  1i\-^nN  Ecci.'l2: 
11. — Preformative  sometimes  DN  ,  Dan.  7:  15. 

3.  Pael.  N  preformative  of  1.  sing.  Fut.  has  sometimes  -.;  e.g. 
'^D5^t  Isa.  42:  9.  tJJ'biDN  63:  3. — As  in  Hebrew,  Dagesh  forte  is  some- 
times omitted  when  the  middle  radical  has  Sheva.  Heb.  Gram.  ^  214. 
note  2. 

4.  Ithpaal.  Final  vowel  sometimes  _  or  t. ;  e.g.  tt22nN  Hos.  4: 
11.  ^•'sr.nN  Ps.  105:  25  ]p3n73  Gen.  3:  15.  Jer.  T.  l7a1T73  Isa.  53:  5.  is 
a  Heb.  Pual  form. 

5.  Aphel.  In  the  biblical  Chaldee,  and  occasionally  in  the  Targums 
m  appears,  as  the  preformative  of  this  conj.  (blOpn),  and  even  in  the 
Fut.  and  Part,  after  the  characteristic  prefixes  ;  e.  g,  1T''i|'nfi  Ez.  5:  12. 
«iT-;pn  Dan.  5:  29.  ^B'^iTj^  7:  24-  p^T:r;n  Ez.  4:  13.  I^a-ipn^  6: 10.— 
Hiphil  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  Aphel  in  the  biblical  Chaldee ;  e.  g. 
b'«nNn  Dan.  5:  20.  7:  22. 


§   13.    PARTICIPLES  ;    PERSONAL  INFLECTION.  37 

6.  Ittaphal.  For  this  conjugation,  which  indeed  elsewhere  is  seldom 
found,  the  biblical  Chaldee  constantly  exhibits  Hophal;  e.  g.  Ez.  4:  15. 
Dan.  4:  33.  7:  11.  (with  Qamets  Hhateph  or  Shureq). 

§  13.  Personal  inflection  of  the  Participles. 

1.  The  Participles  of  all  the  conjugations,  in  order  to 
supply  the  want  of  a  Present  tense,  are,  as  in  Hebrew, 
constructed  with  the  separate  Personal  Pronouns  of  the 
first  and  second  persons;  e.  g.  JJiDii  b^'^'p  I  kill.  Beside 
this  mode,  the  Chaldee  has  one  peculiar  to  itself,  viz.  to 
inflect  the  Participle  by  the  addition  of  pronominal  frag- 
ments, thus  forming  in  fact  a  new  tense.  The  two  Par- 
ticiples Peal  are,  after  this  mode,  inflected  as  follows. 


First 
Sing. 

Participle. 

Plur. 

Second 
Sing. 

Participle. 

Plur. 

2  m.  rhp;p* 

■j^n^yop 

^^-^'^P. 

"I'ln^^'^Dp 

2  f.  ^nVqp 

i^>;^.p. 

^Thyci}>^ 

W.V"^P. 

1  m.  i<DVj!? 

irV^B 

^t'T^?. 

ir^^'^p. 

1  f-i^yrqi? 

1?V^E 

T        T        'It 

I?V'^P 

2.  In  the  biblical  Chaldee  a  kind  of  passive  preterite 
tense  Is  in  use,  formed  by  appending  the  suffbrmatives  of 
the  Praeter  to  the  Part.  Peil.  It  takes  the  place  of  Ith- 
peel. 

1.  c.  9.  f.  9.  m.  3.  f.  3.  m. 

nb^DjP      ri^^Dp  vsn-  nb^'op    n^^Ljp     ^''Dj?  Sing» 
i(5b;"jp    iri.^;pp.      T'^^'^'^P    ^^y!?,    ^^''"^P  ^^u^. 

Comp.  Dan.  5:  27,  28,  30.  7:  4,  6,  11.  Ezra  5:  14.  That  these  are 
not  to  be  considered  forms  of  Praeter  Peal  with  _.  is  plain,  partly  from 
their  passive  signification,  and  partly  from  the  fact  that  other  forms  of 
the  same  are  usually  employed  in  the  Praeter  in  an  active  sense. 

*  Qdtddth,  not  qollath,  §  2.  9.  a.  The  learner  should  bear  in  mind  that  a 
knowledge  of  forms  alone  can  enable  him  to  distinguish  Qamets  Hhateph  from 
Qamets. 


38  §§1^'   l'^'    VERBS  WITH  GUTTURALS. 

§  14.   Unfrequent  Conjugations  and  Qiiadriliterals. 

1.  As  in  Hebrew,  certain  unfrequent  conjugations  occur 
some  of  which  are  confined  to  particular  classes  of  irreg- 
ular verbs. 

a.  Poel  and  Ithpoal,  especially  in  verbs  '^y ;  characte- 
ristics, same  as  in  Hebrew;  e.  g.  pSlO  Hos.  13:  5,  ")D1D 
Num.  11:  12. 

b.  Pole!  and  IllipoM,  in  verbs  13? ;  e.  g.  Dtl^in  Ps.  75:  8. 
Dan.  4:  34.  DiniinJi  Dan.  5:  23.  Ps.  107:  25. 

c.  Palpel,  formed  by  repeating  the  first  and  third  rad- 
icals, and  Ithpcdpal;  e.  g.  b^h'2  Gen-  11:  9.  D'^D^D,  (from 
nrj)   Judg.   3:  22.   '!]';ip'l   (from  '^l'^)    Ps.  143:  3.  Comp. 

§§  19,  22. 

d.  Shaphel  and  Ishtaphal;  e.  g.  bbpp_  Ez.  4:  12.  Gen. 
49:  10.  "ini^nd.^  Gen.  49:  10.  bbpVV^]  Ez.  4:  13. 

N^:£^-i:  Ez.  6:  15.  is  Shaphel  from  uXl£':.  Gen.  3:  2  without  N ,  ^2£"'-2; ; 
Passive  ■':i"'r,T^N  to  procure  the  cotnpletion  of  a  thing,  to  finish. 

2.  Quadriliteral  verbs  follow  usually  the  form  of  Pael ; 
e.  g.  iTJJP  (Syr.  ..,^t.^\i3  i-  q-  xan^yope^v)  Job  37:  20. 
^SID  20:  15.  D5"ir[  to  interpret.  The  origin  of  these 
verbs  is  to  be  explained,  for  the  most  part,  as  in  Hebrew. 
See  Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  861,  seq. 

Note.  Altogether  pecuUar  is  the  verb  zPV'd  {::^T'<2:)  Dan.  3: 28.  Fut. 
n^T^'iJ^  Isa.  53:  11.  Inf.  nnr'^  Dan.  3:  15.  Part.  n^T^^»  Dan.  6:  28. 
Pass,  n-irn-^itv?  Gen.  32:  30.  Syr.  :ii1aj9.  This  Chaldee  form  should 
however  be  regarded  rather  as  a  kind  of  Poel  than  as  a  quadriliteral. 

§  15.   V^erbs  with  Gutturals. 

1.  The  gutturals  (i^ ,  51 ,  H ,  5?,  and  to  some  extent  al- 
so, "))  present  the  same  peculiarities  as  in  Hebrew.  It 
will  be  sufficient  therefore  to  give  examples  of  the  most 
important  forms. 


^16.    REGULAR  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  39 

2.  Verbs  Pe  guttural.     Peal,  Praet.  ^^3?  f.  D^ul^  1.  c. 

n^ny ,  Imp.  w,  ^"in^.,  Inf.  "oyri^,  "^in^..  Fut.  ni-m, 
pnr,  Participles  ID:?,  T2y  .—Ithpeei,  "I'^ym,  nn:^n&{. 

— Pae7,  Praet.  12:!? ,  Fut.  12:^^  .—Ithpaal,  IS^ni^  .—Jphel, 

Praet.  in::?>^,")Dn5i,  n^nni^*,  Fut.  q^^^n!,  DEn:,  Part. 

3.  Verbs  Ajin  guttural.  Pea/,  Praet.  IHS;  Imp.  1^1^.  5 
(■jinS);  Inf.  inn^q;  Fut.  ]nn^;  Part.  ]t72*  1^12.—//^ 

pee/,  jnnnw^,  •j'^niDriii.— Pae^'dnn.— Aphei,  innvx. 

4.  Verbs   Lamedh    guttural.      Peal,  Praet.   HlDp  iem. 

nnD'd;  Imp.  nsd ,  ^n^d ;  Fut.  n^pv  nVp';  (3?i"t:p^); 
Part.*  ny-o,  m;6  .—itiipeei,  n^nd>{,  fem".  nn:Dnip.v. 

— Pac7  Praet.    HSp,   Fut.   n^t\— Ithpaal,   Uj^m^ — 

Jphel,  nSpi^,  n^5*pi^,  1st.  pers.nnStliwVt. 

Note  1.  When  the  first  radical  of  a  verb  Pe  guttural  happens  to  be 
a,  this  letter  is  frequently  dropped  in  Ithpeel  when  it  would  be  without 
a  vowel  (i.e.  would  have  a  composite  Sheva),  and  by  way  of  compensa- 
tion, n  of  the  prefix  takes  Dagesh  forte  ;  e.  g.  ThnN  instead  of  nriNDJ* 
Num.  15:  13.  35:  33.  '  '  '  "' '  ' 

Note  2.  Verbs  Lamedh  guttural  have  the  Praet.  3.  sing.  fem.  some- 
times terminating  in  _  _  or  _  ^  (the  latter  only  in  verbs  nb)  with  the 
tone  on  the  penult ;  e.  g.  nn^N  Gen.  30:  16.  nnaN  Dan.  5:  10.  n"Ti51 
Gen.  16:  3. 

Note  3.  When  the  1st.  radical  takes  a  comp.  Sheva,  verbs  ND  and 
5n3  usually  have  _,  Dan.  2:  9.  Sol.  S.  5:  3. ;  verbs  ho  and  ^D,  general- 

ly  -• 

Note  4.  Forms  like  ]''0'nn  Dan.  7:  22.  belong  not  to  Aphel  but  to 
Hiphil,  and  are  Hebraisms.  " 

§  16.  Regular  Verbs  with  suffix  Pronouns. 

1.  Of  the  suffixes  given  above  in  the  table,  §  8,  2. 
those  vs^hich  begin  with  a  vov^^el,  are  generally  appended 
to  verbal  forms  terminating  in  a  consonant ;  and  vice  versa, 
those  which  begin  with  a  consonant,  to  verbal  forms  ter- 
minating in  a  vowel.       The    Imperative   and    Participles 


40  §  IG.    REGULAIl  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES. 

must  be  excepted,  as  thej  frequently  take  those  suffixes 
(of  the  1st  pers.  sing,  and  plur.)  which  have  no  union- 
vowel  ;   as  "'^bpp^ ,  fi<5  <Pp. . 

2.  The  changes  which  verbs  undergo  in  consequence  of 
the  accession  of  pronominal  suffixes,  respect  chiefly  the 
vowels,  which  are  sometimes  dropped,  sometimes  trans- 
posed.     See  Paradigm  II. 

(a)  Pea/,  Praeter.  Before  suffixes  which  have  a  union- 
vowel  the  3d  pers.  sing.  masc.  has  the  form  b*0'p_ ;  as 
'?|7Dj?  he  killed  thee,  t^yp'0'p_  he  killed  us,  'j'lU^Dj?  he  killed 
them  [those  men].  Before  "ji^J  and  'I'D  the  original  form 
remains.  The  3d  pers.  plur.  becomes  ^i?L3jP ,  (before  ]i5 
and  ]5,  p^DjP,)  the  2d  masc.  ^inVop.  The  2d  pers. 
sing,  remains  unchanged  though  in  a  few  cases  we  have 
for  the  fem.  Tl^pp ,  Jer.  15:  10.  The  1st  pers.  sing, 
takes  the  form  ^^0^,  (rarely  '^n^Dp,  as  Num.  23:  11. 
Jer.  30:  14.  or  T\h^6^^  Gen.  3:  22.'  Pseudo-Jon.)  The 
1st  pers.  plur.  has  the  form  p^S^p  and  takes  suffixes  for 
the  most  part  with  the  union-vowel  _;  e.  g.  '^riD/C^p  we 
killed  him, 

(b)  Future.  The  3d  fem.,  2d  masc,  and  1st  pers. 
sing,  receive  suffixes  precisely  like  the  3d  pers.  masc.  and 
that,  for  the  most  part,  with  Nun  epenthetic.  The  2d  and 
3d  persons  plural  fem.  take  the yorm  of  the  masculine,  i.  e. 
with  suff.  these  forms  are  common.  See  Job  19  :  15. 
Gen.  30:  13.  Ex.  1:  16. 

(c)  Imperative.  Forms  with  __  in  the  2d.  pers.  plur. 
masc.  throw  this  vowel  back  to  the  first  radical  before 
suffixes  ;   e.  g.  "^tV^b^^ii  Ex.  16:  25. 

{d)  The  Inf.  and  Part.  Peal,  having  the  form  of  nouns, 
may  take  the  suffixes  either  of  verbs  or  of  nouns  j  as 
^b'0pl2  and  ^D^Dp5: . 


<^§17.  18.    IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;    PE  NUN.  41 

(e)  In  all  those  persons  of  Pa'el  and  Aphel  which  ter- 
minate in  the  third  radical,  _  is  dropped  before  suffixes 
which  have  a  union  vowel.  The  same  takes  place,  (on 
account  of  the  tone  being  thrown  forward,)  in  the  forms 
l!:rpj^,  ^VopJ^.  The  2d  pers.  sing,  fem.,  the  2d  pers.  plur. 
masc,  and  the  1st  pers.  plur.  in  the  Praeter  receive  suf- 
fixes as  in  Peal. 

{f)  The  Infinitives  of  all  the  conjugations  except  Peal 
take  before  suffixes  the  termination  Hi;  e.  g.  H'Tl'^bt^j^, 
iTT^nvtDpi^'  (Sometimes,  though  rarely,  this  ending  ap 
pears  out  of  the  suffix  state.  Ps.  102 :  32.  Num.  9:  17. 
Est.  1:  5.) 

Note  1.  An  epenthetic  2  is  frequently  inserted  between  the  verb  and 
the  suffix.  This  is  most  common  in  the  Fut.  and  Imp. ;  rare  in  the 
Praet.  (ex.  Ps.  16:  7.  Isa.  63:  9.  Gen.  6:  2.  Jud.  13:  23.  2  K.  20:  13); 
and  still  less  frequent  in  the  Inf  (Prov.  22:  21.  Sol.  S.  6:  11.) 

Note  2.  In  the  Targum  on  Prov.  appears  an  epenthetic  "• ;  e.  g. 
^;naipn,  n^pah,  4:  6,  8. 

§  17.  Irregular  Verbs  generally. 

1.  Of  these  there  are,  as  in  Hebrew,  two  general  di- 
visions, defective  and  quiescent.  The  irregularity  generally 
respects  but  one  letter.  Verbs  which  exhibit  irregularity 
in  tw^o  of  their  radicals   are  called   doubly  anomalous.^  §  24. 

2.  The  first   general  division  comprehends  two  classes, 

viz.  IB ,  and  TJi ;  the  second,  four,  viz.  iib,  "^b  (iS),  IIP  ("'V), 

and  |}<7.      The  last  include  also  such  verbs  as  in  Hebrew 

belong  to  the  class  TvP . 

Note.  The  division  of  irregular  verbs  into  defective  and  quiescent,  is 
not  of  special  importance,  and  is  neglected  by  the  most  recent  gramma- 


§  18.    Verbs  Pe  JVun. 

The  irregularity  in  these  verbs  results  from  the  same 
cause,  and  is  almost  throughout   the   same   as  in  Hebrew. 


42  §19.    IRREGULAR    VERBS;    AYIN  DOUBLED. 

1.  The  letter  3 ,  where  it  would  otherwise  terminate 
a  mixed  syllable,  is  assimilated  to  the  succeeding  conso- 
nant;  e.g.  pD^^  for  p£3^. 

2.  In  the  Imper.  Peal,  where  D  would  regularly  stand 
without  a  vowel  in  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  that  letter 
is  dropped ;  e.  g.  pS  for  pD3 .  Beside  these,  which  are 
common  to  Hebrew, 

3.  Some  forms  have,  usually,  a  different  characteristic 
vowel  from  that  of  regular  verbs  :  thus  the  Future  is  gen- 
erally like  pE']  or  piS^'  Aphel  p^S^i.  In  the  Imp.  the 
forms  p'lS,  pID  and  pS  are  about  equally  common,  though 
not  ordinarily  found  in  the  same  verb. 

4.  Ithpeel,  Pael,  and  Ithpaal  present  no  irregularity. 

Note  1.  From  No.  1.  there  are  many  exceptions,  chiefly  in  verbs 
which  have  a  guttural  for  the  second  radical;  e.  g.  Qifi:'^  Is  a.  5:  9, 
^'^r727j  Prov.  29:  13,  (But  nns  is  inflected  according  to  the  rule  above  ; 
as  Fut.  nin;;  [instead  of  nin']],  Aphel  rrilnN).  Also  in  some  others  ; 
e.  g.  inr.  Dan.  2:  16.  "jriDn  Ez.  7:  20.  pi:a  Ps.  91:  7.  p3;n  Ez.  5:  14. 

Note  2.  The  verb  ]n3  takes  _  in  the  Fut.  as  its  characteristic  vow- 
el ;  e.  g.  "jn^Nt  Ex.  25:  16.  ]nn  Deut.  21:  8.  Instead  of  this,  the  biblical 
Chaldee  exhibits  the  full  form  ;  e.  g.  "j^in:"'.  Ez.  7:  20. — Once  im';  Dan. 
2:16. 

§  19.   Verbs  Jiyin  doubled. 

The  anomalies  of  these  verbs,  which  accord  only  in 
part  with  the  same  class  in  Hebrew,  are  particularly  the 
following. 

(«)  The  root  is  a  monosyllable,  with  its  vowel  between 
the  first  and  second  radicals,  in  Peal  (excepting  the  par- 
ticiples), and  in  Aphel ;   and  so,  either 

(1)  No  trace  of  the  doubling  of  the  second  radical  re- 
mains ;  as  is  the  case  in  Peal  Praet.  3d  pers.  sing,  masc, 
2d  masc.  and  fem.,  and  in  the  1st  and  2d  persons  plur.,  in 
the  Imp.  masc.  sing,  and  fem.  plur.,  and  more  rarely  in  the 
1st  Part.;  e.  g.  p'H,  pi^T,  rip^;   or 

(2)  It  is  indicated  by  Dagesh  forte  in  the  2d  radical  in 


§  20.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  j  PE  YODH.  43 

those  persons  of  the  Praet.  and  Imp.  Peal,  the  sufforma- 
tives  of  which  commence  with  a  vowel;  as  TlfJ^,  i^p*!!* 
^p'^;   or,  finally 

(3)  It  is  compensated  by  Dagesh  forte  in  the  first  rad- 
ical in  the  Fut.  and  Inf.  Peal,  and  throughout  Aphel :  as 
P"!*^?  pIT;  or  even  sometimes,  in  Ithpeel,  in  D  of  the  pre- 
formative  syllable  ^l^^ ;  e.  g.  p'^^^^{ . 

(b)  Instead  of  Pael  and  Ithpaal^  which  are  regularly 
formed,  (see  Dan.  4:  10.  7:  20.  Ps.  35:  IS-  42:  6.),  Pal- 
pel  and  Ithpalpal  are  generally  used  ;  as  '^"^y'/'},  ?  p'^p.  2^ » 
Job  9:  17.  30:  14.  Isa.  21:  9.;  or  Poel  and  Ithpoal ;  e.  g. 
Dan.  4:  15.   Job  9:  6.   v|Siin;3 . 

The  Part,  of  Peal  are  usually  regular.  The  second,  or  PeiV,  ap- 
pears once  in  the  form  p"^J?  ^  Ex.  32:  20. 

An  example  of  Ithpeel  regularly  formed,  is  ?'^TanN  Am.  7:  1.  Jer. 
50:  27.  '    ■  ' 

§  20.  Verbs  Pe  Yodh  {Pe  Vav). 

1.  There  are  three  classes  of  verbs  which,  in  the 
ground  form,  have  "^  for  their  first  radical,  viz.  (l)  Verbs 
originally  IS  ;  (2)  Verbs  properly  *<D  ;  and  (3)  Those  in 
which  the  *^  is  not  treated  as  a  quiescent,  but  is  assimila- 
ted like  the  D  of  verbs  "D  . 

2.  Verbs  originally  ID ,  which  constitute  the  most  nu- 
merous class, 

(a)  In  the  Imp.  Peal,  which  is  generally  pronounced  with 
_,  drop  the  first  radical  e.  g.  T"^  for  5?'!'],  DH  for  ^n*]; 

(6)  Retain  it  quiescent  in  _  ,  in  consequence  of  which 
the  last  syllable  takes  ''_  or  '^_  as  its  characteristic  vowel ; 
e.  g.  ^b'^'^,  v]''^'^'^-  In  accordance  with  the  remark  §6. 
c.  (4),  the  quiescent  ^  is,  in  these  forms,  frequently  drop- 
ped;  e.  g.  Prov.  11:  25.  Ps.  104:  4.  Job  3:  4. 

(c)  Resume  their  original  "1 ,  which  quiesces  in  Hholem, 
throughout  conjugation  III.;  e.g.  JriDi*^,  t]''&i''?  CjDiriii; 
comp.  n^in  Hoph.  Job  33:  19. 


44  §  21.  IRREGULAR  VERES  ;  PE  ALEPH. 


Ithpeel  and  the  whole  of  the  2d  conj.  are  for  the  most  part  regular. 
In  the  latter,  some  verbs  retain  1  as  their  first  radical ;  e.  g.  Tyrnpi  Ps. 
88:  13.  w^hSinN  Eccl.  9:  3.  In  Aphel  forms  with  n,  after  the  praefor- 
matives  of  the  Fut.  and  Part,  are  not  uncommon  :  e.g.  i'■^^r^n  Dan.  2: 
5.  5:  17.  Ps.  55:  14. 

3.  The  first  radical  of  verbs  originally  "^D  qulesces, 

(a)  In  Fut.  Pe,  ordinarily  In  _  :  e.  g.  "If^'^'^  2  Kings  1: 
14.  trin^';  Ps.  102:  12.      But  compare  2t:\''.  Isa.  7:  18. 

(b)  In  Aphel,  in  _;  e.  g.  n^'J^'^^  Ps.  49:  19.  Jer.  10: 
5.  Mlc.  1:  8.      But  compare  ^^^\s"Zech.  11:  2. 

The  difference  between  these  two  classes  of  verbs  is  not,  however, 
so  great  as  to  prevent  their  forms  being  frequently  interchanged,  espe- 
cially in  Aphel.  Thus  we  have,  at  the  same  time,  i''t2"'N  and  ^tp.iN 
Gen.  17:  16.  b"'n'-ii<  and  b^'21^, ,  Ps.  66:  6.  "iji^N  and  -iJ^iN  .  p3^ ,  (in 
Heb.  ''Zi)  becomes  in  Aphel  p"^3^N . 

4.  A  class  of  verbs  '^S  assimilate  their  first  radical  to 
the  following  letter,  in  the  Inf  and  Fut.  Peal,  and  in 
Aphel ;  so  that  they  are  in  these  ibrms  entirely  analogous 
to  verbs  "jD.  To  this  class  belong  Til],  Aphel  Tl^^^ii; 
5?:2';,  Aphel  :^^2ri,*Deut.  34:  6.  Jon.;  5^p.\  Aphel  Tpj^iX; 
also  in  some  of  their  forms,  5?'!'' ,  DH'^  and  ^^'^ ;  e.  g.  Irif.  ^"^^Q 
Gen.  15:  13,  niTn  Ps.  133:  1.'  ^^XDNum.  13:  31.  Fut-  y"^"] 
1  Sam.  20:  30.  (even  ::''^D^  Is.  4:  15.  Dan.  2:  9.),  also  y'l^'^ ; 
nn-;  2  Sam.  I6:  is.  ^S^'  Ezek.  7:  19. 

§  21.   Verbs  Pe  Aleph  {(Quiescent). 

I' 
A  few  verbs  iO  are   treated  not  only  as  gutturals,  but 

at  the  same  time  as  quiescents;   viz, 

(a)  n^wS,  ^DwN;  ,  tiniS!,  IDwS! .  The  wV  of  these  verbs,  in 
the  Future  and  Inf.  Peal  qulesces  in  — ;  e.g.  ^^fi^*^,  and 
sometimes  is  even  exchanged  for  ^;  as  'ly^^^,  ")^''53. 
Throughout  Aphel  It  becomes  i ;  as  '^D>S\  ^n>y .  (by]^_ 
Dcut.  32:  13.  is  altogether  peculiar.)  An  Instance  of 
Hophal,  12^^,  occurs  Dan.  7:  11- 


§  22.    IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;    AYIN  VAV.  45 


(b)  '^nwNI ,  vl'^wNI  and  i^DN  frequently  take  in  the  Fut.  and 
Part.  Pael,  the  contracted  form  Cj^J^i^,  vl^.*i52,  in  conse- 
quence of  which  Ji  is  frequently  dropped. 

(c)  The  J^  of  some  others  is  dropped  in  Ithpaal  and 
compensated  by  Dagesh  forte  in  D  of  the  prefix,  which 
also  receives  the  vowel  which  belonged  to  i^ ;  e.  g.  l^niX 
for  n3wSn^{  1  Sam.  2:  5.   Ezek.  47:  11. 

§  22.   Verbs  Ayin  Vav  (Ayin  Yodh.) 

The  commutation  of  1  and  '',  in  these  verbs,  is  more 
abundant  in  Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.  The  following 
particulars  are  worthy  of  notice. 

J.  In  the  first  conjugation  (with  the  exception  of  the 
1st  Part,  which  has  the  form  DJtp)  and  in  the  third,  these 
verbs  are  monosyllabic  throughout ;  as  Dp  ,  Qp^  ,  Q'^pJX  . 
The  preformatives  of  the  Fut.  and  Inf.  of  both  conjuga- 
tions generally  have  _ ,  though  in  the  later  Targums,  they 
are  not  unfrequently  pointed  with  _ ,  _  or  _. ;  e.g.  Ruth 
2.  17.  Gen.  27:  4.  Zech.  1:  16.  Ps^66:  19-  The  form 
'!|n\  Fut.  Peal  from  '^^n,  Ez.  5:  5.  6:  5.,  is  entirely  pe- 
culiar. 

Note.  The  2d  Part.  Peal  sometimes  like  the  Inf.  t3ip  ,  Dan.  6:  18. 

2.  In  IthpeeJ,  the  first  radical  is  pronounced  with  _, 
and  the  n  of  the  preformative  doubled,  Dpn&{.  In  the 
later  Targums  occurs  also  the  lengthened  form  DprT^i^ 
Ex.  40:  17.  Hhireq  something  takes  the  place  of  Qa- 
mets;  e.g.  D^pn^V  Jer.  33:  22.  Gen.  38:26.  Jer.  T.Dan. 
4:  9. 

3.  Pael  and  Ithpaal  are  regularly  inflected  from  the 
ground-forms  D'^p  and  D^pni^ .  Many  verbs,  however, 
substitute   for  these   conjugations    Polel   D52lp   or   Palpel 

np^p. 


46         §  23.  IRREGULAR  VERBS ;  LAMEDH  ALEPH. 

4.  Aphel  has  occasionally  the  form  of  verbs  IS ;  e.  g. 
t]^j?1&<  Ps.  78:  13.  Gen.  18:  16.  Jon.  p^IlwX  Ps.  14:  2.  See 
1,  of  this  section. 

5.  The  following  verbs  are  inflected  as  "^y; 

(a)  on,  r\^l2,  n^D,  D'^to,  and  q^^T,  in  Pea/;  thus 
n'^D,  nn'^D,"  n'^n^b,  etc.  Gen.  27:  1.'  Prov.  23:  22. 
1  Sam.  12':"  2;  Imp.  D'^^i: ,  '^^D^'l!) ,  Ez.  4:  41 ;  Fut.  Pin*] 
Deut.  1*5:  6. 

(b.)   ]^2  in  Ithped,  fully,  l|;3n&<,  or  contracted,  ]'2^i^^, 

Job  28:  23.    11:  12.   37:  14.   Ps.  73:  17. 

Note.  Those  vejbs  which  have  t  moveable  for  their  middle  radical, 
(as  !:]",  ^Th)  N13  etc.),  do  not  belong  here,  but  are  regular.  The 
number  of  such  verbs  is  greater  in  Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.  Some 
verbs  with  the  same  radicals  exist  in  both  forms,  and  in  that  case  have 
different  significations ;  '^in  to  look  at,  ^iti  to  be  icise;  'tV\'^  to  sink 
down,  n^UJ  to  sprout. 

<§,  23.   Verbs  Lamedh  Aleph. 

This  class  includes  all  those  verbs  which  are  com- 
prehended in  Heb.  under  the  two  classes  fh  (including 
verbs  originally  1^  and  *>!?,)  and  ^b ,  the  difference  be- 
tween the  two  classes  being  entirely  lost  in  Chaldee. 
Rarely,  (and  almost  exclusively  in  the  biblical  Chaldee), 
the  radical  form  of  these  verbs  terminates  in  t]— ;  e.  g, 
Dan.  2:  16.  4:  8.  6:  3.  Num.  5:  26.  Their  chief  anoma- 
lies are  the  following. 

1.   In  those  forms   which   terminate   in    the  3d  radical, 

(a)  In  Peal  Praeter,  and  Inf.,  as  well  as  in  the  Fut. 
Imp.  and  1st  Part,  of  all  the  conjugations,  that  radical  is 
usually  it ;  as  &t^5,  itbs ,  it'y],  tubp^l', 

(6)  In  the  Praet.  and  2d  Part,  of  the  other  conjugations 
and  in  the  Imp.  Peal,  "i;   as  '^b^nii,  "^Vs ,  ''^5,  ''b}p_. 

Note.  The  Inf.  Peal  sometimes  has  "'j  e.g.  \:72a  Gen.  1:  14.  ''intt 
Is.  22:  12.  So  the  1st  Part;  e.g.  ^nN  Sol.  S'.  1:3.  Prov.  17:21. 
More  frequently  •»  appears  in  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  Gen.  3:  18.  Jer.  T.  Job 
9:  3.  Is.  41:  19,  etc. 


<^  23.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;  LAMEDH  ALEPH.  47 

2.  This  1^  quiesces  in  the  Praeter  Peal  in  _?  in  the 
Inf.,  Fut.  and  Part,  in  _;  the  "^  in  the  Praeter  of  Ithpeel 
and  Aphel  usually  in  _ ,  in  the  Imp.  and  Part,  in  _;  in 
the    passive  Part,  of  Pael  and  Aphel  only,  is  "^  moveable; 

Note.  For  examples  of  the  Praet.  Peal  with  "'_  see  Gen.  2:  18.  Jon. 
Deut.  30  :  9  ;  of  the  Praet.  Aphel  with  V. ,  Ps.  78:  11.  2  K.  8 :  8  ^  of 
the  Futures  with  ■•_  Is.  30:  26.  Jer.  51:  8. 

3.  In  the  course  of  inflection  the  3d  radical  is 
(a)  Dropped^  before  the  suffbrmative  D—  of  3d  fern, 
sing.  Praeter  Peal,  before  !n^-  [for  J4_]  of  the  3d  fern, 
plur.,  before  ^hand  ^^  in  the  Fut.  of  all  the  conjugations; 
before  the  sufformatives  of  the  Imp.  (in  which  T  general- 
ly occurs  instead  of  "=!) ;  and  in  the  3d  pers.  plur.  masc. 
Praet.  Peal  before  i ,  which,  in  these  verbs,  takes  the  place 
of  the  regular  ^;  e.  g.  vb}^,  Jlijbrj,  1^5,  X'\}V\^,  Xh^iT^/, 

(6)  Exchanged^  for  ^  moveable^  before  the  sufformatives 
ri—  and  i^_ ,  3d  fem.  sing,  and  plur.  Praeter  of  all  the  con- 
jugations except  Peal,  also  before  ]_  of  the  2d  and  3d 
pers.  fem.  plur.  Fut.;  e.g.  D^V^,  ^Iv^J^^,  ]'^T^'];for '^ 
quiescent^  (quiescing  sometimes  in  _.,  sometimes  in  __)  be- 
fore all  the  sufformatives  which  begin  with  ]  or  n,  and 
before  1  of  the  3d  plur.  Praeter  (which  is  here  moveable) 
in  all  the  conjugations  except  Peal;   e.  g.  riv5,  prT'^S, 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm  of  verbs  nK 
1.  Praeter.  The  3d  per.  sing.  fem.  Peal  sometimes  appears  with  the 
full  orthography ;  as  n^bTO  ,  Dan.  2:  35.  Sometimes  it  follows  the  an- 
alogy of  the  other  conjs. ;  thus  T\l1X2  Job  17:  7.  (or  like  riN'^'ii  Is.  1: 
7.  or  nbi]  Dan.  2:  35.  4:  19).  The  2d  per.  sing.  m.  is  sometimes  writ- 
ten/m%,  terminating  in  N-  .  The  3d  per.  pi.  m.  follows,  in  some  cop- 
ies, the  Hebrew  form ;  as  ^'nj?  Lam.  1:  3.    Sol.  S.  3:  1.  l^-j  Num.  26: 


48  §  24.  VERBS  DOUBLY  ANOMALOUS. 

64,  or  the  analogy  of  the  other  conjs. ;  as  T'lO'i.  Dan.  3: 21.  The  3d  per. 
pi.  f.  occurs  in  the  form  'jbi}  Deut.  2:  11,  or  "jN^ra  Ruth  4:  17.  Finally 
a  few  instances  occur  of  the  Praet.  Pe.  with  N  prosthetic  ;  e.  g.  "'"iSN 
Prov.  20:  12.  vn'vlJN  Dan.  5:  4.  In  the  other  conjugations  the  3d  per, 
pi.  instead  of  T"-  sometimes  takes  1  {«''_;  Ezek.  23:  10.  Is.  11:  4.  Jer. 
6:  14. 

2.  Future.  The  3d  per.  m.  sing,  terminates  indifferently  in  "'-.  or 
N_  .  It  sometimes  appears  even  with  Q.amets;  e.  g.  Nl2"in^  Is.  53:  2. 
Na'^n")  Zech.  6:  12,  (according  to  Buxtorf )  The  3d  per.  pi.  sometimes 
takes  the  termination  p  instead  of  p.  Comp.  Dan.  7:  26.  Is.  65:  23. 
Ex.  22:  31. 

3.  Imperative.  The  2d  f.  sing,  ends  sometimes  in  N«  ;  as  Gen.  19: 
32.     The  form  Ji''in  ,  Gen.  24:  60,  is  anomalous. 

4.  Infinitive.  In  Peal  it  sometimes  takes  a  paragogic  N ;  e.g. 
N;;i£n72  Prov.  25:  17.  Esth.  5:  14.  Ez.  5:  9.  The  regular  form  is  em- 
ployed as  Inf  absolute  Is.  61:  10.  Am.  5:  5.  Gen.  26:  28.  The  InfF. 
of  the  other  conjugations,  in  the  biblical  Chaldee,  terminate  in  r;^_  ; 
e.  g.  Dan.  2:  10.  5:  2.  6:  8.,  more  rarely,  in  the  Targums  in  '';.■) ;  e.  g. 
■'['.iyri'ip^  Num.  12:  8.  Jon. 

For  the  Participles  of  verbs  Nb,  see  below  §  34. 

Note.  Apocopate  Futures  and  Imperatives  are  less  frequent  in 
Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.    The  following  are  examples. 

Fut.  apoc.  nujn  Hab.  2:  16.  "^rr  (tItT:  EccI.  11:  3.  like  the  Heb. 
^hn"d^),  ••nn,  "jinn  Ex.  22:31.  from  H^rri ,  (elsewhere  fully,  sNin;;., 
Ninn  Gen.  17:  4.  24:  14.) ;  ''h^  "'hn ,  ■^HN  ,  phn,  f<h»,  from  N^n  , 
Deiit.  4:  1.  Prov.  15:  27.  Gen!  20:  7.  2K.  1:  2.  8:  10.  These  forms 
have  generally  an  optative  signification. 

Imp.  apoc.  ri\pN  ,  with  N  prosth..  Gen.  24:  14.  Pael,  iu3  Gen.  44:  1. 
in  Gen.  37:  16."Aphel,  "^hN  . 

An  apocopate  participle,  Aphel,  is  ''htt  instead  of  ■^2*7'5  Deut.  32: 39. 

<§>  24.   Verbs  doubly  anomalous. 

1.  "jS  and  !}<7(.np).  These  unite  the  irregularities  of 
both  classes;   e.  g.  !JiiI3D,  Aphel,  ''"JpX. 

2.  Jtb  and  n!V  E.  g.  MDNl ,  iXDNl.,  vVTN,  iSDNl .  Peal 
Fut.  'in;'^,  Deut.  29:  20.  ^n;*^  Gen.  33:  14.  Inf.  J^Ttl  (wST^q) 
Dan.  3:  19.  ^rTa  Dan.  3:  2.-^Ithpee1,  '^&n.S  Lev.  13:  18. 
Fut.  '^n/n^  Lev.  13:  2.— Pael,  ''Di«,  Part.  *^0p_  2  Kings 


§  25.    DEFECTIVE  VERBS  AND  MIXED  FORMS.  49 

20:  5.  Ithpaal  '^Dri.^i  2  Kings  5:  13.  Aphel,  ''H^fi^  Gen.  4: 
4.  Part.  '^ri/'^Zl,  Gen.  6:  17.  Imp.  Peal  in  one  case,  hy  Aphae- 
resis,  ^'^H  (Lond.  ed.  iriJ^)  venite,  Prov.  9:  5.  Else- 
where irivS ,  Dan.  3:  26. 

3.  "^D  and  si"^ .  E.  g.  !^"i']  (n'7'^>  Nm,  ft^^*; .  PeaJ,  Fut- 
'^p';  Ps.  50:  16.  Aphel,  ^liii  Ps.  75^2.  Inf.  T[m\^  Ex. 
12:  33.  Part.  ^^yCl  Prov.  28:  13.  Imp.  '^niw^?  Gen.  19:22. 
Illi^  Judg.  5:  2. 

Note.  Those  verbs  Mb  which  have  1  for  their  middle  radical  are  re- 
gular, so  far  as  *)  is  concerned,  i.  e.  the  ^  is  always  a  consonant ;  as  N]'^ , 

§  25.  Defective  verbs  and  mixed  forms. 

1.  But  few  verbs  actually  exhibit  all,  or  nearly  all,  the 
moods  and  tenses.  So  far  as  this  deficiency  is  occasioned 
by  the  fewness  of  those  remains  of  the  Chaldee  which 
have  reached  our  time,  it  does  not  belong  to  a  grammat- 
ical treatise.  Those  verbs  only  must  be  noticed  here 
which,  though  cases  frequently  occur  where  certain  forms 
would  naturally  be  employed,  constantly  supply  their  pla- 
ces by  forms  borrowed  from  different  themes.  The  fol- 
lowing are  examples; 

Dn*]  and  "jriD,  to  give,  the  former  occurring  in  Peal 
Praet.  and  Imp.  and  in  Ithpeel ;  the  latter  chiefly  in  Peal 
Fut.  and  Inf. — p^!D  and  pDD  to  ascend,  the  former  being  us- 
ed in  Praet.  Peal,  in  Pael,  and  the  Passives  of  the  first  and 
second  conjugations;  the  latter  in  the  Inf.  and  Imp.  Peal, 
and  in  Aphel.  Deut.  9:  9.  10:  1.  2  Kings  17: 4.— ft^np  and 
iSjxtri  to  drink;  fi^ntd  in  Peal,  ^^|'?tl^  in  Aphel.— 'T]!:n  and 
'^'^n  to  go;  the  former  chiefly  in  Pael,  the  latter  in  Inf. 
and  Fut.  Peal. 

An  example  of  double  inflection  in  the  same  word  is  sy] .    The 
7 


w*>'r 


50  §  26.  IRREGULAR  VERES  WITH  SUFFIXES. 

Future  is  commonly  S^i  like  verbs  "i^.  The  1st  per.  sing,  only  follows 
the  analogy  of  verbs  "'D ,  S^nj*  Ps.  39:5.  101:  4.  though  i"7:N  also  oc- 
curs, Dan.  2:  9. 

2.   The  following,  which  have  been  called  mixed Jorms^ 

are   improperly  so  designated,     ^^")£^l^i   Dan.  7 :  15.  and 

D^intDi;}  Dan.  4:  16.  are  but  Sjriac  pointings  of  the  Prae- 

ter;    and   the  Future    1st  sing.   S'nSriwV  Jud.  15:  7.  (Ven. 

ed.)  for  ^nSrii^   is  not  destitute   of  all  analogy;   comp.   in 

Hebrew  t:l'3^i ,  Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  312.     p^^^  Hos.  4; 

2.  can  hardly  be  called   a  mixture  of  Fut.  and  Part. ;   for, 

(as  the  Future  of  this  verb  has  the  form  ^ly^^^,  1^'^'^  may 

be    considered   3d  plur.    fern,   analogous  with   "jV^ri    Jer. 

3:  19. 

§  2G.  Irregular  verhs  with  suffixes. 

1.  The  forms  of  most  irregular  verbs  before  suffixes  do 
not  differ  essentially  from  those  of  the  rcy;ular  verbs ;   and, 

I!        ''     II  II  II  " 

SO  lar  as  verbs  "jD ,  5^3? ,  15? ,  and  ^tj  are  concerned,  may  be 
learned  from  §  16.  The  following  examples  will  illustrate 
this  remark; 

(a)  ]S,Peal;  "jlS^SD  Judg.  20:  32.  ^rjDlVLq']  Ps.  91:  12. 
"r^^hprn^  Ps.  28:  3.— Aphel;  1^DjPS5<  Ex.  32:  12.  '^Dnp^SwS 
Job  10:  18.  w\3inpDuX  Num.  20:  5." 

(6)  IpV  ,  Peal ;  'jl3lT2']  Jer.  20:  5.— Aphel ;  nsp'^n  with 
epenthetic  D,  Dan.  7:  23.  v\]n::^X  Ps.  44:  20.'  ^D^l^^n 
Dan.  2:  24-  i^V)bZ^_  Jud.  19:  3. 

(c)  lV,  Peal;  ^Wte  Gen.  50:  26.  iTi^Q^a  Ez.  5:  14. 
nrdlin  Dan.  7:  23.— Pael;  nS^IJ?  Ps.  105:  10.— Aphel; 
nil^jPN:.  Dan.  3:  2.  wVaS^'^p.^   Hos.  6:  2.  wVDin^nn  Ez.  5:  11. 

(^)   '^S,  Peal;   ^Ti;^__  Ez.28:19.   nn^l']    Dcut.  22:  2.— 


^ 


^i-n. 


§  2G.    IRREGULAR  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  51 

Aphel,  npniriNI.  Dan.  5:  7.  "^Dn^^lin  Dan.  2:  13.  "^^D^^^rh 
Dan.  2:  26.  " 

2.  The  forms  of  verbs  1^7  before  suffixes  differ  more 
widely  from  those  of  the  regular  verbs.      Thus 

(a)  &i  and  *^  final  quiescent  are  commonly  dropped  before 
suffixes  in  the  Praeter  and  Future ;  Avhile  the  former  takes 
suffixes  with  the  union  vowel  _  or  _,  and  the  latter  with  3 
epenthetic  ;  e.  g.  '^DTH  he  saw  me,  2  Sam.  1 :  7.  '^nTH  he 
saw  him,  Jud.  19:  3.  "jID^n  Is.  42:  5.  nDTH;.  Lev.  13:  21. 
'iJDTn'^  Ex.  33  :  20.  Sometimes  they  are  retained  ;  e.  g. 
^:i^1'2  Prov.  8:  22.  n^^TH  Gen.  38:  15.  Aph.  'TI'^Tni^  Deut. 
4:  36*.  ":\'Vp}^_  Obad.  3.  ^r:^Di^  Gen.  3:  13.  Pseudo-Jon. 

(h)  ^  final  quiescent  in  the  Imp.  of  all  the  conjugations 
is  retained  ;  e.  g.  ^0521  Ex.  4 :  3.  vVDiTHJi  Ex.  33 :  18. 
(But  Jer.  36:  15,  wSn"lp  for  .yjl'^np  ). 

(c)  The  i  of  the  3d  pers.  plur.  Praet.  Peal,  and  of  the 
Imp.  is  generally  changed  into  1;  l*^—  into  ^"^ ;  e.g.  ''Dl^D'l 
Jon.  1:  12.   N^n^TH  Lam.  1:  7. 

{d)  The  persons  of  the  Praeter  in  n*^—  and  D*^..  remain 
unchanged;   e.  g.  '^Dri''53'n  Jon.  2:  4. 

(e)  n_  of  the  3d  pers.  sing.  fem.  Praet.  is  changed  in- 
to n^;   e.  g.  "jlDnlJi^.Dw^  Hos.  4:  12. 

On  the  Inf.  Peal  and  the  Participles,  see  below  §  35. 


'^ 


52  ^^  27.  28.  NOUNS  ;  gender  and  number. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

NOUNS. 


§27.  Derivation  of  Nouns. 

1.  Nouns,  in  Chaldee  as  in  Hebrew,  are  either  jmm- 
itive  or  derivative.  The  former  are,  for  the  most  part, 
the  same  as  in  Hebrew,  and  are  regarded  as  primitive  for 
similar  reasons.  Comp.  Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  478.  seq. 
Heb.  Gram.  §316.  The  derivatives,  constituting  the  great 
majority  of  nouns,  are  formed  either  from  verbs,  (which 
is  generally  the  fact),  and  these  are  termed  verbal;  or 
from  other  nouns,  and  then  they  are  called  denominative, 

2.  Verbals  derived  from  the  Infinitive  are  generally 
abstract  in  signification,  i.  e.  they  express  the  action,  and  have 

the  forms  ?Dp,  Vjjp^,  Vjp,  Vop ,  h'q^^,  Y'^J,,  !:''t:p>, 

pilip ,  PiDp,  PCJp^,  etc.;  those  derived  from  Participles 
are  generally  concrete^  i.  e.  express  the  actor,  and  have  the 
forms  VlP_P,  Vjp,  ^t^lP,  '^-^Dp,  ^^Lpj-p,  ^VJp,  etc. 

3-  Denominatives  are  generally  formed  by  adding  the 
termination  '^_  C*^-),  fern.  ii?1_  (iT^-);  or],^ .  They  are 
generally  adjectives,  especially  ordinal  numerals,  or  patro- 
nymic or  gentile  nouns;  e.g.  "^^D]  a  foreigner,  "^"yilZ  an 
Egyptian,  1^"^^  «  reie/.  Many  feminine  nouns  in  rT^— 
and  nl  are  also  denominative  ;  e.  g.  rise's  a  kingdom, 
from  ^12  a  king ;  ri^D^^5<  widowhood,  from  '[^'^^  a  wid- 
ow;   n'^kDItD  a  rooting  out,  extirpation,  from  "eS'ltD  a  root. 

§  28.   Gender  and  number  of  nouns. 

].  The  genders  are  two,  masculine  and  feminine.  The 
latter  generally  terminate  in  5^_  (H-),  1  (n1),  '^--  (n''_), 
or  nV      It  should  be  noticed  however  that  i>{_  is  also  the 


<5,  28.  NOUNS  ;  GENDER  AND  NUMBER.  -53 

termination  of  the  emphatic  state  in  masculines.  Conse- 
quently, in  ascertaining  the  gender  of  nouns,  the  analogy  of 
the  other  dialects  and  the  sense  are  more  certain  guides 
than  the  mere  form  of  a  noun. 

Note  1.  The  termination  ft-  is  generally  to  be  considered  a  Hebra- 
ism. It  is  regular  in  Chaldee,  only  in  feminines  derived  from  mascu- 
lines in  ■'_;  as  lnNai(5  fem.  from  "'Q'lJ^  . 

Note  2.  There  are  a  considerable  number  of  feminine  nouns  with 
masculine  forms,  mostly  the  same  as  in  Hebrew ;  e.  g.  ]1N  a  stone,  fTnk 
a  path,  y^N  earth,  ]1TN  an  ear,  S'lH  a  sword.  Some  are  common;  e.  g. 
nN  a  mark,  ii3ii_Jire,  N3ST;t  a  vine,  and  the  numerals  from  20  to  100. 

2.  The  numbers  are  two,  singular  and  plural.  The 
iew  dual  forms  which  occur  are  to  be  reg^arded  as  Hebra- 
isms.  They  occur  only  in  the  biblical  Chaldee,  terminat- 
ing in  the  absolute  state,  in  "j*^-.  See  Dan.  2:  34.  7:  4. 
The  dual  in  the  other  states  cannot  be  distinguished  from 
the  plural.  Compare  Dan.  2:  33,  41.  7:  7-  In  the  Tar- 
gums  the  double  members,  etc.  are  expressed  by  the  plural, 
and  where  the  number  two  is  required,  "j'^ID  is  inserted. 
Plurals  masculine  end  in  ]'^_ ,  plurals  feminine  in  ]_ . 

To  most  masculine  nouns,  viz.  to  those  which  terminate  in  a  radi- 
cal letter,  the  termination  "j"^—  is  directly  appended;  e.g.  "^'ts  «  rock, 
pi.  ']'^~l^t3 .  But  those  which  terminate  in  N_  derived  from  verbs  Nb  , 
take  "j''__ ;  those  in  ''_  or  "'k\_  take  ]"^N-;  ■  Feminines  in  N-  change 
this  ending  directly  into  ]_ ;  those  in  m  and  n"*—  change  these  termin- 
ations into  "JT  and  ];; ;  e.  g.  m2b73  ,  ri"^-;p73  ,  plural  ]'J3b73  ,  ]^"iui'3 ;  and 
finally,  those  in  ilN-  from  masculines  in  ''_  form  the  plural  in  "j^-  ;  e.  g. 
J-IN»^)^  plur.  l^^'liT  . 

As  in  Hebrew,  there  are  also  in  Chaldee  many  nouns  having  the 
form  of  masculines  in  the  sing,  but  of  feminines  in  the  pi.,  and  vice  versa  ; 
e.g.  yt!N.,"i^'"}i< ;  n73N,')^72N;  NV:q, ■{"'V's;  i<sn,  yirr,  N:\p ,  i"":-*; . 

In  some  nouns  both  terminations  are  in  use,  even  in  the  same  Tar- 
gum  ;  e.  g.  NaN ,  pi.  "J'^^N  and  irT72N  ;  -iri: ,  pi.  T'"!n:  andli-i^i: ,  (as 
if  from  rrnri?);  Di"',pl.  ]"'^i"'  and  ]73i"' ,  etc.  Sometimes  the  forms 
with  different  endings  have  different  significations ;  e.  g.  from  i'f?  a  voice, 
y'bp^  thunders,  Ex.  9:  23.,  "jbj^  voices,  Ps.  93:  4.  These  examples  should 
be  distinguished  from  epicene  nouns,  or  those  which  express  both  males 
and  females,  such  as  D=1D  ,  pi.  'j''DnD  and  'l^pTD. 


54  <§,  29.    STATES  OF  NOUNS. 

Sometimes  feminines  plural  take  an  additional  plural  ending.  So  in 
Hebrew  and  Arabic  ;  conip.  Heb.  Gram.  <5i  327.  5. 

Some  nouns  occur  only  in  the  plural ;  as  'J'^'h  life,  N^tt'iJ  heaven; 
especially  those  which  designate  the  different  ages  of  life ;  as  "J'^cV^y 
youth,  though  some  of  these  occur  in  the  singular,  with  the  termination 
m  .  Others  occur  in  the  singular  only  ;  e.  g.  the  names  of  the  metals, 
Sn'T^oZJ,  bT~5D  zVoK,  7\'D'3  silver.  But ']"'ED3  occurs  in  the  sense  of 
pieces  of  silver,  Gen.  42:  25. 

§29.  States  of  Kouns. 

1.  Besides  the  absolute  and  construct,)  which  occur  in 
Hebrew,  nouns  in  Chaldee  have  also  the  emphatic  state, 
in  which  they  originally  corresponded,  in  sense,  to  nouns  in 
Hebrew  with  the  article.*  It  has  however  come  into  use, 
in  many  cases,  where  the  sense  does  not  require  the  defi- 
nite article.  In  Syriac,  this  liberty  has  been  much  more 
extensively  taken. 

Note.  The  indefinite  article  is  expressed,  either  simply  by  the  abso- 
lute state,  or  by  the  numeral  nn  one ;  e.  g.  Dan.  2:  31.  6:  18.  Ez.  4:  8. 

2.  Construct  State.   Characteristic  terminations. 

a.  Masculines  plural  change  "J^--  into  "^_.  The  termination  of  the 
construct  state  of  masc.  nouns  in  the  sing,  does  not  differ  from  that  of 
the  absolute  state. 

b.  Feminines  in  N_  (n_)  change  these  endings  into  n_  in  the  sing., 
into  ri-  in  the  plur.  const.  Feminines  in  T  and  "•_  resume  their  original 
n  in  the  const,  sing.,  and  in  the  plur.  change  ]T  and  "J^  into  D]  and  rc^ . 

3.  The  emphatic  state  is  characterised,  in  both  genders 
and  both  numbers,  by  the  ending  iX—  .  (Masculines  in 
'^_,  which  take  T\-  in  the  emphatic  state,  constitute  the 
only  exception). 

a.  To  masculines  singular  (except  such  as  terminate  in  N-  or  "'_), 
this  termination  is  directly  added  ;  e.  g.  D^O  ahorse,  ND=1D  the  horse  ; 
masculines  in  N_  substitute  the  letter  ">  for  their  final  syllable,  and  those 
which  end  in   '^_  change  this   ending    into  MN_  ;    e.  g.  Nbi  ,    N'^b^ ; 

6.  Feminines  in  iX_  change  k\  in  the  emph.  sing,  into  n;  e.g.  NSb?^ , 

*  So  in  Danish,  Landene,  the  countries,  from  Lande,  countries.  Rask  Danish 
Grammar,  p.  14,  Also  in  Albanian,  Gour,  stone  ;  Gown,  the  stone.  Malte  Brun 
Univ.  Geog.  vol.  VI.  p.  201. 


§  30.    DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.  55 


eraph.  NnsVo  :  those  in  mN—  change  this  ending  into  riV ;  e.  g.  rtN73lj5, 
emph.  Nn"l'2'ij2 ,  finally  those  in  1  and  '^_  appear  in  the  emph.  state  with 
their  original  full  endings  m  and  V)"^—;  e.g.  Nn^3b72. 

c.  In  the  plural,  the  masc.  endings  "j"^—  and  "j^-  are  changed  into 
N^_  ;  as  N;^3bn  ,  'i"'N_  (from  sing.  ■^_. )  becomes  "^N-  ;  as  ■j"'N72'i[5  ,  emph. 

d.  In  feminines  plur.,  the  emphatic  state  is  formed  by  adding  J<_ 
to  the  construct :  e.  g.  Nn;"'l?3  ,  Nm^b^j  ,  Nn^riJ  .  But  such  as  termi- 
nate  in  the  sing,  in  nN_  (from  masculines  in  "'_)  resume  here  their 
original  "^ ;  e.  g.  N*ri;;7:'i|2  from  riNQ'ijD  . 

4.  Before  suffixes  [in  the  suffix  state]^  nouns  exhibit  the 
following  modifications. 

a.  Derivative  masc.  nouns  in  %  change  this  ending  into  N_  before 
suff. ;  as  nJitaTi^  from  "^ly^p^^ ;  those  in  N-,  (from  verbs  Nb)  change  this 
termination  into  "^  moveable  ;  as  ni^b^  from  Nb.^  . 

b.  All  masc.  plur.  nouns  drop  the  ending  'j'^—  (■)";-)  and  then  take 
the  sufF.  of  nouns  plural. 

c.  Feminines  in  i{_  change  N  into  n  in  the  sing. ;  as  rrnSb^  from 
iob'i  -•  those  in  T  and  ^_  take  the  construct  form  before  suffixes ;  as 
nm^b^a ;  those  in  N^  {radical)  change  this  ending  to  n"'—. ;  and  those 
in  r;N_  (from  masc.  in  ''-—)  resume  their  original  "^ ;  e.g.  !^rj';'W'i[?_  . 

d.  In  the  fem.  pi.,  suffixes  are  appended  to  the  construct  state  ;  e.  g. 

f  :t«;'»  :r:;~ 

§  30.  Declension  ofJVoiins. 

Since  no  vowels  are  dropped,  except  those  of  the  final 
syllable  of  ground  forms,  (comp.  §  7.  c),  and  since  changes 
of  any  kind  are  less  frequent  than  in  Hebrew,  (the  first 
vowel  of  the  ground  form  remaining  throughout  invariable, 
except  in  monosyllables  andsegholate  forms),  fewer  modes 
of  declension  would  naturally  be  expected,  than  appear  in 
Hebrew.  Accordingly  we  reckon  in  Chaldee  nine  declen- 
sions, six  of  masculine,  and  three  of  feminine  nouns. 


50       §^  31.  32.  nouns;  first  and  second  declensions. 


§31.  First  Declension. 

The  first  declension  includes  all  nouns  which  have  all 
their  vowels  immutable.      It  comprehends, 

(a)  Nouns  which  have  "^^ ,  ''_,  i  or  1  before  their  final 
consonant ;    as    "jID  a  Jish,  U)^   a  day,   HJ'^'n  a  head,  '2^^p 

near. 

In  a  few  nouns  which  would  seem  to  belong  to  (a),  the  quiescents  are 
treated  as  fulcra.  Such  belong  to  Dec.  IV.  e.g.  "^TS^N  Num.  25:  15.  Pseu- 
do-Jon. instead  of  "'^aN . 

(6)  Nouns  which  have  _  in  their  final  syllable  ;  as  DD 
good,  ^35  «  thie^. 

Note  1.  Nouns  with  _  in  the  ultimate  are  chiefly  of  six  classes. 

( 1 )  Nouns  derived  from  verbs  ii> ;  e.  g.  b)5  ,  pt2 ,  (Heb.  bip  ,  iiu ) ; 

(2)  Nouns  of  the  form  Snrs ,  tib'^J ,  (Heb.  Qib'vU) ; 

(3)  Nouns  of  the  form  btajP  ,  (Arabic  3^^*^*'  Heb.  with  _  impure); 

(4)  Nouns  like  bti^  ,  (Heb.  with  _  jJure),  and  bt:"'p_ ; 

(5)  Nouns  which  have  the  formative  ending  ]_ ;  as  l^'ij^  (Arab. 

5       /  c^ 

{j\jj);  and 

(6)  Nouns  of  the  form  bnip;  as  ^:^^ii ,  nni3> . 

The  first  three  of  these  classes  retain  _  in  all  the  inflections,  and 
consequently  belong  regularly  to  Dec.  I. 

Nouns  of  the  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  classes  sometimes  take  _  in- 
stead of  —  in  the  construct  sing.,  and  before  the  suff".  ]TD  and  ]in. 
Elsewhere  the  _  is  retained.  The  punctuation  of  these  nouns  is  how- 
ever variable ;  and  as  they  present  no  other  irregularity,  and  are  not 
very  numerous,  they  may  better  be  regarded  as  exceptions  from  Dec. 
I.  than  as  forming  a  separate  declension. 

Note  2.  There  are  also  a  kw  nouns,  (principally  of  the  form  biup), 
having  Qamets  in  the  penultimate,  which  are  sometimes  varied  accord- 
ing to  the  first  declension,  but  sometimes  drop  their  penultimate  vowel, 
out  of  the  absol.  sing. 

§  32.  Second  declension. 

The  second  declension  includes  nouns  with  final  _  or 
_ ,  either  monosyllabic,  or  having  the  preceding  vowels  im- 
mutable; as  "1^,  Dd,  ub^  J  '^'^^P,-     This  _  or  _  is  drojj- 


§  33.    NOUNS  ;    THIRD  DECLENSION.  57 

ped  before  pronominal  suffixes  or  formative  syllables,  begin- 
ning with  a  vowel. 

Note  1.  Form  with  a  guttural  liya  ,  with  suffix  rtl^^tt  Job  28:  2C. 

Note  2.  Forms  Uke  ■J"'bDj5  (_  shortened  into  _)  from  bip.jP  ,  1st  part. 
Peal,  e.  g.  'J'^'^lDn  Gen.  3:  5.  etc.  are  to  be  set  down  to  the  account  of  ir- 
regular punctuation.     Analogy  requires  ')'^!^UP  . 

Note  3.  In  this  declension  may  be  reckoned  bj^S  ,  emph.  MbtiB , 
etc.  as  if  from  bj["]S. 

Note  4.  Before  ]13  and  pti ,  monosyllables,  as  in  Hebrew,  take  _  , 
_,  or_;  e.g.  li"»^  Zeph.  1:  17.  ■jiDn^.  Isaiah  1:  15. 

The  form  V'P^?  from  -^y^  Ezek.  27:  2.  is  peculiar. 

<^  33.    Third  Declension.    ■ 

This  declension  corresponds  with  the  sixth  in  Hebrew 
according  to  Prof.  Stuart's  arrangement,  and  includes  all 
nouns  which  correspond  to  the  Segholate  forms  in  Hebrew. 
They  may  be  written  in  Chaldee,  as  in  Hebrew,  either 
with  two  vowels,  the  second  of  which  is  always  considered 
a  furtive  vowel ;  as  ^bl2 ,  Ubtl  (these  forms  almost  exclu- 
sively in  the  biblical  Chaldee),  H'^S,  (^7p);  or  with  only 
one  vowel,  which  belongs  between  the  last  two  consonants ; 
as  '^b^,  "ISD.  They  are  inflected,  for  the  most  part,  as 
in  Hebrew.      But, 

a.  In  the  Plural  absol.  the  forms  '^b'a  and  "nsp  become,  as  they  do 
in  most  other  inflections,  ^b^j  and  '^■dD  . 

h.  The  form  uj'ip  sometimes  follows  the  analogy  of  Hebrew ;  as 
NSpn  Dan.  2:  37  ;  sometimes  takes  _  ;  as  N;^bn3  Ez.  5:  8.  Very  rare- 
ly, Hholem  is  retained  ;  as  "'r.TiZJ'nTi; ,  Isa.  53:  2. 

c.  In  a  few  cases  the  "^  of  the  form  n";3  remains  moveable  in  its  in- 
flections ;  e.  g.  Nn";2  Ez.  5:  3.   nry  Sol.  S.  4:  8. 

d.  Nouns  of  the  forms  ^ra  and  "iDp  in  the  course  of  inflection,  gen- 
erally take  ^  or  —  under  their  first  radical,  according  to  the  paradigm. 
ITh ,  "i^.S  ,  Q!:h  ,  Tiy  and  some  others  take-.  Comp.  Dan.  4:  6.  5: 
12.  Gen.  32:  16.  Isa.  53:  2.  Nouns  having  gutturals  for  their  first  or 
second  radical,  naturally  take  _.  ;  as  fiyt? ,  J^Q^.t: ;  'liS'. ,  N'^^y  . 

e.  Participles  Ithpeel,  with  a  few  nouns,  not  properly  Segholates, 
follow  the  analogy  of  this  declension  ;  e.  g.  b^ipriiq  ,  inflected  precisely 
like  ^V.^  • 


68  §^  34.  35,  NOUNS  ;  fourth  and  fifth  dec. 

§  34.  Fourth  Declension. 

The  fourth  declension  includes  all  nouns  which  double 
the  final  consonant  when  they  receive  accession.  They 
are  mostly  monosyllables  derived  from  verbs  >'3?.  The 
long  vowels  — ,  i  and  (for  the  most  part)  1  are  exchanged 
in  the  course  of  inflection  for  the  corresponding  short  vow- 
els. In  some  nouns  _  becomes  _;  as  nS,  JiDS ;  ^!£,  l^'^S 
Ex.  19:  23.    ^5^5,  '\^h}b}_  Dan.  7;  9.        ' 

^3  has  in  the  emph.  st.  N^b  etc.  with  the  tone  on  the  penultimate  ; 
but  with  suff.  which  draw  the  tone  forward,  limV^Dan.  2:  38.  7:  19. 

§  35.   Fifth  Declension. 

The  fifth  declension  includes  nouns,  participles,  and  in- 
finitives, derived  from  verbs   1^7    and   terminating  in  i^_, 

v.,  ""-_  or  \;  as  Ji^5,  i^^5,  ^^p^,  '^b^p_,  ^b^pp^.  The"'' 
generally  appears,  in  the  course  of  declension,  as  the  third 
radical,  displacing  the  substituted  fii  in  forms  like  ^i'p•^ . 
The  termination  "l^—  of  the  plural  absolute  is  sometimes 
contracted  into  "J-.  More  rarely  it  follows  the  Hebrew 
analogy,  and  terminates  in  1'^—;  as  Job  1:  13.  Lam.  1  :  3. 
Sometimes,  perhaps  by  mistake  of  transcribers,  it  is  point- 
ed ];_.;  as  ]y^  Dan.  7:  3.  "{^n^  Gen.  3:  15.  Jeru.  Tar- 
gum,  where  the  connexion  decides  that  these  forms  are 
masculine.  In  the  const,  and  emph.  plural,  no  trace  of  the 
radical  '^  remains. 

Note  1.  Peculiar  forms  of  this  declension,  '^'ni';  PI.  with  suff.  ]T!T^*iy 
Is.  10:  2.— ^21)  Plur.  ^^.:y  Lev.  19:  10.— ^.3  PI.  'yj.Z  Deut.  6:  3.  Jer." 
Targ.— ^n-|  pi.  ii;5-i  iiuth  2:  21. 

Note  2.  Infinitives  Peal  of  verbs  Nb  are  sometimes  regularly  inflec- 
ted in  this  declension.  Comp.  Dan.  4:  23.  2  Sam.  13:  6.  Ez.  5:  9. 
But  sometimes  the  N  is  dropped ;  as  ^yn:o  1  K.  18:  16.  ^m?3  2  Sam. 
13:  5.  Ii3''.'rn)2  Josh.  3:  3.  nsaa  Gen.  23:  2. 


§§  36 — 38.    NOUNS ;  sixth  to  eighth  dec.  69 


§  36.  Sixth  declension. 

Here  belong  the  derivative  nouns  terminating  in  the 
formative  syllable  ''_  (''fi<_),  compare  §  27.  3.  They  arc 
mostly  gentile  or  patronymic  nouns,  or  ordinal  numerals. 

a.  These  nouns,  when  they  receive  accession,  change  their  final  '^ 
into  N ,  which  is  likewise  moveable,  and  commences  a  new  syllable. 
As  a  consequence,  _  is  here  changed  into  _. 

b.  The  plur.  emph.  terminates  in  "'_. ,  agreeing  in  form  with  the 
construct,  as  has  been  remarked  above  §  29.  3.  c. 

Exc.  from  6.  iii'^r^^  Dan.  2:  5,  i<.":nsri  Dan.  3:  2,  3.  N^.'iin":  Dan. 
3:  8,  Ez.  4:  12,  23.  5:  1,  5.  This  declension  includes  also  some  de- 
rivatives from  verbs  N^  which  terminate  in  '^_  but  are  not  passive  parti- 
ciples. (Comp.  the  preceding  decl.);  e.  g.  "iV^; ,  pi.  "^N^y  Gen.  1:  6. 
Jer.  T.    Ps.  104:  13.  ^?T ,  emph.  tiNSt ,  pi.  ';\\3T  Jer.  19:' 4. 

<§  37.  Seventh  declension. 

The  seventh  declension  includes  all  invariable  feminines, 
i.  e.  all  nouns  with  the  feminine  endings  i^__ ,  *•_  and  1 ,  the 
final  syllable  of  which  commences  with  only  one  conso- 
nant; as  ^1^2  heig-ht,  i^iy  counsel,  ^^^2^  strengrth,  i^^y)2 
a  roll,  1DD  iroodness,  "^Sl^  a  nurse. 

Whatever  vowels  precede  this  termination  are  immu- 
table ;  so  that  the  paradigm  exhibits  all  the  changes  of 
these  nouns  in  accordance  with  the  principles  stated  in 
§§  28,  29. 

Note.  In  forms  like  a,  if  the  penultimate  be  a  simple  syllable,  the 
Sheva  which  takes  the  place  of  the  final  Q.amets  in  the  emphatic  and 
suffix  states  singular  is  silent ;  e.  g.  mtdhlnd,  emph.  midhintd :  if  the 
penultimate  be  a  mixed  syllable,  that  Sheva  is  vocal ;  as  megilld,  emph. 
migilhthd. 

^  38.  Eighth  declension. 

The  eighth  declension  includes  all  those  feminines,  the 
final  syllable  of  which  commences  with  two  consonants; 
e.  g.  iiS}^  a  lip,  ^^L^^^^  (i.  q.  aioAfj^  a  robe,  ^5T  purity. 


60  §  3^*    NOUNS  ;    NINTH  DECLENSION. 

a.  Nouns  in  i<_  of  this  declension  must  evidently  supply  a  vowel  in 
the  emph.  and  suff.  states ;  for  otherwise  they  would  exhibit  the  impos- 
sible forms  Nntiip,  Nnba*)!*  ,  etc.,  viz.  with  two  vocal  Shevas  in  imme- 
diate succession.  This  supplied  vowel  is  Hhireq  or  Pattahh,  (the  latter 
with  gutturals) ;  more  rarely  Seghol :  e.  g.  NS'd) ,  NnD\p  M73N  ,  Mn^N  , 

Nbby  belongs  here,  and  is  treated  as  if  written  Nbb^  ;  e.  g.  emph. 
St.  Nnb^y  :  but  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  dropped  for  the  sake  of 
euphony. 

h.  The  paradigm  h.  comprises  all  feminines  in  N^ ,  derived  from 
verbs  Nb  ,  which  have  a  consonant  without  a  vowel,  immediately  pre- 
ceding this  termination.  The  supplied  vowel  is  Hhireq,  in  which  "•  qui- 
esces. 

c.  Those  in  *'_  and  =1  are  regular  in  the  sing,  like  Dec.  VII.  In 
the  plur.,  as  becomes  necessary,  they  also  take  a  supplied  vowel,  Hhi- 
req or  Pattahh. 

§  39.  JYinth  declension. 

Here  belong  feminines  in  S^N  _  derived  from  masculines 
in  ^_.  of  Dec.  Vl.Comp.  §28.  1.  Note  1.  In  the  emphatic 
state  and  before  suffixes,  i{  is  exchanged  for  "^  moveable, 
though  ordinal  numerals,  for  the  most  part,  take  '^^  or  ^^^ 
or  entirely  drop  it;  e.g.  l«n'^3''^OT  Lev.  25:22.  fi^n^^'Dp 
Deut.  15:9.  I^n^lp^nd  v.  12.  (but"  comp.  ^^^']y'^n"),  ban. 
7:  19.)  The  same  substitution  of  "^  for  li^  occasionally  ap- 
pears even  in  the  absolute  and  construct  plural ;  as  ')'^1513 
Gen.  13:  15. 

Note  1.  As  in  Hebrew,  the  fem.  forms  are  sometimes  so  mixed  that 
the  singular  is  of  one  declension  and  the  plural  of  another  ;  e.  g.  Nb?. 
pi.  "Jiby,  as  if  from  'iry ;  n""!:^^-!':  ,  pi.  ]!;b2-ia  and  ]yr5n^ . 

Note  2.  When  feminine  nouns  are  formed  from  masculines  by  add- 
ing the  terminations  N_  ,  T  and  "'_. ,  the  changes  in  the  ground-form 
are  precisely  the  same  which  appear  in  the  emph.  st.  of  masculines. 

Note  3.  Segholates  in  n  — -  are  rare.  They  are  inflected  precise- 
ly as  in  Hebrew. 


LIB) 

<5»§  40 42.    IRR.  NOUNS ADJECTIVES NUMEJ^lJ^iJ'*'    o^IbB 

itttehsity; 

§  40.  Irregular  and  defective  nouns,  y^"^  f  TpAT?'^^*''' 
These  are  doubtless  such  as  were  in  most  frequc 
The  following  are  the  principal.    Di^ ,  Hi^ ,  DX  ,  ^i^^{ ,  ISDN; , 

''Dij,  nwv,  i^nw^,  n^iD,  nsi,  na,  en,  ^Vq,  ^^  vs^dd,  u:i_, 

'^n'^S,  "^np  5  td'^'n  and  GiD  or  Did.      Their  anomalies  are 
given  in  the  vocabulary. 

<§>  41.  Adjectives. 

The  most  frequentybrms  of  adjectives  are  7Dp,  P'^t^p 
and  7'^EDp ;  less  usual  are  7l2p  and  ^Dlp .  They  are  in- 
flected like  nouns.  For  the  comparison  of  adjectives  see 
§  64.  . 

Note.  Adjectives  of  the  first,  third,  and  fourth  declensions  have  their 
feminines  generally  declined  according  to  the  seventh  ;  those  of  the  se- 
cond and  fifth,  according  to  the  eighth  ;  and  those  of  the  sixth,  accord- 
ing to  the  ninth. 

<5>42.  JVumerals. 

1.  Cardinals,  a.  These,  from  3  to  10,  present  the  same  anomaly  as 
in  Hebrew,  the  masculines  being  indicated  by  fern,  forms,  and  the  femi- 
nines by  masc.  forms.     See  Par.  XI. 

Note,  "^"iri  sometimes  takes  suffixes,  and  then  appears  in  the  form 
l^'^l  e.g.  "jiriM-in  6o</i  o/'fAewi,  Gen.  2:  25.  •\'-)^''l')r\both  of  you,  Gen. 
hi:  45. 

6.  From  1 1  to  19.  The  units  are  prefixed  to  IDi?  for  the  masc,  and 
to  ''Ipy  for  the  fern.  It  must  be  remarked  however,  (1)  That  the  units 
appear  somewhat  different  from  the  regular  form,  (comp.  the  paradigm), 
and  (2)  That,  in  the  later  Targums,  the  units  and  *^D3!'  or  """^D?  are 
contracted  into  one  word.  These  forms  are  presented  in  the  paradigm 
in  parentheses. 

c.  The  tens  from  30  to  90  are,  as  in  Hebrew,  simple  plurals  of  the 
units  3 — 9;  e.  g. 'J'^nbri  thirty ,  yv^^i^  forty ,  etc.  Eighty  is  some- 
what irregular  viz.  y^hp,  [i.e.yzjyr}]  or  "J^^n ,  Jer.  41:  5.  Ex.  7:  7. 
Twenty  is  expressed  by  the  plural  of  ten,  'J'^l.p?  or  'J'^^.D^  .  Though 
masc.  in  form,  these  are  all  of  the  common  gender. 


62  §  43.      ADVERBS. 


d.  The  intermediate  numbers  21 — 29,  31 — 39,  etc.  are  expressed 
by  simply  placing  the  smaller  number  after  the  larger,  connected  by  T ; 
e.  g.  masc.  1hl  'J'^IP?^  fern.  NTti.l  V"!^-  t^'^^^^y  one,  etc. 

e.  One  hundred  nN73 ,  200  yr\ini2 ,  ini*^ ,  300  "NT:  n^n ,  400 
rrNTa  2>2-)N  ,  etc.  the  prefixed  units  being  feminine ;  1000  Cl^N  ,  2000 
'l'^^~ii  I'^'ir;! ,  3000  'p^^^  ^^\^  J  6tc.  the  prefixed  units  being  masculine  ; 
10,000  ian  ,  120,000  iia-i  ^•no^_  Nn-)n  ,  Jon.  4:  11. 

2.  Ordinals.  The  first  two  have  peculiar  forms,  viz.  _/rs<  "'^IJ^  ? 
seconr/ "J ^iJPi ,  (comp.  Heb.  C^:"i;). 

a.  From  </«VcZ  to  fezj^A  they  are  formed  by  adding  to  the  cardinals 
"'^  (■'N-)  for  the  masc,  and  Nn  or  Nn";  for  the  fem. 

b.  From  eleventh  to  nineteenth  the  units  are  prefixed  to  '^'^"'CN  ,  but 
contracted  into  one  word  ;  e.  g.  '^i^lp'in  elevetith,  Num.  25:  8.  ''i^'iC'^'i.r] 
twelfth,  etc. 

c.  Above  20,  as  in  Heb.,  cardinals  and  ordinals  are  the  same.  For 
the  mode  of  designating  distributives  and  numeral  adverbs  see  <§  65.  4, 5. 


CHAP.  V. 
PARTICLES 


§  43.  Adverbs. 

1.  The  following  are i^nmzVzve  ;   *]^^  where?  ^Vjp  ivhen? 

Cl^^  also,  JlSn  ^/lere,  i^i^  not 

2.  Derivatives  with  characteristic  ending;  CQ*^  by  day, 
t<^12'V  to-day,  i^21'£piicareJidly,r\'^l2'M^inAramean  i^Agoc- 
fxaLGii^,  n\^Dtj"l6^^  hastily,  HID'^Dn  again. 

3.  Other  parts  of  speech  used  advei'bially ; 

a.  Substantives,  either  with  prepositions  ;  as  "nlit'^pa  in  short,  short- 
ly, i<t:'>ZJ^p3zn  truth,  truly,  T73  immediately ;  or  without  them  ;  as  1:^3 
wholly,  iXr\T\'r\beloto. 

b.  Verbal  forms,  viz.  Inf.  and  Part. ;  as  ^'72^  backwards,  i=in 
again,  once  more. 


§  44.    PREPOSITIONS.  •  63 


c.  Adjectives,  numerals,  and  pronouns;  e.  g.  'j3  {firm]  truly,  thus, 
etc.  i^'in?  \as  one]  together,  ri733  {like  what  ?^  how  !  how  very  ! 

4.  Compound  adverbs ;  V'^D'^N  how  ?  ''n!^'^N  when  ?  !13~15  \to  here] 
hitherto,  n3?3  [from  here]  hence,  N^''na  whence  ?  DriM  thence,  T\''\  [Nb 
n\s]  there  is  not.  For  the  mode  in  which  the  last,  as  well  as  n'^N  ,  takes 
pronominal  suffixes,  see  §  8.  3.  II.  Note  4. 

5.  A  simple  question  is  expressed  by  the  prefix  n,  (before  a  conso- 
nant with  Sheva,  simple  or  composite,  n).  Pronouns  or  adverbs  express 
an  interrogative  sense  by  prefixing  "^N  ,  e.  g.  yiiz  "^N  whence  ?  ibN  "^ij  icho? 
comp.  §9.  3.  Before  interrogative  adverbs  "^N  is  intensive  ;  as  "^rp^  \^_, 
to  which  I  believe  our  language  has  nothing  precisely  equivalent,  unless 
it  be  the  questionable  phrase,  lohere  in  the  world  1 

§  44.  Prepositions. 

1.  The  following  are  originally  prepositions ; 
(a)  The  inseparable  3,3,  and  7  prefixed  to  nouns 
and  pointed  with  _  before  simple  Sheva ;  as  1&&3  ;  be- 
fore a  word,  the  first  letter  of  which  has  a  composite  Sheva, 
with  a  corresponding  short  vowel;  as  'ilJDJO ,  'iDy?.  In 
the  latter  case,  contraction  sometimes  takes  place  ;  as 
i^n!:wV!p  Dan.  5:  23. 

(b)  The  separable  monosyllables  DTp  ,  fl'DlD ,  m3 ,  which 
before  nouns,  appear  as  separate  words.  They  take  pro- 
nominal sufiixes  without  change;   as  ^DT?  with  me. 

Instead  of  3  prefix,  appears  the  separate  form  "^3,  Sol.  S.  1:9.  13. 

2.  Words  employed  as  prepositions  but  originally  nouns  or  other 
parts  of  speech;  viz.  iibs  without,  (compounded  of  the  adv.  Nb  and  3), 
"J^^  [part]  from,  of,  bij^,  and  Q'lj?  before,  yz  between,  F|^bn  instead  of, 
nihPi  under,  b^i^T:  and  bTi:3^i<  on  account  of  These,  (with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  first,)  and  some  others,  are  originally  nouns,  and  conform  to 
the  analogy  of  nouns,  in  receiving  suffixes ;  sometimes, 

a.  Having  feminine  forms;  e.g.  N2riblt373  .  But  b^£3J2  retains  the 
masc.  form  before  "pn  and  pD;  or 

h.  Having  plural  forms ;  e.  g.  ^^b?  ,  ^^'^j^. ,  '^•7^'^'^?  i  ^^c. 

3.  Compound  prepositions  ;  Q'lj?  'J7J ,  b^j^b  ,  "'JsbTq . 


S4  §§45.  46.  CONJUNCTIONS — interjections. 


§  45.  Conjunctions. 

1.  Primitive  conjunctions  are  1  and,  3  as,  b  that  (before  Fut.),  "JJI 
if,  *I3  si«ce,  "^"^N  because,  ")N  or.  Borrotoed  from  other  parts  of  speech 
tl'^2  6m<,  irib  so,  ■^■7  that.  Compounded  J<b  "^'^  or  NttW  </ta<  no<,  "'^  n? 
until,  7  Clbr:  and  "^  ^''12  because,  'j'^'i  ^5  therefore,  '7  ]3''3  «/ifcr. 

2.  The  inseparable  conjunctions  3 ,  '7  ,  and  b  are  prefixed  Hke  the 
prepositions,  §  44.1.  a.  Vav,  before  consonants  with  Sheva,  also  before  ^  , 
72  ,  and  D  ,  is  pointed  n .  When  b  is  prefixed  to  the  Fut.  the  preforma- 
tive  of  the  latter  is  dropped  ;  e.g.  b'ltopb  instead  of  blt:p";b.  See  be- 
low §  50.  2. 

§  46.  Interjections. 

1.  These  are  for  the  most  part  primitive  ;  e.  g.  NJn  lo  !  "'ir  ,  "'M^^ 
would  that !  oh  that !  "^T  too  !  (comp.  Lat.  vae). 

2.  Some  are  borrowed  from  other  parts  of  speech  ;  e.g.  ^3n  come 
on !  (Imp.  from  i!i'^),  ^'Syz  I  pray  !  [lit.  in  entreaty],  bi^tl  '''o  •'  (from 
b5n.  '0  destroy). 


PART  III. 

SYNTAX. 

CHAP.  I. 

SYNTAX  OF  PRONOUNS. 


§  47.  Personal  Pronouns. 

1.  The  separate  pronouns  sometimes  supply  the  place 
of  the  substantive  verb,  or  at  least  render  the  use  of  that 
verb  unnecessary;  e.  g.  ^'S^  JiDnDl^  we  are  [lit.  we  they], 
Ez.  5:11;  vS^TH  NDwNl.  /  [am]  the  seer,  1  Sam.  9 :  19. 
Most  frequently  is  the  verb  omitted  when  the  pronoun  is 
joined  to  a  participle. 

The  reason  of  this  omission  of  the  substantive  verb,  in  such  cases, 
seems  to  be  this.  These  pronouns  have  a  certain  strength,  an  inherent 
emphasis,  (so  to  speak),  unattainable  in  Enghsh,  on  account  of  the  fre- 
quency with  which  we  are  compelled  to  use  them  in  the  ordinary  inflec- 
tion of  verbs. 

2.  The  suffixes  are  used  in  Chaldee  as  in  Hebrew,  comp.  Heb.  Gr. 
§§  470 — 473.  The  pleonastic  use  of  suffixes,  where  the  noun  to  which 
they  relate  immediately  follows,  is  more  frequent  here  than  in  Hebrew. 
Heb.  Gram.  §§  543—545. 

Note.  Even  the  separate  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  in  the  same 
manner. 

3.  Anomalies  likewise  are  the  same  as  in  Hebrew ;  e.  g.  masc.  for 
fem.  Ruth  1:  8, 9,  "jiSTSi; ,  (referring  to  the  daughters-in-law  of  Naomi) ; 
suff".  of  pi.  nouns  appended  to  sing,  nouns,  as  in  Num.  24:  7,  rT^n^sb^  his 
Tcingdom,  the  latter  probably  a  result  of  the  full  orthography,  "^  being  on- 
ly a  mater  lectionis. 


^ 


4i' 


^!W 


66  <^!5>  48 50.    SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ;    TENSES. 

§  48.  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

1.  The  relative  pronoun  ''7,  (as  a  prefix  ■=!),  corresponds  tq  the  He- 
brew ^i2:n  ;  e.  g.  with  noun  suff.  forming  a  Gen.,  rr"'?;^'^';:  2>?3">Z}ri  Nb  '''n, 
WHOSE  language  thou  slialt  not  understand ;  with  the  adverb  of  place, 
■jaP)  ....  '7 ,  sometimes  ■;72n'7^=Hebrew  D'^T  .  .  .  .  ^UJN  ,  where. 

2.  The  interrogative  appears  as  a  Genitive,  where  a  noun  immediate- 
ly precedes  it  in  the  construct  state  ;  e.  g.  riN  "J^  na  whose  daughter 
art  thou  7  Gen.  24:  23. 

§  49.  Mode  of  designating  pronouns  for  which  specific  forms  do  not 
occur  in  Chaldee. 

1.  Reflexive  and  reciprocal.     These  senses  are  indicated, 
a.  Simply  by  passive  verbs ; 

h.  By  the  personal  pronouns ;  e.  g.  Judg.  20:  40.  The  Benjamites 
looked  'jirT'nna  behind  them  [i.  e.  behind  themselves,  the  English  usage 
being  analogous]. 

c.  By  dc: ,  i^,  or  rtrtt  ;  e.  g.  "^UJSD  myself,  ^2-.3  upon  thyself,  Ex. 
9:  14  ;  Nn^-aa  Gen.  18:  12,  Sarah  laughed  within  herself.  So  fT^l^'^r) 
himself,  Ruth  3:  8. 

2.  Indefinite.  Some  one  ^:N  ,  something  fians  ,  Na3ns(=^ Hebrew 
^S'^)  and  Cy^'O  .  So  no  one  ^jj*  N^ ,  in  Nb  ,  nothing  C^'^tt  Nb ,  also 
'^y^iz^  Nb  Job  6:  6. 

3.  Demons{/^ative.  Sometimes  by  NT"  ,  J^^rj,  or  with  the  Hebrew 
article  Ninii ,  N'^nrr . — A  peculiar  mode  of  designating  the  same  idea 
is  to  attach  a  suffix  to  the  preceding  word  ;  e.  g.  ^*2'3T  "3  Dan.  3:  8, 
at  that  time,  (lit.  in  it,  the  time),  comp.  ^^m  N"^"  ""S  Sol.  S.  1:  13. 

Other  forms  might  be  mentioned,  but  they  will  occasion  no  difficulty 
which  the  analogy  of  the  Hebrew  will  not  readily  solve. 


CHAP.  II. 

SYNTAX    OF   VERBS. 


^  50.   Use  of  the  tenses. 

1.  The  same  variety  of  signification  exists  here  as  in 
Hebrew.  Thus  the  Praeter  sometimes,  (especially  in 
verbs  of  existence   or  condition,)  corresponds  to  our  Pres- 


<§§  51.  52.    SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ;    IMPER.  AND  INFIN.  67 

ent,  sometimes  to  our  Pluperfect ;  and  the  Future  to  the 
Optative,  Subjunctive,  or  Imperative  mood.  It  some- 
times expresses  even  past  time.  This  use  of  the  Future 
is  more  common  than  in  Hebrew^.      Comp.  Dan.  4:  9,  33 . 

2.  When  the  Future  is  used  in  an  Optative,  Impera- 
tive, or  Subjunctive  sense,  it  not  unfrequentlj  takes  the 
prefix  7  that^  lit,  and  the  preformative  "^  falls  out;  e.  g, 
]T\^^.  "i^  "^riDn^n  %  presents  be  to  thyself,  Dan.  5 :  17. 
Tll'l^  iiinb,  with  the  beasts  of  the  field  shall  be  thy 
divellim.  Dan.  5:  22.  Though  in  the  latter  case  Gesenius 
(Lehrgeb.  p.  787),  considers  J^ltl?.  as  Inf  instead  of 
U^linpb ,  and  compares  the  frequent  use  of  the  Infinitive 
for  finite  tenses  in  Hebrew.  Comp.  Heb.  Gram.  §  543. 

To  this  use  of  ^  with  the  Fut.,  corresponds  entirely  the  Arabic    \  ^ 

Rosenmiiller's  Inst,  ad  fundam.  Ling.  Arab.  p.  331.  Compare  also  the 
French  que. 

§  51.  Peculiar  mode  of  designating  certain  finite  tenses. 

1.  A  Pluperfect  is  formed.  In  the  later  Targums,  by 
prefixing  >iin  to  the  Praeter;  e.  g.  pSD  >iin  he  had  gone 
out.      The  Arabic  has  a  similar  usage. 

2.  A  kind  of  Paulo-post-future,  to  be  about  to  do  any 
thing,  Is  expressed  by  prefixing  1*^11^.  [ready^  to  the  Inf. 
with  b;  e.  g.  yiSnJ^b  ^^^  ^^i"]?.?  Jehovah  is  about  to  pun- 
ish, i.e.  will  speedily  punish  ;  by  1^1  H;  e.  g.  J<t!3t]tp  Hltll 
h'^th  Gen.  15:  12,  the  sun  was  just  about  setting.  In  the 
latter  construction,  the  sense  of  the  Inf  active  sometimes 
becomes  passive  ;  e.  g.  Deut.  31  :  17.  !?^^tlb  ^St]"^)  they 
shall  speedily  be  destroyed: 

§  52.   Use  of  the  Imperative  and  Infinitive. 

1.  Of  two  Imperatives  connected  by  1,  the  second 
must  often  be  rendered  by  the  Future,  being  a  promise, 


68  §  ^^*    ^^^  ^^  PARTICIPLES. 

of  which  the  first  was  the  condition.  So  in  English  we  say 
Do  and  live,  i.  e.  If  ye  will  do,  ye  shall  live.  See  Heb. 
Gram.  §  505.  a. 

2.  The  use  of  the  Inf.  governed  by  verbs  indicating  de- 
sire, purpose,  &c.  and  sometimes  by  nouns,  with  (or  wlth- 
6ut)  7,  is  more  frequent  than  in  Hebrew;  e.  g.  Ex.  2:  15. 
b^^ph  iHi^S  he  sought  to  kill;  Gen.  29:  7.  ITD^^'p  y^^,  ^\ 
it  is  not  time  to  collect.  7  is  sometimes  omitted,  especially 
when  the  Infinitive  is  governed  by  a  noun;  as  Josh.  10:  27. 
^ilp53  ip  hTp^  ]'-p^ ,  the  time  of  sun-set. 

In  other  respects  these  moods  are  employed  as  in  Hebrew. 

^  53.  Use  of  Participles. 

1 ,  Participles  joined  (a).  To  the  substantive  verbs,  Indicate 
generally  the  Imperfect;  as  rT^liTI  HTn  Dan.  2:  31,  Thou 
sawest  [or,  wast  looking];  also  with  the  Future,  "jfi^^p  ^b 
llllnri  Ruth  1: 20,  Ye  shall  not  call  [be  in  the  habit  of  calling] 
me  Naomi.  The  same  Indefiniteness  seems  to  be  given  to 
the  sense,  as  in  the  corresponding  construction  in  English. 
This  usage  is  more  frequent  in  Chaldee  than  in  He- 
brew, (b)  Joined  to  the  personal  pronouns  and  rT^U^ ,  they 
designate  generally  the  Present  tense,  sometimes  others ; 
e.g.  i^DN!  ^'^n'^  Gen.  32:  11.  /  ivas  afraid,  'Tjri\S  Qi^ 
p'^nS  Judg.  6:  36,  if  thou  wilt  save. 

Note.  Sometimes  the  subst.  verb  is  omitted  in  this  construction  ; 
e.  g.  Job  1:  13.  "J'^riUJ")  ]"'^5i<  "^iia  his  so7is  (were)  eating  and  drinking. 

2.  Participles  govern  nouns;  either,  (a)  In  the  Genitive, 
the  participle  being  in  the  construct  state;  as  '^"iriD  ''!:!Di^ 
1  K.  2:  7,  those  who  eat  at  thy  table;  or,  (h)  In  the  case 
governed  by  the  verb  from  which  they  are  derived;  as 
I'lJl'^S^^  15*^1?  Ex.  25:  20,  stretching  out  their  wings. 


§<§  54 56.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ;    OPTATn^E,  ETC.  G9 

§  54.  Optative  mvod. 

This  Is  indicated  in  Chaldee,  either, 

a.  By  the  simple  future  (compare  §  50) ;  or, 

b.  By  questions  expressing  desire ;  e.  g.  Judg.  9:29,  N73yn^  *1D^'"I73 
who  will  deliver  this  people  to  me  ?  i.  e.  would  that  this  people  were  un- 
der my  control.  Especially  is  the  formula  "Jl^";  'J^  (comp.  Heb.  "jn^  "^72) 
employed  in  this  optative  sense ;  e.  g.  Deut.  28:  67,  N"l-3:i  'jn'^  ]7a,  Ok 
that  it  were  evening,  lit.'  who  will  give  evening  ? 

c.  By  "^^b  with  the  Future,  when  the  wish  respects  future  time ;  as 
^TO^jp^  t\ip_r\1  "^ib,  mai/  hestand  before  thee  !  Gen. 17: 18. — With  the  Prae- 
ter  when  the  wish  regards  time  past ;  e.  g.  Num.  20:  3,  i<2n'^a'7  "^ib  ,  Oh 
that  we  had  died! 

§  55.  Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  subject. 

1.  The  general  principles,  as  well  as  most  anomalies, 
are  the  same  here  as  In  Hebrew.  See  Heb.  Gram.  § 
479,  seq. 

2.  When  a  verb  has  several  predicates  It  is  generally 
put  in  the  plural,  comp.  Heb.  Gram.  §§  481,  493.  Some- 
times however,  especially  when  the  verb  precedes  the  pre- 
dicates. It  is  singular;   so  Gen.  8:  16.    Num.  20:  11. 

§  56.  Impersonal  verbs  and  verbs  with  indefinite  JVominatives. 

1.  Impersonal  verbs  are,  as  in  Hebrew  (comp.  Heb. 
Grammar  §  498),  simply  the  third  person  singular  of 
personal  verbs  without  any  Nominative.  They  also 
take  a  Dative;  e.  g.  1  Sam.  30: 6.  ^il^h  npl^,  David  was 
distressed. 

2.  To  express  the  idea  of  a  verb  with  an  indefinite 
Nominative  ; 

(fl)  The  3d  person  singular  is  sometimes  employed 
exactly  as  in  impersonal  verbs ;  e.  g.  &&')'>!?  ^53Nl  said 
(some  one)  to  Joseph ;     •  ••     :         : 

(Jb)  The  3d  pers.  plur. ;    which  frequently  must  be 


70       §§  57 50.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ;  REGIMKN,  ETC. 

rendered  by  the  passive;  e.  g.  Dan.  4:  13.  [English 
Version  4:  16.]  iS":^!^*^  Hj^b  ^^^  his  heart  be  changed, 
lit.  let  them  change  his  heart. 

(c)  The  2d  per.  sing,  sometimes  expresses  the  same 
idea,  Is.  41:  12. 

[d)  Also  the  plur.  Part.;  as  '!'^"i^i^  Dan.  3:  4,  it  is 
spoken. 

§  57.  Regimen  of  Verhs. 

The  use  of  the  simple  Accusative  or  Dative,  of  two 
accusatives,  and  of  verbs  with  prepositions,  may  be 
learned  from  the  Hebrew  analogy.  Comp.  Heb.  Gr. 
§§  508—513. 

§  58.   V^erhs  used  for  Adverbs. 

In  Chaldee,  as  in  Hebrew  (comp.  Heb.  Gr.  §  533), 
two  verbs  are  often  so  connected  that  one  of  them  may 
be  best  translated  by  an  adverb.  The  verbs  most 
commonly  so  employed  are  Ci'^DIi^  to  add,  for  again, 
more  ;  n^IJli<  io  make  good,  for  tvell;  C'^P  to  precede, 
for  before  j  nin  to  return,  for  again  ;  inifi<  ^^  hastefi,  for 
quickly ;  e.  g.  fi^'^'i^  n*^  "ISHI  DD^  Isaac  digged  again 
(lit.  returned  and  digged)  the  ivells,  Gen.  26.  18. 

So  in  English  we  say,  make  haste  and  come,  for  come  quickly. 

§  59.    Constructio  praegnans  and  Ellipsis. 

1.  Constructio  praegnans.  Comp.  Heb.  Gr.  §  566. 
&iD"inii*  iilib  "^^^  Ti'^b  ''Dtil,  «?i^  Jehovah  changed  (his 
heart  and  gave)  to  him-  another  heart.   1  Sam.  10:  9. 

2.  Ellipsis  is  not  frequent.  Ps.  120:7.  "j^sn  D^d  fi^DJSI 
i^^'^pb ,  I  {desire)  peace,  they  (are)  for  ivar. 


<5i  60.    SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS  ;    CASES.  71 

CHAP.  III. 

SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS. 


§  60.  Designation  of  cases. 

1.  The  Genitive  is  indicated, 

(a)  As  in  Hebrew,  by  the  const,  state  of  the  preceding 
noun;  e.  g.  iX!D7'D  ^Tp^  the  words  of  the  king. 

{b)  By  the  prefix  ^  (or  '''^),  in  which  case  the  preced- 
ing word  is  ordinarily  in  the  emphatic  state;  e.  g.  UiS^^ 
iS^nii'l  the  king  of  the  earth,  i«S'^z2  ^1  iiD^VtJ  the  king's 
captain,  Dan.  2:  15. 

(c)  In  designations  of  time,  by  7 ;  e.  g.  ^^^'^  v  ii^i'^ 
Gen.  8:  5.  the  day  of  the  month;  2  Kings  12:  1,  D 3 1233 
U^^n'^P  yyufi  in  the  seventh  year  of  Jehu. 

Note  1.  The  case  b.  may  be  compared  with  the  Hebrew  b  "luJN: ,  and 
"'■^  be  regarded  as  a  real  relative  ;  thus  N3ba  "'"i  i^ti'^Vd  might  be  ren- 
dered the  captain  who  (belonged  to)  the  king.  NSb^  might  be  regard- 
ed as  a  Dative  (b  being  omitted  by  ellipsis),  or  as  a  Genitive  governed 
by  '^"  in  the  construct  state. 

Note  2.  In  the  later  Targums  the  characteristic  prefix  of  the  Geni- 
tive is  sometimes  omitted;  e.  g.  Esth.  1:  9,  N^d:  Nr\p?3  banquet  of  the 
women.  In  some  instances,  on  the  other  hand,  the  characteristic  of  the 
Genitive  case  ('7)  is  inserted  after  a  noun  in  the  construct  state. 

Note  3.  The  form  of  the  construct,  especially  of  the  const,  pi.,  some- 
times appears  in  the  Targums  instead  of  the  absolute  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  1:  10, 
the  collections  of  water  ■^73"'  N'lp,  he  called  seas. 

2.  As  in  Hebrew,  p  prefixed  forms  the  Dative. 

3.  The  Accusative  takes  either  7  ,  (like  the  Syriac, — 
and  this  is  almost  universal  in  the  Targum  on  Proverbs); 
or  n^  (i.  q.  Heb.  HX);  or  it  has  the  simple  form  of  the 
Nominative. 

4.  The  Vocative  is  generally  expressed  by  the  form 
of  the  emphatic  state. 


72  ^§61.  62.    SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS  ;    USE  OF  CASES,  ETC. 


<^  6 1 .  Peculiar  use  of  the  cases. 

1.  The  Genitive  is  often  employed  instead  of  au  adjective  qualifying 
the  preceding  noun  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  3:  5.  Nl!l^  DibiZ  an  image  of  gold,  i.  e. 
a  golden  image. 

Note  1.  Sometimes  the  first  noun  qualifies  the  second;  e.  g.  ?)ipri2 
*12  ^iil''  «  strong  hand — lit.  with  strength  of  hand. 

Note  2.  The  Hebrew  student  will  not  be  disappointed  to  meet  in 
Chaldee  with  phrases  like  N'^?3bf7.  "''^.'3  Gen.  37: 19,  lit.  master  ofdreatns, 
i.  e.  interpreter  of  dreams ;    Nri'tU  ^3  son  of  a  year,  i.  e.  a  year  old. 

2.  The  Accusative  of  place  answers  the  question,  wliere  1  and  must 
consequently  be  translated  by  at  or  in.  The  simple  Accusative  is  also 
sometimes  employed,  by  synecdoche  where  we  must  render,  in  respect 
of;  e.g.  iTti  T)?'^7aD  ruddy  in  respect  to  complexion,  or  of  a  ruddy  com- 
plexion. Lam.  4:  7. 

This  construction  is  less  fi:equent  in  Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.  In- 
stead of  it  the  Targums  sometimes  employ  3  . 

3.  The  case  absolute,  either  the  Nom.  (which  is  most  frequent),  the. 
Ace,  or  even  sometimes  the  Dat.  (with  i:  signifying  quoad),  is  employed 
as  in  Hebrew.     Comp.  Heb.  Gr.  §§  415 — 417. 

§  62.    Use  of  the  plural  and  repetition  of  nouns. 

1.  The  plural  is  sometimes  employed  where  only  one  of  the  things 
designated  is  meant.  Judg.  12:  7,  Jephthah  was  buried,  l^ba  '^l'^j53  , 
in  one  of  ^Ae  cities  of  Gilead;  Gen.  8:  4,  The  ark  rested  on  one  of  the 
mountains,  etc. 

2.  'j'^")'3  and  'j'^sia'n  are  employed  as  plurals  of  excellence  or  respect. 
On  the  other  hand  "j'^nlrN  has  always  a  plural  sense.  In  the  biblical 
Chaldee  only,  occurs  'J"'3i"'bN  ,  the  3Iost  High,  as  a  name  of  God,  Dan.  7: 
15. 

3.  The  double  members,  etc.,  which  in  Hebrew  require  the  dual,  are 
designated  in  Chaldee  by  the  plural.  When  the  dual  in  Hebrew  is  em- 
ployed to  designate  definitely  two  persons  or  things,  it  is  rendered  in 
Chaldee  by  the  plural  with  )'''yp\ . 

4.  The  immediate  repetition  of  a  noun  indicates, 

a.  Multitude.  Gen.  14:  10,  'J''")'^?.  l^'^^r.  niany  toells. 
h.  Partition  or  separation,  expressed  by  each,  etc. ;  as  Gen.  32:  16, 
N'n'iy  N'^1^!  each  particular  herd;  Esth.  3:  4,  i^l^i"^")  Nigi"^  every  day. 


^§  63 65.    SYNTAX  OF  ADJECTIVES,  ETC.  73 

§63.   Construction  of  adjectives. 

1.  Exceptions  from  the  general  principle  "  that  adjectives  agree  with 
the  substantives  which  they  qualify  in  gender"  and  number"  are  the 
same  as  in  Hebrew.     Comp.  Heb.  Gr.  §  449. 

2.  When  an  adjective  is  the  predicate  of  the  sentence,  it  stands 
generally  after  the  noun.  Rarely,  and  only  when  the  substantive  verb 
is  omitted,  it  precedes. 

3.  Adjectives  used  as  simple  epithets,  follow  their  nouns. 

4.  The  neuter  gender  is  usually  expressed  by  feminine  adjectives ; 
Ps.  27:  4.  "^n"^?^  ii'l'n.  one  thing  have  I  desired. 

5.  An  adjective  is  put  in  the  construct  state  before  a  noun  express- 
ing the  thing  in  respect  to  which  the  quality  is  affirmed  ;  e.  g.  Prov. 
16:  19.  h^"^  bS'ilJ  of  a  humble  spirit,  lit.  humble  of  spirit. 

§64.   Comparison  of  adjectives, 

1.  The  comparative  is  formed,  either 

(a)  By  ']^  simply,  as  in  Hebrew ;   or 

(b)  By  inserting  '^W  or  "l^ri^  {abundant^  but  here  in 
the  sense  of  more)  before  I'D;  e.  g.  Ps.  119;  103.  'j'D'^D^ 
iX'dn'Tn  '\12  I'^n*^  sweeter  than  ^one?/,  lit.  sweet  more  than  etc. 

2.  The  superlative  is  designated  as  in  Hebrew.  Comp. 
Heb.  Gr.  §455.  Lev.  24:  9.  wN^M  ^^M  the  highest  heav- 
en ;   etc. 

§  65.  JVumerals. 

1.  Numerals  from  1  to  10  are  placed  either  before  or  after  nouns. 
Gen.  8:  10.    f  »'T^  tiy^'2':: .    Dan.  3:  24.  -j^nna  Nnbn  . 

2.  From  11  to  100  the  numerals  precede  the  substantive  in  the  plu- 
ral. Jud.  11:33.  V1"!R  r"^.^^-  ^"'-  *^®  *^^^  sometimes  follow  their 
substantives.     Gen.  32:  14. 

Note  1.  In  a  few  instances  the  substantive  appears  in  the  construct 
state  before  its  numeral.  1  K.  8:  63.  Nia-^.  riif*?."!  -pn-jn  "'lin 
220,000  oxen.     Comp.  §  60.  1.  note  3. 

Note  2.  When  n2  precedes  the  numeral,  the  noun  is  in  the  emph. 
St. ;  e.  g.  Gen.  1:  16.    N^'^jiri?  'J'^'in  n;:  the  two  great  lights. 

'lo""' 


74  ^  66.    SYNTAX  OF  PARTICLES  ;    ADVERBS. 

Note  3.  In  designations  of  weights  and  measures  the  noun  express- 
ing the  weight,  etc.  is  often,  though  not  so  frequently  as  in  Hebrew, 
omitted.  Thus  Gen.  37:  28.  ^03  r"3C?3  for  20  (shekels)  of  silver. 
So  in  designations  of  time,  Mtti">  is  still  more  frequently  omitted.  Comp. 
Gen.  8:  13.  Lev.  23:  32. 

3.  Instead  of  the  ordinals  from  1 — 10  the  cardinals  are  not  unfre- 
quently  employed.  Gen.  8:  13.  NtJ"!2'  "'t!^  >  on  the  first  of  the  month. 
2  K.  12:  1.  Nvn;;b  ^'^'4  ri2^3  in  the  seventh  year  of  Jehu — lit.  in  the 
year  VII.  of  Jehu. 

4.  Distributives  are  expressed  by  a  simple  repetition  of  the  cardinals 
without  1 ;  as  N^^TIJ  ^'^J?:V  ^V  sevens.  'J'^'nri  'J'^'nr)  two  and  two,  by  pairs. 
Gen.  7:  2,  9.       ' "        '  ' 

5.  Numeral  adverbs  are  of  two  kinds. 

a.  Those  of  degree  or  intensity.  These  are  expressed  in  Chaldee 
by  prefixing  ^h  to  the  cardinals;  e.g.  Dan.  3:  19.  N^iUJ  Ih^  seven 
fold. 

h.  Those  of  repetition.  These  are  expressed,  precisely  as  in  Eng- 
lish, by  times,  'J"'373T ;  as  Josh.  6:  3.  itJ^^T  N'lh,  one  time,  once.  Ex.  34: 
23.  nVn  'J'^:?3T  three  times,  etc. 


CHAP.  IV. 

SYNTAX  OF  PARTICLES. 


^  66.  Adverbs  generally. 

1.  The  repetition  of  an  adverb  expresses 

a.  Intensity.  Deut.  28:  43.  Nnhnb  Nnhnb  very  loio ; 
h.  Repetition  or  continuation.    Ex.  23:  30.  "T^i'.T  "i"'i';T  by  little  and 
little. 

2.  Adverbs  sometimes  qualify  nouns  by  being  placed  before  them  as 
nouns  in  the  construct  state.  Gen.  18:  4,  N^Q  T'y"  a  little  water. 

3.  Adverbs  sometimes  take  prepositions  before  them ;  e.  g.  TN2  in- 
stead of  TN  simply.     Comp.  Gesenius'  Lehrgeb.  p.  828. 

Note.  In  the  last  three  cases,  1.  6,  2  and  3,  these  adverbs  may  be 
regarded  as  real  nouns.  Thus  ^'^12  ^"^^It  a  small  quantity  of  water, 
TN3  at  that  time.    And  so  of  many  other  cases. 

4.  Many  adverbs  are  expressed  by  periphrasis  of  verbs.     See  §  58. 


<§§  67.  68.    NEGATIVES INTERROGATIVE    PARTICLES.  75 


^  67.  JVegatives. 

1.  The  same  distinction  exists  between  Nb  and  D'^b. ,  as  in  Hebrew 
between  Nb  and  'J'^i* ;  the  latter,  in  both  languages,  implying  the  sub- 
stantive verb. 

2.  bb  i<b  none,  nobody,  nothing.  So  in  Hebrew.  Compare  Gese- 
nius  Heb.  Lex.  word  i<b  . 

3.  In  oaths  or  strong  declarations,  "JN  or  QN,  if,  takes  the  place  of  a 
direct  negative.  Thus  Is.  62:  8.  "jriN  QN  I  will  not  give,  lit.  if  I  will 
give.     So  J<b  QJ«  affirmatively.  Josh.  14:  9. 

4.  "  That — not"  is  sometimes  expressed  by  bXD  before  the  Inf  e.  g. 
Lev.  26: 19.  I  will  make  the  heavens  strong  as  iron  above  you  NnriNb?3 
N^D73,  that  they  may  not  send  down  rain,  {\it.fro7n  that  they  should,  etc.) 
For  the  signification  of  b  alone  prefixed  to  the  Infinitive,  see  §50.  2. 

§  68.  Interrogative  particles. 

1.  The  direct  question  is  indicated  by  Hi ,  or  has  no  peculiar  designa- 
tion. 

2.  The  double  interrogation  is  generally  expressed  by  tN  ,  .  ,  .  n  ; 
e.  g.  Num.  13:  20.  H^D-^s  tiN  N^surt,  whether  good  or  bad.  1  K.  22:  15. 
2>j7jn3  dN  .  .  .  .  b"^t3lrj ,  shall  we  go  up  to  Ramoth  Gilead  to  battle,  or 
shall  we  forbear  ? 

3.  The  question  with  Nbn  ,  being  employed  simply  to  excite  atten- 
tion, is  fi-equently  better  rendered  by  behold !  Comp.  iH.'^'ri  under  the 
word  Mb  in  Gesenius'  Heb.  Lex.  Thus  Deut.  11:  30.  N'n^il^  1=12^  Nbin 
^-'7"?!1  behold  they  are  on  the  other  side  Jordan,  lit.  are  they  not,  etc. 
So  also  the  frequent  expression,  'J'^^'^rn^  I^SN  Nbtl  behold  they  are  written. 


76  Par.  I.   Regular  Verbs.  §§  11—13. 


Peal. 

Ithpeel. 

Pael. 

Prael 

t.  3  m. 

^Dj"? 

Vopnu^ 

<^.P- 

3  f. 

n^tJp 

nV^pni^ 

nVqp 

2  m.   i<n_  or  'Pibjyp^ 

nbbpni^ 

^.^#- 

2f. 

^^^P. 

nVopni* 

nb'rp,p 

1  c. 

f^V^.f? 

n!p.qp^l^{ 

nbt^p 

PI. 

3  m. 

^yof) 

^^bpni< 

^Vbfi 

3  f. 

i^bb]? 

i^^bprii^ 

^^^.P 

2  m. 

]iri!?Dp 

]^n!?Dpnii, 

]^ntep_ 

2f. 

]T)hp2 

]riVopnfi< 

l^.^^'^.P 

1  c. 

tiD^bpni^ 

wHj^bp_ 

Inf. 

^^K^. 

ii^bpn^^ 

f       Tf •          •         • 

&i^bp 

Imp. 

2  m. 

^■^P. 

^Dpni^ 

^'^.P- 

2f. 

'V^P 

'i^bprii^ 

'^V^.P- 

PI. 

2  m. 

''^^.P 

l^bpn^s 

^^■^.P 

2f. 

N^3^b_pn&5 

^^?V^.P 

Fut. 

3  m. 

^P-PI 

-^.pni 

^'^.P-l 

3  f. 

^p.p^ 

'^Dpiin 

^^rA 

2  m. 

Vopn 

^cppnn 

^^?A 

2f. 

rV^p^. 

•j^yjjprir) 

rV^p-^' 

1  c. 

^■^.p^'?. 

Vtipiii^. 

^""^.p^^! 

PI. 

3  m. 

r^^P? 

iiVopn-] 

1l!:l3p_^; 

3  f. 

iV^P.^ 

lVqp_n^ 

ik^t: 

2  m. 

^iVjpn 

■j^Vjjpnn 

v^'^m 

2f. 

]Vqp'ri 

■)^^bp_rin 

■jbtipn 

1  c. 

^^^p2 

ltp_pn] 

V^.p_3 

1  Part.    m. 

Vop^ 

-4^.P-^. 

f. 

•r     :'lT 

vSVLDp.ri 

2  Part.    m.  ^^LJp  b^^^pPP.  bl^.'pP 


Par.  I.  Regular  Verbs.  §§  11—13. 


Ithpaal. 


Aphel. 


77 
ittaphal. 


Vop_nN; 
n^Dp_nwS 

r]VL3p_n>5 

nbL3p_nwS 

^^!op_riw>^ 

N^^pp_n\s 

'j^nVL2p_ri"wS 

inb^tipnit 


yjpi^ 
nVqpii 
nVopii 
nbtp.pi^ 
nV'opfii 

i^bpi^ 

•j^nVop^^ 
■jnVLjpi^ 
ND^bpii 


VjpnwS 
nVjpriwS 
nVop^,^^ 
nb^Dpni^ 
nVjpni^ 

iyopn_i>5 

w^^bprivs 

■jinVop'm 

•jnVopn.s 

i^DVopnw^ 


^«^bpn^« 


i<^bps* 


i^tJUpnii 


^LDjPnv>5 

^'^?,^- 

''^ppnwV 

^VbpwX 

•ibioiprix 

iVbpi< 

wSDb^p.n.^. 

.    ^«5^bp5i 

^top_n^ 

^4^?.'- 

Vtipnn 

yjp'n 

VL3p_nn 

^'^.K^- 

I^V^EH^ 

]^bp}p_ 

^'^-t^.^. 

(bt}.ji^tx)       ^jp^i^ 

1^bti3p_n'] 

p;:Dp;_ 

iV^.P-Hl 

i^^.^'p;. 

'jiyLDp_rn 

■j^iVopn 

ihpz™. 

I.^P^ 

VLipflD 

Vbp3 

^Dpn>s 
'^^ppm 
iVbpm 


biypTi) 
Vopnn 
Vopnn 

I'^iVqpn: 

^Vopn,"] 

^iVt2pnn 

■jbDpnn 


btyppiD 


78  Par.  II.  Regular  Verbs  with  suffixes.  §  16. 

Suffixes.       Sing.      1  com.       2  masc.  2  fem.  3  masc.  3  fem. 


Pe.Pr.3m.           ^^VjjP       r^j:ip_              ^^;q^_  JnVojP  tlVOi? 
2  m.         ^2Tpiyp^  &c.   Same  as  3  f.  except  that  it  does  not  take 

2£      ''3'^nV^P. ''H^'^.V^P.  ™V^P 

ic. TjnV^V?- "^^.V^P.  »^^.V^P  f^^^.'^P 

PI.     3  m.       ''diVjjp   rpyjp_         'n^5?^P_  "^^."iVop,  n^Vjp. 

2m.''Dr3^nyjp  J^P.'I^'^V^P  J^5^^V^P 

ic.    —  v}p-?.     vk"^?.  ^^?}p-?.  ^'^i^yp-?. 

Inf.           ^:^^^bp2^.  il^.?P.  T-i^PPP.  ^^^^^^PTP.  ♦^'V^.P^. 

Fut.     3  m. TV^P"!  ♦^V^P^ 

PI.      3  m.     '^DDl^qp^^'!]Diyq|?^  ^DDTTja^VLqp.';  nDlVtqp^  ♦^J^Vqp'] 

Imp.  2  m. '^]_'i3_^yL:p_ ^Vop  i«n_n!:pp. 

2f.           '^D^bp.p 'H'^V^.P  ^n^'V^P 

PI.     2  m.  '^DD'^qiVop "^iny^pp  i^^n^Vop 

2f.      ^^D^Dp ^n?V^p.  ^"^n^V^p. 

Pa.Praet.              ^Dbrqp_       ^bp}^              Tj^pj"?  fl^Op,  nbtqp 

Inf.              ''^■'^"^P  ^"^y^'^Jt       ^^^^^y>.  ^r'.'^b'^p  nni!?r5p 


Par.  II.  Regular  Verbs  with  suffixes.  §  16.  79 

Plur.    1  com.  2  masc.            2  fern.  3  masc.  3  fem. 

i^JDVqjp  I'l^V^P.      ]i?P^.  T^^V^R  ]t^P}L 

w^jnbDp^  I'l^nV^F?   )?n--"^P.  i^^^V^P.  (3^.V^p. 

suffixes  of  the  second   person. 

i^D'^riVop.     P^^^P2  ]T'^y^-?. 

li^rib/gp    )?.J^.V^p.  p^nV^p  l^riV^p 

15  i«]iVjp_  liiD^iVqp.  1?;.iVl:p_  ll3^!:t:p_  131^12^ 

vVDD  iij^nVjp     li^iriV^p  IJ'iri^^Dp 

I'l^^V^R     1?.3V^P  I'^^dV^P  1;3V^P 

iXDVop^,  I'l^V^P^.     1?.'.PP^  fJ^V^"^.  )\I.V^P^ 

&«55V^.P^  I'l^^.V^.P^  IP.^.V^.P^  i^^V^P.^  if^P^P. 


fciDDV^PI   I'l^^.V^P^    Ir'.^^.PP'!     Ti^V^P^     IjV^P.*! 
j<53l^qp^  I'l^^.'i^PP?  P.^^^PP^    1^3^5?t:p^    ]T\Vci}>;^, 


^3^.'?P 

^I3^pp 

13K9P 

Nj^Vpp 

]l3^^Dp 

irK^p 

JiDl^Jpp 

]l3i;?Dp 

V}^'^?: 

^33^PP 

^iD^bpp 

133.!^.9P: 

v^iD^tDj? 

r^^.P.P 

1?.V^.P 

■jisbtop 

i;^p- 

^<]n1^ap_  ]iin^^rop_  y^p^b^y>_  )inni!:tDp_  inny^Dj? 


80 


Par.  III.   Verbs  Pc  Nun.  §  18. 


Peal. 

Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

Praet.  3  m. 

jPSD 

pSw^ 

pEri&{ 

3  f. 

np_si 

rip_£>^ 

z^p-^.^^^ 

2  m. 

npSD 

np£fi^ 

npsnws; 

2f. 

rip^si 

npbwv 

ri'p£_riw^{ 

1  c. 

npsi 

npSi< 

ripEinj^ 

PI.       3  m. 

^pSD 

^pl^^'i 

^pEm 

3  f. 

^tp^bi 

i>{pl5< 

i<p|m 

2  m. 

•jinpD] 

'pnpEii 

•jinp^srivx 

2f. 

inpd 

]^.p^.^- 

]np£ni« 

1  c. 

i<5p)5D 

iXDpL^ 

NDplnws; 

Inf. 

pE5q 

ixpl^j 

(t     T     — 

&{pi^riv^^ 

Imp.     2  m. 

P^. 

p£wX 

pEri>^ 

2  f. 

'ipl 

'^pl^^'i 

''psrii^ 

PI.       2  m. 

^p\ 

ipbfii 

ipl:n>* 

2f. 

.NDpX 

4^DpE>y 

jiDpsnwy 

Fut.     3  m. 

pSS"] 

P?.- 

psri'] 

3  f. 

p^n 

psn 

pEnn 

2  m. 

psn 

psn 

psnn 

2f. 

l^psn 

rp^^ 

I'^penn 

1  c. 

p^.^ 

pDJ^ 

psnws 

PI.       3  m. 

l^P^i 

i^ps: 

ppsn^ 

3f. 

1P^^ 

)m 

1P^^^ 

2  m. 

■jipsn 

l^psn 

lip^nn 

2f. 

IP^n 

1ps?n- 

ip^^n 

1  c. 

pS3 

pSD 

P^-J^-^ 

1  Part.    m. 

P^.? 

p£^ 

f. 

fi<pD3 

't  :it 

N]?E^    ' 

2  Part.   m. 
f. 


Par.  IV.  Verbs  Ajin  doubled.  §  19. 


Peal. 


Aphel. 


Praet.  3  m. 

3  f. 

2  111. 

2  £ 

1  c. 

3  m. 
3  f. 

2  m. 
2  f. 
1  c. 


PI. 


Inf. 


Fut. 


PI. 


Imp.    2  m. 

2  f. 
PI.        2  m. 

2  f. 


p-^ 

ip-i 


5<]p'^'1l« 


3  in. 
3f. 
2  m. 

2  f. 

1  c. 

3  m. 
3  f. 

2  m. 
2  f. 

1  c. 


P'T 

p''^n 

rp^fi 
i^pT 

1PT 


PT- 
p-^n 

p-iri 

rp^n 

p'lii 

PPT- 

IP.T- 
pp'nn 

1P^.^- 

P^.3 


1  Part.    m. 
f. 


PP4 

wS^ppM 


2  Part.     m. 

f. 


P^PI 


p^^ 


Ittaphal. 

p'Mri&^ 

np3n&^ 

np"riw^ 

'ipl^^^ 

pnpin>^ 


'P'-rq      ^ZV{      ^Zl^J^. 


p'^nwx 
''pf'ini^ 
ip^Mmy 


p'^^1 
p^nn 

p'^nn 

rpl^l^ 

pi^l^^i^. 
pp'nn'; 

]ip^rir] 


Par.  V.        81 

Verbs  IS  .  §  20. 


Peal.  Pr.  ^!?'| 

&;c.  reg. 

Inf.     ^b^ri. 

Imp.        'I'P 

(inn  nn) 
Fut.    ibv. 

1  Part.       I'p; 

2  Part.      Tb^ 


'P'lm 
ixp'^nn 


Ithpeel. 

l^.'^n.x 

Pael.  Pr. 
Fut. 

Ithpaal. 

"^!n*? 

Aphel. 

Fut. 

Par.  VI. 

Verbs '^D.    §20. 

Peal.  Pr. 
Fut. 

Pael.  Pr. 
Fut. 

Aph.  Pr.     n^D\N! 
Inf.    5^rj\Nf 

Fut.  n^D^'i 


11-^ 


82  Par.  VII.  Verbs  Ay  in  Vav.  §  22. 


Peal. 

Ithpeel. 

Pael. 

Ithpaal. 

Praet 

.3  m. 

°P. 

Dp^nwS 

n^p_ 

^-Pn^ 

3  f. 

n^_p^ 

n^pnj^ 

n^'.p 

nl3;p_nwN 

2  ra. 

nt:p^ 

nr)_pnii 

nt)^j_ 

n^^^p_nN^ 

2f. 

ritiiP 

n^j'PiiwS 

ritiy_ 

nt]'^p_n5< 

1  c. 

n^£  or  ri^j? 

ritijPriwV 

nri;p_ 

n^.^p_nws 

PI. 

3  m. 

i53p; 

inpm 

'^R 

'itf'pnw>^ 

3  f. 

r  't 

ix^]prii«^ 

^^?!.ji 

^i5D'^jP^i^{ 

2  m. 

lin^p. 

I'ln^i^riu^j 

pna;^.j? 

TiJn^.:p_nw>i 

2f. 

1^.^!^- 

inripj-ii^ 

]™y- 

■jnn^^p_n'w^i 

I  c. 

^?^.P- 

i(Dt3"t^p_nvX 

Inf. 

Qp^q 

vx^pnt^ 

iNi:Q^^p_ 

5«^^^p_n&{ 

Imp. 

2  m. 

Dip 

□p^nwy 

o.^.E 

n^p_ni^ 

2f. 

•^^D^p 

^5fjprii< 

^i2};p_ 

■i^'p™ 

PI. 

2  m. 

laip 

'i^p^nwx 

153'p_ 

')52^_p_ni^^ 

2  f. 

Kiqip 

jiD^jp^n'^^ 

**?^.!.E 

i«5t)/;^jpnii 

Fut. 

3  m. 

Q'lpl 

np^n^ 

^^.F-"! 

^iin"! 

3f. 

D^pri 

Dp^nn 

°?.r-^'^" 

D^j^nn 

2  m. 

nipn 

Dpnn 

Dy_n 

D;;ip_rin 

2f. 

■j^^qipri 

V^Z^P. 

r^^P-'H 

1^5:^p_rin 

1  c. 

nip.x 

^?A^. 

ay_wS!" 

n^jpnwNj, 

PI. 

3  m. 

■j'ltt'ip^ 

I'l^pn^ 

r^'.P-'! 

P^tPn*! 

3f. 

\^?] 

i^i^ 

1^!P^ 

I^IP-*"!'! 

2  m. 

■ji^Dipn 

Ti^p^nn 

1iatp_n 

■|i^^p.nn 

2f. 

]:!2^pn 

pzyi^. 

]:a^P_ri 

i^tP-HH 

1  c. 

mp: 

Dp^nD 

n^j^_i 

D"^p_nD 

1  Part.   m. 

G;.p,  Ci^j*? 

^!r-^. 

f. 

wS^']jP 

^^y-p. 

2  Part.  m. 

D^p 

apnt: 

^-P-^ 

D^p_nti 

f. 

^}n^"P 

ii12pTi)2 

ii)2^p)2 

i^12^pm 

Par.  VII.    Verbs  Ayin  Vav.   §22. 


83 


Apliel. 


Ittaphal. 


Polel. 


Ithpolal. 


n^'jPws 

D'lpriwx 

m^p 

D^lpDwS 

^^^K^. 

n^'^priN; 

r\iyDj\p 

nMipn>; 

r\12y^i<_ 

riq'^pnN 

n^^ip 

n^_i]iprifi«i 

nx]^p.ws 

nn^pn^y 

nMip 

n^^i:ipni<. 

nt:;p_Ni. 

nt);pn>{ 

HMip 

n^D^^qipn.^ 

nn^'pwx 

^^yp.^. 

^nx3ip 

^^HiprivV 

^^y.^. 

ji^^pnN 

it^^Dlp 

vH^^QIpnN; 

lin^qjp^Ni. 

prn;priwv 

■jin:q:qip 

]WMpnwV 

i^.^r?.^. 

]nq^pniS 

]n^^^ip 

'}n^^^_ipri>{ 

■     ^?^J?.^: 

wSD^'^pnx 

iXD^Dbipri^i 

^'^PJ^. 

^^'^.^^ 

j^^bipDiX 

D'^jPNi, 

^""pn^ 

n^_ip 

n^ipnvv 

^^y.^.- 

•'^q^pri^^ 

•'^qbip 

'^^qiDipni^ 

153*^^5^^ 

in'^priws; 

•in^^ip 

^nbipn^v 

.xD^/'pnii 

.XD^b.ip 

jiDqbipn&i 

^^r. 

D'^pn^, 

n^^ipl 

ciDipn'', 

a'^p^n 

D'^pnn 

Driipn 

D^ipnn 

n^pn 

D^pnn 

D^ipn 

D^ipnr 

r^.?.^. 

I'^ti^pnr 

r'^^.'^pn 

■j'^at)ipnn 

Q^'p.^^. 

r:^pn>{, 

cr!_ipN 

Da_ipn.v 

1^^?;. 

pn^pn'] 

]^t:^^ip^ 

^l^XDipn^ 

i^;p: 

i^'^P.^.i 

]^^^F. 

l^a.ipr'] 

■jlti^n 

li^'^prn 

■;i52t;ipn 

■jis^qipnn 

-,i3^pn 

"^^""prir] 

]^X]ipr 

im^pnp^ 

a'^pD 

D'^pFI] 

cri^ipq 

D^QipnD 

c^p5:_ 


ap^53 


c^pnt: 


G^1pt3 


D^ipn^ 
iin^ipri^: 


84  Par.  VIII.  Verbs  Lamedh  Aleph.  §  23. 


Peal. 

Ithpeel. 

Pael. 

Praet.  3  ra. 

'-  ^\^. 

^bins; 

^V5 

3  f. 

nhi 

n^binwNj 

n^Vs 

2  m. 

^^^h  ^^r^ 

n^?5n\^i 

n^V^ 

2f. 

nVy,  n^b.^ 

n'^^p.rinfi^ 

n^^s 

1  c. 

''n^'?^,  rr^^'i 

n'^b.'in'ws 

r^^5 

PI.       3  m. 

'"'     i^ 

T^!?Vn\N{ 

1^^5 

3  f. 

ni5$a 

vy^?!in.x 

ii;?5 

2  m. 

l^n'^Sa 

'jin'i^in.N 

pn^s 

2f. 

ir'.'^^.^ 

iny^psn^i 

I^.^V^ 

1  c. 

^i^% 

ND^ftriwNj 

iil^% 

ini: 

iih^p. 

nij^^nwX 

Imp.     2  ni. 

^-T.  ^''^}. 

fi«-.  "'b^n^^ 

j(-  "^hi 

2f. 

t6i 

^bjp,^. 

ini:^ 

PI.       2  m. 

■^bi 

i^Vm 

iV5 

2f. 

^:}\ 

^^D^^m 

^3?^ 

Fut.      3  m. 

\  ^)}!^. 

\  Nbsn'] 

"i-.  iitihy^ 

3  f. 

i\b:\n 

^r.?n^ 

vs^;_n 

2  m. 

v\b:iri 

j^b^nn 

fi^V5n 

2f. 

V'^}^. 

r^'^^n^. 

r^'^-K 

1  c. 

>i^3fi<_ 

^b}p.^. 

wVV5wV!" 

PI.        3  in. 

1^'^^.^ 

Vb\r\^. 

,  I'^^V. 

3  f. 

»!^.^.1 

v}i^^ 

'  i!''^^? 

2  m. 

■ji^in 

■jiS^nn 

pbiri 

2f. 

V.^.A^ 

j;;^5nn 

r^:^-^! 

1  c. 

^^V^^ 

i«^5riD 

i^tV^i 

1  Part.    m. 

^c".? 

fi«V55q 

f. 

T  :iT 

2  Part.   m. 

''-.  *^^.? 

i^bsn^ 

^byn^ 

f. 

^t'liji 

ii^Um 

ii'^hyi^ 

Par.  VIII.  Verbs  Lamedh  Aleph.  §  23. 


85 


Ithpaal. 

Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

""k^Jl^. 

\.  ^^A^- 

'•^^nii 

nilV^nwy 

nil^.V"^ 

nilbiriii 

n'^'psnwx 

n^V^fi^ 

rr^Viriii 

rT'V^n^^ 

n'^^ii^ 

n^^Vn« 

rr^V^nj^ 

n'lipii^ 

rr^^jin^t 

rVsnj^ 

^^biii 

i^!ijin&< 

riij^'^'ini^ 

fti^b^ii* 

is*;;!pin_&5 

rifijVsnwy 

r\i6y^_ 

Hfij^^riwS 

«_  "^v^n^^ 

wx_  ''^jji^ 

ii_  ^b}m 

j^iV5n'N 

ft<^^ii^ 

t6ir\_t^^ 

iV^riwX 

i^ifi^ 

i5in&« 

i«5?5n^« 

^T^'^i^- 

i«5\5irij{. 

''_  iib}_^) 

''-  5^*^.:^! 

*^_  jxb^n'] 

i^bsnn 

^^.^.^ 

N^,:inn 

iiVsnr] 

i^b^n 

ji^inn 

^kiP?. 

iy3 

^c'.^^3 

i«^5^ 

^!;!^.?"^ 

^\^^P. 

•^l^i^D 

j^^^^jnx} 

fii-^Vanxj 

j«^!?i:a 

it'^^iri^Q 

12 


SG  Par.  IX.   Declension  of  nouns  masculine. 

Sing.  Abs.         Const.  Emph.      Suff.  3  s.  m.    Suff.  2  pi.  m. 

Dec.  I.  Singular.  <^  31. 
Dec.  II.  Singular.  <^  32. 

(6)       ins      inD         wSDns         nDn-)      "jiDDns 

^  I    •»  X  I    ••  X  X  ~:  T  ••  ";  "T  f         •   ••  X 

Dec.  hi.  Singular.  §  33. 

(a)(r^i2)'7\'?p(i\bi2)i^p^    i^:^bp_        nsb^_     ii^?^.^ 

(b)  I^T  1tt_T  iVD^^T  HD^^T  ]'^^^P,\ 

{c)      thn      rhn        i^)2bn        nti>n.     p:3^.^n. 

(^)     r?     r?       ^T^.      ♦^r?.     i'^^^.'^?. 

(or  N->I?*7i;5  etc.) 
Dec.  IV.  Singular.  §  34. 

(a)         na        na  ^«^a  n?a        liD^a 

(i)  T?  Tip.  fi^J5^  Wy  -jilDiS? 

(c)        nx       l!;>{  ws^SwNt  rim       ]^^^^ 

Dec.  V.  Singular.  §  35. 

(«)        vNb       fti^a  ii^b}^  n.'^^.a       ■jiD^'^a 

Dec.  VI.  Singular.  §  36. 


Par.  IX.   Declension  of  nouns  masculine.  87 


Plur.  Abs.         Const.               Emph.      Suff.  3.  s.  m.  Suff.  2  pi.  m. 
Dec.  I.    Plural. 

iniD       ma       N^mr:        '^ni-iTo  I'lDnit: 

T^k^^.     ^?!v^.    K'^yy.     ^*t^\^^.  v^^ti^^. 

Dec.  II.  Plural. 

mbv      '^tiby      s^^^^s?       %^in^5?  ]^^^)2by 

''jns       wv^'Dns       ^nwD  ■ji^'^jris 


Dec.  III.  Plural. 

]'^':hp_      ^'Dbi2       i!^'dhp_       ^Tfi^bp,  V^^H^P. 

•jm          '^D^T           N^D^T           ^mi21  'liD'^DtlT 

l^^q^n.      '^:abn      fi^^^^n.       ''H'^^^.n.  I'l^'^?),^. 

•jhai;?        '^r;?,       5^w        ''niD^?  li^^r?. 

{^p.":?)             (N^ji?)            (^^113^?)  (I'l^T:?) 

1^^'ip^      vij-ip^      5<v^p^jp       ^niuiip^  I'l^'^^lE 

i'l^D^jPnX]  ^^.t:p_n^   ^^!!^^p-^.^  ^^S^^TJP.  V^'kP^P-^P. 

Dec.  IV.  Plural. 

V9.         '^P.         ^IP         ^^^P  V^^P 

'(■^ai^        "^^ii        ^^^52^«        'iniSN  ■ii:D''52w>t 


Dec.  V.  Plural. 

"h^         ii^b:s         ^ni!:a        ]^^^b^ 


vk^p^     ^\^p-     ^^}-^p-.     '^n'l^^^     v^^^^p 

Dec.  VI.  Plural. 

^''fi^53^j?      "^fijt^lj?        \v^j|?      ^n'^^^li^      I'l^'^^^.^.l^ 


88  Par.  X.  Declension  of  nouns  feminine. 

Abs.  Const.  Emph.      Suff.  3.  s.  m.    Suff.2pl.  m. 

Dec.  VIT.  Singular.  <5,  37. 

(a)  t^:^^ii2     r\2^ii2     i^nD^itt     nriD^it!    liDnD^n^ 

(b)  ^im    nnm    J^nnM    ^^.""l^^  lisnntij^ 

(c)  ^thp_     n^^bi2     i«nl3^.^     ^^!\^k^_  I'l^H''^^.^ 

Plural. 

(a)    15^^^    nmp^   i^nri-^.  ''H'^^ri'^  r^nri^. 

Dec.  VIII.  Singular.  ^  38. 

(a)  ws!?52n_j^    nb^q-ifi^    ^^ri^anfi^   »^J?.^.^1^1  I'lSJl^.^^ifi* 

(b)  i^^i:i,        n^U       ND'^^s       nn^U     liDn'^^a 

(c)  IST       n^5T       u^niiDT       nn^ST     lisn'iST 

Plural. 

'"^JT  ^I"'  TTJT  •  ■'"?▼  '  •T'T 

Dec.  IX.  Singular.  <§  39. 

nj{55'7jp    nvV^^jP     i<n';:Q"i|?     nnWjP  li^H-^IE 

Plural. 

Ijj^lj?    Dij^Q'ij?     i<n;557|?  %"]in;J5'7jP  li^nwj? 


Par.  XL  Numerals. 


89 


Par.  XI.     Numerals. 

A.     Cardinals,  etc.  from  I  to  10. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 


Ordinals. 


No. 

Abs. 

Const. 

Abs. 

Const. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

1 

^*3 

■1*3 

T  -J 

nnii 

■'^IR 

^^'^'115 

2 

ri^ 

■''1^ 

r»3i*3 

■»ri^n 

i:?»? 

N5;3n 

3 

nnVn 

-  T  : 

C^n^n)  '•n'^iin 

Nn-i^n 

4 

m'2-)i< 

^•2-jN 

^ni'3'nN 

''?''^1. 

^^r^^. 

5 

N'^bart 

n'vyan 

Tijah 

''^."■r^^d 

■«uj"«ari 

Nn'^'iS'^ah 

6 

nn-^ 

rrij 

Tinuj 

•'    T      • 

•'niD 

Nn'^n''n'^_ 

7 

nya-ij 

nsjittj 

ynuj 

"Tl^^^j 

■.yii-OJ 

T-:     '  s 

8 

N^3nn 

n^ian 

•"  :  - 

■'3"'nn 

Nns'^wn 

9 

n^uin 

ns'iJri 

:>uJn 

■^ry'iJn 

-    •    s 

T      ••        •        I 

10 

N'lD2> 

r^o? 

^D? 

■'Pi'iDy 

^VD? 

Nrr^ri^D?, 

11 

13 
13 
14 
15 

16 
17 

18 

19 


B.    Cardinals  from  11  to  19 

Masculines. 

{ 'nD^n^n  )        -'      ^^  • 


(-lO's'^n)  I 


Feminines. 


CHALDEE  CHRESTOMATHY. 


PART  I. 


SELECT  SENTENCES  TOR  GRAMMATICAL  EXERCISE. 


^I53'i!2-r3  uh  ni«^  ^nni  t^:::^^  rr^nrr^  ^ntijp-n*^   3 

IT  :  -     I  V 

:  vx>'-l^i^  .ynriD^T  v\^mi  j<Vud^  ''^^  ^!:  'jn'^i   7 
-^33^.  ^5■)SD'^  ri^in"]  n;;n^[^.  ^ej^.vjj  "in::;  ^l?r^^'^  ^^ 

i-r  -  :  -     '    J    :  -   :  •  c" :  -^        :  - 


92  PART  I.       SELECT  SENTENCES. 

'IT      -)•-:■      'c  :       )• :  •    :        ^T  -:- 

•linn  ''d'^p53  m'^n^Ji  i^'ian  ''V^'i  ii^2iD-'^52i^-n'^  12 

IT :     c  T  -:    I   -!•  -:  - 

imuii  Ji^wv!?  115^  "^iriiii   •jii'^D'^n  ^r\:ycii  '^^m^  13 

IT   :       )-  -rlr;        I  : 

(T    ;    •  ;        '   t't      •  ••  ;  ▼ ;  J  iSt -;  •       (;       •    ; 


1"  T  : 


IT        Jt;  xcttv;       jt  ;  /j..   t    ;    •  c"  : 

'  it  ;  • 

j>i5?-ii<3    m^^Ti    in^i-'^n^   i><"ii*5-n''    "ii^Dnnni  19 

•  it   ;    •    : 

r-T^n^ni^i  n^sn  '^ni^aipi  ^nin  'rin^.N   ^'^-n-'  20 

-"•;":•:        at  ;   •  •     j  tI  :  c-  ;  •       'jt  t  •..;     Jt; 

'  It    :  -    ;  )T  X  ;•; 

IT  - ;         )•• ;     •  c"' ;       :      '  T  -;  -  :      ' 


PART  II. 


EXTRACTS  FROM   THE  TARGUMS. 


I.    History  of  the  fall.      Gen.  3. — Onkelos. 

'^^^}^^.  T.  ^^y-  ^^\  ^yi  ^^ri.  ^'^^  ^^y^  ^t^.  ^tp^.  ^ 

]«nD5-]b\^  5?5  ^TS^  ^^yi^^  wvnn.x  nn^^si  t  fi^nD;  "i^\^^   2 

h-^j}  i^-Dip  ^^r\  1-iw^  t  iin^^n  nan  j«!?'  ]«nnwx^  is^in  5 

N^^snoi^b  N0^\^?  :i5-ini  'j'^d;^:^^  i^in-i&ij  n.ws;.i  ^iD^n^. 
na::^  tn!::j?nb"qN  nnn;i  n^DNi  ♦^3>^.?.  rin^^ODl  n^n 

*  rnt  1'^'^^.  ''"^?'.^-  T'-^^P.  ^^PP-  V^\  vj^tqni  p3w>i, 
vvnDrjin  'qV.rin^  o^H'^'i^.  ^H"^'^'!^.'''?.  ^E"^-  ^'^tim  s 

13 


94  PART  II.   EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 

^iD^n  Nns:^i  ^^rn  'rjisj^q-!::^  .sna  nin  Vs^i  i<T5?3 
Vn^  .xnn.^«  rni  ^D^m  ^rdw^j  inni'i   \  'ri^^n  ^^i^-^s  15 

^i■]b^s-]^  A^.^^^^t.1  '^ririws  n^:^^^.  nt^sj?  ^>s!.  "i^t?. 
'^'^^'1^2  k:^-)wx  iND''^  n\D^  bii^n  i6  n^^52)^  'Tjri^j^D  ^"^ 

n^:sri  I'^r^^'i^.  Tr^^l  ♦  '^^!'l  ^^''^  ^'^  »^?*^^.^^.  ^^?^.  ^^ 
b^::^n  ^^jEw^i  wsriiJ'.TS   t  ^*"5Rn"i  ^i^D5^"n:l  ^'^^'^f?.!  "^  ^^ 

n>s  njn  ri'^nriws  dv^j  Diij  ^y^  \  ii^nn  ^ns^b^  nj^  20 
D'lNb  D'^n'^N}  ;■]  inyi  t  ixtiDwv-^pa  ^d^  j<a&i  nin  i^^n  21 
J  I'ls^s!:^^']  'jinnirs-^d5q-b";5?  np/^-i^uiinb  n^nn5^b,i 
n\D^-it53!?yn  ^7^'^*]  nin  uy^  w\n  o'^nV.N}  ij'j  -i^wN!.i  22 

niifi^-n;;  nto5:b^  iiDsnn^D'n  ijiD-in  ]3:25  n^i  n^diis 


PART  II.   EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUM9.         95 


II.     The  same.    Gen.  3. — Pseudo-Jonathan. 

;^  i:::?i  wv-jb  ni^n  ^3^.  t^'ib  n'^sn  nin  mr\^  i 
^^r.n^.  ^"^n^**.  ^15^^.1   *  fi<r;^3iD'^5  iW^^  ^^  Ti^?^n   ^ 

fi<!?  ^m^h  n^Dfiji  inns  ^:p  nrob"!  ^^;;i;n  n^sj  ^i^;5?^3 

tuj^n^.  DD  ^'^s  ijJTOb  r^qnn'i  ^nnnn  V^jj^^dd 
T\T];[\  T\V^n;i)  4«ni52  ^^j^!:^  ^'ws^sd  n:i  i^nriit  n^Dni  e 
^'r\r\:ib  ^*1^  ^Dij  n^in^vi  ^d'^?!?  4^5^*?  na  d^n; 
n^?;^^5  ^^^c;.''  J^'^?.  i^!:3^P^^^.  ^^5^^^  ^^-"^^^  r^^-^^l 

fj^-iiap,  pn^_  i^n^ji  i^Dn  ''BTld^  f\T\b  iD^Dni 
^^  nip    p  n'rnDwvi  dIws   n53'L5\vi  &«53i''   hd^d^ 

'^aip^^  ''^.^  '^^I'^l^.l  ^"^^^.^  ^'^  ^^^lI.  ^^^.  "i^^^Jl  ^l^"?^. 
yi2  ^-p^^^^b  "Tis^s  -in&  riDfi^  '^''ni  itniriDS  iH^idn 
1^D^^^' VNJ1  "i^DH  ii]5<  J^^^s  n^tD^  nD^i'^  nn^v  M^n  '^^nip 


96         PART  II.   EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 

'^DnipjiD")  i^rvripi  \^brj'i:p  DinNi.  rr^^n^ii  i^^'^D1^^:l 

;^  "i^>^.l  t  n'^^iwsi  i«5^\s  "^TS  i^  '^^  nnn;^  vs^n  ^'^ins  13 
fc<;;in  &«nnw^^  nn^wsi  n^in:;  n*^  n^  ^^^k  ^^*f^^. 

n^-iwsi.  N^^in^  nt]wsi  iiD^^ib  (in^nbn  a-^riV^j  ^"^  ^n'^^si  14 
bz  ^'}^^  ^T^.  b^^^  i^yj'p  b'^p^  riN  \:i^b  i«7  rj^in:; 

i>«";s:^i  'Tifisn  Nnis"!  vso'^-iii^i  i'^dd  n^b  ^^n  ubm 
^D5{  is^n-]  ]inb  nns  jin'^sp^s  ]inn^  n'^SDi  "pip_ri^. 

n^'^ti)^  n^Dp  £3i-iwsi.  n^vNi.  D"iws;b_^    t  ^tp.npbi  ^3tx;V  17 

'^nin  ^"i  ni^^in  i^!:'^  i^^a  ^ypi^  i^'o^b  mp  !:^3-'n 
n^2:n  ]^rqii]  "j^nii'i  }  tj'^^n  ^ti^i'^  '^5  n3pp;n  ^^ya  is 
a^iij  p:^  j<-;n  ^sj^  ^y^i  >i3"tp5?  n;:  b^^^p^  ^b^^p  '^s-ini 
i^n'^s^ns  n^nnD  ^^!?'^  '''^  ^^ip  i^  ramn  i^^ns  i^jii 


PART  II.   EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS.  97 

rj^nnDN  crd  d^IwS  Nny    jiisi  n*:^^  ni^n  nwi  20 

fii^p^n  .\;;iws::i  'I'lTri'i^  nin  d^jj  wsn  ^'^'^"iZ.  TP^P^. 
n^3^  °'ip''?>.  TT^?.!  i^^i"!^.  '^^.P^  '^TH']  N*3w>;i 
N^nist:  n"J3  ^V^s;  d-'n!?  nt:  1^2  ^'?"is^3.  I^T'^. 

n^7TL:3i  vn^y  niT53  N'rjTF:^"  "^  "1"^^.  '"^'^1  ^^  T'"^.'' 
n;s  "1^.  3D^i  t^'^l']  "Lid's'^  ^b  "i:;?  t:"[j?.  ]":p.^  ^^rijrj  ]12 
"^  ^!p_l  '•n  '^in  mp^  t^^n  ^^555  '|\^5,  .sru  i^^^n  'J'^^^. 

J152ri^  ''l^n'^1  ^'rj^'ii  ^^_  nbs^!:  nni^  irjn 

i^nniN*  Nns  ws^/ob^  Nnq  j^!?  ^;p  Dip^_  i^^^niis  T^nn 

''n;s  "j^  I'lp^sn']!  1^^^.\^"  >^';p_1^^.  p.^.l  ^^r^.  TRH^'i 
j<^^b:pn  ixn^ni}^  (D^^s^^i  lin^^nn  ^n!:s  '^'^  ^?  ]s*3!:'^i^ 
ii^^nrii  i<ir^-^ih^  D3^n5  ■j'^pni^  ix^iips:  ^iD^pi  i^nn 
r-n^s  iv^^^  r"i'^^  r*^^^  !^^^^^  i^^'i^d  i«nnn^ 


98  PART  II.   EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 

jin^iiwx  vx^n  v^^nn'J  .yn^iis^  pbiw\s  lin^^nn  i-inrii 

r."^  1^^^.  ^'<^?p.n^'i'i  ^^!r[  1^"^^^  '^T?.  ]^.  '^Hr'^b 

III.     Z%e  same.     Gen.  3. — Jerusalem  Targum. 

n.s  '^\Nt;_  ^^ip^^iwxi^^  vsninq'i  .^siirin  ^^"rp^^^'b^,  ^^^.^.l 

•^jn;  YJiiTi  p;);3)2  ];;in"'.  N^^iips  T"i^Z)  ^^n'^^niNS 

m:)  jM^niq  \irin  fi^^lips  ]iin:p;i  i6)  ^^n^-iVNi 
i^riDn^  ^Dij  \in;.  n-in  ^inn;:  J'i^q^di  ]innj'p:^3  "jinn: 
•jiDH  ]'^i^n:^.  t]-i:q  iDfij  \in;i  i6^  ^i)n  t^i  ^^^^.^a 

^snn  ]ni")ll  ]^:ni:Di  :  .sn^iati^  ^'<?^.^_'l  '''^^'i''-^.  ^^ 

li^'nq  na_iji  D15;  '^d:^  ixnn  'lEw^ni  t«2t:3;  n:  ^^^^n")  '^i? 

^ipp-  \iri;.  ]^7.:5ni  vvn.i^  "^TS  ]^  ]iT5  i?i5'^p.i  ^T. 

•j'^i^n?  &<^in^  ''MS  ''i;n'|  mdwNii  n^  i]^n  ^i2bp_ 


PART  II.  EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS.  99 

^^nn  '^'^^^  ^'^P'H  '^^P.  ^^P.  ^Z^k  T^^^P-  v^^^ 

itt  nin^  no'ii  r.^"i^  Dids'^  ^b  i:>  nip  n^?"!  >inD5 
inqi  t  rhyb  ^m  ^i^v.i  ^i^:ln^  wX]b^\x  ^ts  24 

iinD^b  nra^.  ]''^"p_^  1^  ^^^^?P.P  y.)  ^^'^^A  °>1  ^1 

fi<™i  nsri'^s  ]''pn5^i  i>^n'^,ii5<  ^^ns  ]^yd  y^bti  ]^nn 
lipDSn^i  ]^!?^'^;'.^  J^;p_^'l^^   ]7.?.1  i^r]^^  lEH^'i  ]7.?.l 

^T^^l  rpn  ^5^^.  lEH^"^  ^1^^  TIPP.  "^^^'S  **r^'^ 
i^/o':;^^  ]in3^  5?nsnn^^  i^ll^iipih  ]'^")5?n5q  ]n,:q^5i 

i^nniwx  ii'^n  iin-j  '^^^n'l  ^^byt)^  d^^P_i  'ti  \in  ]^7n 

IV,    Story  of  a  dispute  between  Cain  and  Abel.     Gen.  4:8. — 
Jerusalem  Targum. 

1^  nini  i^nn  ^^i^b  p^SDi  j^nwst  ^ihni^  ^nn^  ]y_  n^Nti 
"i^nN!.  ^nnb  n^xi  ]y_  ^2:1  Nnn  ^£5^!:  ]i5iM"iri  ipS3 
n^ws  ]lp_^^'  i^!:'i  ]nn>vi  nbi  ri^b)  i^i  n^!p.i  ]^'i  n^^. 


100  PART  II.    EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 

^'^;r?31?.  ^isnwsb^i  &<;j?''"sb  nD  -15N;   in!!:  n\^i 
I'^sj^n  '^in'iy  ]in'ii !??  -^^rq  i^^n  ]''nD  ]'^"iniy  n^SD 

t  ri'^n^  !?Dp.i  ^in&5  ^nn 

V.  Marriage  of  Samson.     Judg.  14. — Jonathan. 

J  iriwvb  ''^  nn;;  ^no  yjp;i  ^N^^d^s  nsst]  n^^nn  ^n^Tn 
^Dni  "^iriNi.  nDDs  rr^!?,  j^n  ^i^m)  Viin^s},  n^!p^  i-i^wsi^i  3 

n'^'p.  nrai  iV^'i^  l^'^'n^.l  ^^33  »T^?"ni  ^j  D"ip_ 

•j^T^  nni   qid^/d  ''p;)'^  nidDi  sinn^vq  ^^s:c:'^   8 
NDp  i«ni  ix;-)5^i  ii-j:;S}  n^  ^rnri^.  -iDi  nnD:qb  1;^^ 


PART  II.  EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TAUGUMS.  101 

-i^wxi    jtT^53?  iini  ]nnn  ^^n^n  ^ninm  ri'^m  ith  12 
i<^  CwST    }  .sd'13'^^'7  V}j^,'^^.  V^k^^  T^.i?^  V^t^.  1^ 

"^nTH  "'^'^  ^^^ri  ^"^^^"^.1  ^"^'9^^^"  iiV^?'^  r^i^^^i'^ 

'^Vti)  ■}rL:rid  nriw\^  i-i^wsi.i  Mwvrnd  N^i'^n  nini  15 
^-1  '^^i;;  "i^jPiD  .xxDb'^  Mn^^iin  n^  ixDb  ^wi  'T^'^^i^s  n:i 

"iDrij^:'::  nhn^  nn'qwNi^i  ^r^bi  "jida/d    nnw>{  niDD^  le 
wsn^in  wN^b  ^'^1  ^a:^  ^pn':  isn^in  w>{n^,in  ^^n^nn  n^^i 
r"P.'=?.  T^l  ''*"1^1^L  ^^^  v\52us;bi  ^2^^  nvi  ^b  npNii 
i<;np52  "jinb  rim  wx^^i^  .N>;3d  vni'?.  n::nT  t  ""^n.si.  17 

^Dm2  I'lnpiB  iisbiVws;  linb  n^wNi  w\nwst3^  ^iv.n 
p  wsn^n^  nil  ^n^by  ma^  \  ^niin  iinnsdw^*  &^7  19 
vS-iDn  rn'^^n  11-3^  yjpi  itecj^^b  nmi  -^^  c^ip 

5in/iin  •'^w^^'in^^  ^^nV^-^^"^  ^^H  V^^iy.  ^-  ^^^?.^ 
']rii:52ci  nn.s  nini  t  ^nin^si.  mb  }>^bp;i  n^nin  ri'^jpni  20 

14 


J  02  PART  II.  EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUM9. 

VI.  Prediction  of  Messiah's  kingdom.     Ps.  2. 

}v^{nip"iD  V^nt]   N^^aiwsn  i^ii2i2v_   i^'dn.nt]  n^sb  i 

ii'ii'nh  wS^HD  l^nSiin':  wV^oiuVdi  .n:^1wX  ^"Dbri  yizy^  2 

ri^sp'in!:  iinb  ^V^_']  1^7;^  t  ]in^  .'rjn^^']  ;^i  ^n^;^.  ^ 

'^Dtl  7s    t  "rj^l^  V7.  N'52i^  ^VwV^.  HN^ST  nj.y  ^^  .SZ.Nb  8 

^ysp_   iys'-::wvi    ^i;?"':^   T^p.^    t  ii^z^nnn    nns^  10 
^^},  fpnra   n^y.ii  "i^^'.TS  ")inv.7  irvjt]   ^n-iiN^ 

VII.   The  praises  of  Jehovah.     Ps.  8. 

ftiViss  n2u:t],i  'tj^/lD  ^"^bn  n^^s  w\5:i2"}  N^nbwNt^  ^';  2 

^^i2^';  r^^)2-a  '^t:nN7  ^vjq    { ws*5:iui  Nn^'n  ^^:pn  4 

pr?.  -li^Cn  ir^Jt)  N^LJD    "IDI   ^mvj  i2ip;  br^i2  e 


PART  II.  EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS.         103 


''n^is  nin^.^  ]inVi5   ''nini   ].\:?    t  ''i^n  ninn   s 
''DiOwV  ^'^hm  ir\y\h]  wva:i  \:iDi  wN^m'  "^nss   t  fi^^rjpn   9 

VIII.  Parable  of  the  vineyard.    Isa.  5: 1 — 7. — Jonathan. 

&{^nib  b''rip;^i  bi^y^^h  ]:?3  i^^ns.P^^.  ^v;^3  n^wx   i 

&i:!?>v:D  n-;  iron  vS]Dn>^  ]inb  n^nn;!  b^.']^^^.  ^T^.^. 
]t!_i  n2^_5  ]')3rt).'.p_i  ]i3n-ip_:iT  ]'i:r]dNp_i   t  j^d^m   2 
n^nn;:  ^1^152  pi^vi  ]in^p;n  '^^'^p^  ^^^^P^  ^T^A 
I^DD  ]^ini:;?  P'^^r.^  ^''IPAl  I'lS^T^D.  ^?  ^"^l^^^^ 
^n  i'^^^.  '"^P^-  K"^.^.  *  ]^^''7P.'^^  vd\vni^  i^m  Wi?_  3 

•jisfi^i  ]^n'j  ]^"2i:5?  ]^"i3:i^^^.  n^n^_N!.  ]^'^  w\^  ]^nb 
T353b  jiri^i  ]inja  ^-^3:3^  p''pD.s  ^ayb  "i^5?53b  "i^n? 

•^nwsi.  }  rifijinq  I'ln^^.?.  I'^^MI  ^V^.  ^?.PA  ^1'=^?.  b^J]  "^ 
i^yi2  n'-nn']  djwxi  ^wsn';rj'^  n^zi  nvxnir  ;;ii  n^as? 
roiDwX  i^3&<  ixni  *iD^i  ms;;'"^'^  n^n^^vii  n^ni"in" 


104  PART  II.     EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 

IX.    Extract  from  Isaiah's  prediction  of  the  Messiah.     Isa.  52 : 
13.— ^53  :  2.— Jonathan. 

n'^m'^  13    t  wS'oiDN  ^:2i)2  lin'i^Ti  iim-n  &i^:a^:p  ^d^s  is 
^^  iiJT'll  ]''\r^)  y':hp_  T^p^'P^  ''H'^^?.  l'"'^!^^^  V^P.^- 

'inrdnrd  hV^^^'m  ]^/i^::i  inns:"  i^nbn^q  wsn/ninnp^_ 
iini<n  ^^p"i'1p"  n^^.in    |i:i&^  ]i  ^w   ]^^5]  ^:? 

X.     Aphorisms  of  Solomon.     Prov.  10 :  1 — 12. 

tn^mb  ^^m  j^b^iD  wsnni  '^^nwsi^  ^7n3  i^^'^^n  is  i 

&5ni^  1^  ^^^2.^-^.  ^nRT^.l  ^"^r*?"^"  ''1^>^  V^i^.^^.  ^k  ^ 
vSD^^Dpl  i^p^'sS^  r^^dDD  wxn^^wN5_   ]S5^  i6    I  ivd^n  3 

mT)p  a^imp^p  j^^n  w\-)n  b^rin^  "^pTiji  isin  e 
^DDD  '^:p;u3-i'n  -jin^qisni  w>«;p_^'i2"i  "^dn.  bi  ]y^rin 
^T-^yi,  i^pp')  J^^n^.1^   ''E'^'-^l  *^;"!^.'''^    *  iisDiDn   7 


PART  II.   EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS.  105 


PART  III. 

THE  CHALDEE  PORTIONS  OF  JEREMIAH,  DANIEL, 
AND  EZRA. 


I.— Jer.  10  :  11. 
IL— Dan.  2:4— 7:  28. 

I'lS'^nni  I'lisj^rn  v^'^n  rn-i'iiisi  i^i2hn  ^^^v^^^fin 
]:np_  "jinnn  tTi.tpsi  *i52^n   ]ni    t  )i52';ari';  ^^iq  e 

i^^^bn  iiS^^  rT-^.^";!  'H'lr^Dn  133?.  t'^3inn  nnds'i  7 
-153  -i52i;i  VN3V52  riD!^  t  n;innD  nnpsi  ''ni"in:^'^_  n^^ws^;*^  e 
l^n^jn  "^  M  !:;.p"^s  'j'^DnT  ]in:5^  ND-ip  "i-  vnDwn:^  ::?i;  n*^::^;! 

n53w\r:b  ]ii^]52°Tn  nn^ndi  nn'iD  nV^s^)  "iiDn":  N^^n 
yiDwV-i  '^^  i-i52j<  wS53bn  ]nb  .Npnd^  >^;"^  ''"  "^^_  ""^"i?. 

'p  •'Knos  V.  10.  'p  Tinsttitn  -jiipjXiTn  s"s  v.  9.  i-ip  •^snssV  v.  5. 


PART  III.     Dan.  2:  10 — 24.  107 

}^Dn  '^ri^sri  b'^b  n"i3inb,  itDwNi  i<\y:)  q^p^i  dds 

•Tjin^N^,  nrji  wVJip^  n^nn  ^n\*]^  ]^"i.\3       { n^jpn-tb  14 
rij^  t^na  ''a;3nb'_  ri^L^j':"':  py  ^^  i^sb^  ^^^^  .v^nrj-nn  15 

t^'^2pb  ]^5qn-ii  i:?'i'ini<n'?^  ^ninqn  nnTi^'.i  ^wn;j:'^52  is 

jid:^  j  N*;52d  ^bi6^  tjnn  i^.sjo'^  ]';1wN5_  'i!:^^  .vn  ^x^V :."^1  ^*^ 
-i:!?i  ^^^^.^"1^  ^1^^.  ^^^V^"'''^  ^'^.''P  ^^i!^.  '^^^'51  '^'"^'n 

vsnt;:}n  nn^  ]-'^^^^  ^T'l'^.''  I""^^.^  ""<^^.  ^)^^.V.  ^l^-V. 

Nnnin^^i  ^<n^_:)^  ^^  ni^i.  nrip'^qi  5<7.ini3  ^innx  rf^x 
wNsb^  nV^-^7  'TiD^q  iXD^n-'^^  ^3ri:?lin  ]:^_5'i  ^^b  nnn'] 

"t-ip  sninii  V.  22. 


108  PART  III.     Dan.  2:  24 — 35. 


"I'm  iim!::^  ''DS-p  nn5  nnsdn-^'^  »^^"n'qNi.  ]^i  ^^'^^_ 
-ipw>i'i  i^'3hi2  r\2y  }  5'iin'i  wVD^^^b  vvnps  ^"  "iin';  26 

n^5  ^^i2m  tnVwN:_  ^i\\;  D13   :  i^^bpb  rrynnh  ]^'hp;i  28 

J  iiin  n]^  r^y^m-b'^^  x?^i  ^ithi  'rj^^bn  wr;^_i^ 
^T}b.  ^^.  ^H  '^P^^.  "-.^^''^■^^  ^^51^^.1  5^3^.^_  nnDwX  29 

'^^  ^b}„  riDj.  us*n  wS*^^n-^5-j^  ^3  ^n\s«-^^  '"^^.H^.  ^"^^ 
'^nnb  ^Di^y.ii  V^T^)  ^'^^^.^-^.  ^"^1?^ ''"  ^"l^l"^^  1^^.^ 
^n  nb:r  i^ni.i  n'^^in  njn  &«jb.^  nriD&^        { :?^:n  31 
nni  "^^^ip^.  CwN^j"?  n'^n^  in^Ti  nn  "jS"!  vv^^b::  N^\vd 

'bi  t^^^bsb  nnn^i  -j^^i^n  vxb-''^  "jnij.  nnT^nn  ^  m  ^:^ 
^p^  in^^?.   t  J'l^n  np5,rii  vs^srom  i^'rnp_  ^^i  '^nfei  35 
niJ'S  'iini  Nnn^ii  i^sos  t^bm  &^i:pn  ^bpp_  n4n^ 
niDndrr.y^  in^N-'^si  isn'ri  li^sn  .Ntji  D^-'^i^wS-jn 

'1  T>M''  ibid.     '1  -i''ni  V.  33.  'n  -i">ri''  V.  29. 


PART  III.     Dan.  2:  36—47.  109 

TiD^  wV3?nwy  nnii  id^^q  aipn  'rinnni  j  .NDn"i  '^'^  ntii^n  39 

fi(!:ns  ^"7  ^np-^5  ^^^'^P.^.  ^^yP-  ^T'^.  HT^I  ^^^.^'^  ^^ 
p"n  rV.*?'^?  :p:p";53-'^'^  n^'^^tidd'^  wvViD  ^ism  p'^ri^, 
■'^^  vi&n  p°n352  N^ni^s^uNi  n*;!?5i  nn'^m.-'^'ii  1 1^^}^  41 
"^^  iins2r]^^i  nirin  m^^s  ,^::!?!o  ^ns  -jinD^i  nns 
q&na  n-ii^^D  .N!:n&  nmn  '^s  "^np-!:3  jqn-xnnb>s!:ns 
-]5q  tp_n  i^tim  bnp  )^rip^  i^'b^p_  ni^ssij.i  \  nd'^d  42 
'^l"  }  nn^Dn  j^inn  ns^^  ^^yp.  ninn  .sniD^,^  nsp  43 
:?n?3  11^^  rn-i^Ti^^  .xri:  DDnzi  nn:?»  i^brns  ni-'n 
iihiit)  ^i5-i<n  riD'TD::?  nn^  TP^'^  l^^^^"**^^  -^^"^^"^ 
ny^)  ]^3&«  i<pbp_  ^"^i  ])ri^)2n;)  \  >«EDn"D5?  n-):?n^  .y!?  44 

N^ni  &<npb:a  rV.^^"^  ^'9P^  'p^P  P^^.^H  ^"^'^  HO.*? 
j^SDS  iitpn  N^dnD  Nbn_5  np.'nni  ^^^^n  ^bp^'i,  i^jj. 

dirip-]^  n^iji  ^^^?.n^.  ^^}P-  •^?.^.    ♦  ^^-  •^'5?-''.  "'^'^:  ^'' 

'i  n^n^  V.  41.         -i-ip  nstyia-i  V.  40.         'N  -i^n^  v.  39.         ■'•np  V"'"'"'"'  ^-  ^S- 
■'-ip^nv.  43.  'i -i-'n-'  ibid,    'inirr' v.  42.  'i  vn-i  ibid. 

15 


1 1 0  PART  III.     Dan.  2  :  48—3  :  8. 

^^i  "i'^n  n^.^1  ]''dhp_  ^^p^  I'^nV'?.  "^k^.  ^^^  V^^k^.  ^'1 
J  Ns'b^  5?"in3  i?vN,^D'ii  i:iD  i3:?.i 

CHAP.  III. 

■j'^np  ]^m  m^^  ^^T^^i  Q^ps  ^n?-.  ^i)bp_  nsrain]  i 

N^D5D  ^i^DS-i'M^^nN!.!:  ^3^^!?  n!?tD^  ^iibp_  ns^rainD'i  2 
^Dbbtrj  V:di  ii;^nDn  ^innn'i  ^«^"ln■^^  ^i^"lT^'^'lwS!,  ^^ni^-^'^ 
t  .ssS^  -iSD"i^in3  D'^pn  ^"^  iihb's^  n^Dnb  i^^nti^^^  ^^nn^. 

'^ntn'^^'^.  ^^'^inSI  &«^3jD  vS^DSn  i^HN!.  r^33n^  "jH^^r^.    2 

nSDnb  wvnD^"i^_  '^?.i'^^.^  Vdi  ^"^^i^r^^  ^^-.^.1  ^'!'l^.!i^ 
j<^^b2  i^npb  V52kgi  543^^52  n^.p."i:D^nD  D^pn  ^'n  iiib'2, 
l^^j^  ]is!:  !:^nn  ixnp  >{Tinsi    t  -iisd^d^dd  nvn  ^^^  4 

-.^1:1!?  **^."in^  vNnr^j-n^  "js&'^i  te,^  ji!?-'^^-j53^  t  i<'Dbp_  e 
1^-)-o3Ds  ,v5S'«2  Dhnv  i>inv'i"iiii^  N3"lp  '^p  &{'^:2^5?-^3 

••  T        :      •   '  ••  W-        — :-  I      .  T  :  -  '      • :  •-.        c   ;      -r    ;  •         .« 

'■1  -iTTi  V.  7.  '1  -iTll  V.  5.  1-ip  ■]'^>3i''pi  V.  3. 


PART  III.     Dan.  3:9— 19.  Ill 

^p  yad'^  ^'^  '^??^'^5"''"  0?.^  ^.^.'?  '^^^.^  ^"^.^"^  ^^ 
Vdi  NijDS'^Di  T^nnq^DS  NO -ip  &hn;p_  fc^ri'ipi-i?:^  iH3"ip_ 

'       •  ;  IT  T      T    ;    !••  -;        •       J  T  -:  -:  •.'-.•:        '       •    ;  It  ▼     '       ^  t 

ntj^pn  '''7  i^nn'i  Db^bi  i^nbs  ]iiWi«  i^^^  v6&i^.i:^3 
'j^'inDiDS  1^53'^  Dhn;p  &in'^pi-i"^;^  wSDnp  ^p  p5?Mn 

-i^^  -iSDi^'^n:  i!<^bi2b  ^-i^wsi  i:^]  in^i  'n'jj'^^:  '^jTiP 

'1  -I'^lT' V.  15.      1-ip  KiiiBtti&i  ibid.       6in  n":'"'  n1^■' ibid.       • 'n  i.-i''lT>  v.  10. 

•i-ip  .•'Jhtos  V.  19. 


112  PART  III.     Dan.  3:  20—29. 

vriii  lin'^'^^n!?^  ]inn^snDi  ]in^ip^"05  ]in^!:3-|D-i 

-mb  i^&3  i.i:  'inj'.i  T|ip^5:^  'ijiia  ]innb;n  '^Vwx  iN^n^i  23 
I'l'ini  .\!:n  '^ni-in^nnb  -i^iji  n?.::;  n^nsnns  apj  niri 
in:;s"]5i  ]nn;  njn  n5wNi-.xn  1^551  n?,:^  t  i^^bp_  ^n*^^;!  25 

""f?.?.l  "^-^^^^D^  '^iT'P  "i^^"?!  ^?.?  ^"^^."r;  ^^T^  P^^^'  ^"in^ 
rp&:  I'i'iwVB  in>ii  'ipis  k'^V^?  i«n^>i-i'i  '^niis:?  1^3 

I'^rdDSn^DI       t  i^"}13  i<i5-}^  i^D   "inyi   '!]U3^53_  '^I'lTd  27 

i^sn-inn'i^  '^ni'ini^b  n^Tdi  ri^wsi,^^  n!?:?-'^'^  i:i3'in?'.i 
1inbD'^-i<!:  ^'i  ]in^°t2^^  '^nn'^i  i^rd  1^3^^  nVt]i  ''ni!?::? 
n::?t:  D^tj  '^Dtn  t  linnbNb  inb  ti^^^^b^ih  m^^^-^b^ 


29 


•i-ip  iVto  V.  29.    '•» -i-in-^  V.  23.    I'np  nsVs  v.26.     -np  nss^an  v.25.    S-iiniv.21. 


PART  III.     Dan.  3:  29—4: 11.  113 

'^^iq  nn;pj)  "in^'.n')  ]'^X3^n  m:^  in:j?.i  r^w^  '^nrd 
i:>D  in:?i  'h^^^d  '^-i^ui^  nb^n  i^sb^  r'l.NS  t  inDis  30 

T-x  ":•      '         :it;  ■^:~        x;      '     '   :  -^        •      jx-t-; 

CHAP.  IV. 

ubn  t^i?D;ns}  •jDnr^'^?.^.  ^M^.^'^.P  "i^H^^^^.  ^l^.  I 
bnn  "^^D^sn  bbb  ^iyi^^_  n!:3;3ri!?_  crq  n^^io  ^p^"^  \  ^^.^^:^^.  3 
-vvb  rintiD'i  m'^mp  nD^^  na>i  itnbm  ^^^nT:^1  h^i-^i:) 

...  .  ••  •  X  ~  xJt;  ~       '       ••  r:  It  —  ;  •        '       •    :  J 

v^i5^\^^  nnn  t  iS'^iia  rjti^'ini  t^^ws  ^i1:^s  i^^^x  ^!:vni  n\in  s 
t  wV5?n.^5-!:s  &id!?  nnirni  j^^a-iiii  iSt:ti'i  Ji53i-ii  J^pn^ 

T     ;   —  -r         '  ;  ••  ""I""  '''I       *  **     r*  "•  Z  I 

^Vqn  '^ri'ii'^nJ^.  »^^'*«Vd^.  i'miti  j^^^to  »i3d.^«i  n^sip  t^.'^sy  9 
-^  ■|^tn^tnD:qi  ii^M  "^nsis  ])^y^  ^niSMi  vsns  ni^n 
n^5?  "\bi^^  ''2t)^ipi2'bz  ^P^^.  M».n^.  J^MH  J^J.n  ^  ^^1"^^  ^^ 

'ti'ST'V.  9.     1-ip ''5<i»sjbid.     %  -I'^ri  V.  4.      "i-ip  ns^S  v.  32.     inp  ■^iT'in  v.  31. 


114  PART  III.     Dan.  4:12— 21. 

"I'D  w\ni;n  I3n  jiid^jx  'in'^ni  ri;is:p  nnj^  '^nisq:^  isssjpi 

}  i^yii^_  202^_  tijpbn  &<ni;ri-D5?i  ip^js;  ^^*52^  ^jni 
n:pntpi  tib  i^n'^n']  ^\i^n  nn^i  lird"]  j^diDwNi-]^;  n:?^^  13 
-i5:wxt),i  ^i^^^ns  'jn'^3?  rrins  pnh!:?  i^SD^n;'  1^3^:^?  14 

a^p^'iD^ipD.Ni^  ^sp^  !n33n;,  JiSiS')  'I'^-j^tJ'ivX^'iDisi.  r\^dhp_2 

uiTirim  n:ii^ipt:^5  »^?.P"^1  ^^^^.H  in^^}  ♦  t[3  I'^p'^'^p  le 

nn-)  ^"^  n']! n  '^'^  ^^by^  t  ^"^-iip!:  ♦^IP'^i  T^^J^.?^  ^^}A  ^'' 

r\vn  ni"in  ^ninnn  tis  j^Vd!?  piy)  is^^ip  risixi  n^sd 
&i5^^  i^in-nn35^  t  ws^m  '^nss  153^^^  '^niSD^n^  i^ns  la 

^s^ni^3.  ^niirinp  -ip_5?  on^  "^n^Vam  i^:by,  I'l^S^^iji 

•1^  i«^n  k'^Vs?  nnni  i<'Dbp_  t<^m  n3^  t  ^ni^y  lis^n;:  21 


's -iTi-i  ibid,     'n  ciipttn's  V.  16.      K'lfflS  K"i'n  cnpwn's  v.  15.     'mini  v.  13. 

•"np  nsVs  V.  21 .       'i  nint  v.  19. 


PART  HI.     Dan.  4:22— 33.  115 

b'^_p)  ]ia?.tj']  '^jV  I'^niniD  ^^'^^^  '^I'f^.  ininp  \n3 

in^  J  ii^^d  "m^V^  '^'^  5''^3n  '''n-]^  N*^;p_  'Tjb  "^ni^^^^  24 

"n!!?.!  p."i^.  5^pl^^  TJ^p.^-  T^?.  "'^P"^  ''^'.'^  !><?^.^_ 
-t?J'  i«D^  vsVb  J  'nnibd'p  j^sn^s  rnnn  in  r:y  in^n  25 

N^bn  n^wsn.  ix3b^_  np,:^   t  nin  'rj^n^.  !:nn  '^'i  i^nisb.^  27 
qp^nn  )dbp_  rr^nb  nrn^an  hdwSi-^'^  .vnan  ^ns  v^'^n-i^i 
j<^M-"j^  '^p  >i3^^5n  ass  wvn'r^q  'li::? :  ''ni?!  "ip_^<l  '^^Dn  28 

5?3p*4^  sn^tp^  N^M  b'^ti^  i^pw^*;  l^ninp  v^3i!::?i  "ini: 
ri'i^b)  t  inssD  '^ninSL:']  nn-i  V")P35  nn?'';fl  '^'i  "i:^  31 

nrj^d  ^'^  nn'ini  nnnd  wn»^^_:p  ^^n^^i  115-12  ^^bj^b")  n^n^i 

ws^^l  ix:i;:}wx  '^nk'ii  j^^^p  ^^na  "12:^  ^C.^.^^P''  T^^PH. 
&«3^T-tM2  t  n"in5?  n53  n^  ntJwV'i  in^i^n  .vn^^-'''^  ^n\v5  33 


■'-ip  nsVs^i  V.  31.       i-ip  ns^s  v.  29.       -inp  ns^y  v.  22.       V.-i-^n^  v.  21. 
•'-ip  1-1  "ii-n  ibid.        's  Oiptta 'n  ibid.        inp  in""i  v.  32. 


1 IG  PART  III.     Dan.  4:  33—5:  9. 

"^by  n^n^  "^m  n"in  '^niDb^_  y_'^b^  "^b^  ^iri-;  '•^Vyi:p_ 
nnn"i>i  Didp,  '^ni'iniP.^-^D  ^"i  wN;53p  ^b^_!:  n'nnx]'! 

CHAP.  V. 

i^yyn  oros  "i^_ni.  n^wv^m^n   tnnd  j^^nt^n  vVe'^x   2 
n^SDiD'inD  p£3n  '^'^  i^sDi]  ixnn'i  ^Dw^^^b  ri^n'^nb 

wsnni  ^:i^i2  m^ri  in^^*?.  t  '^^PJlk^  ^^k^.'^  ''n^^^l^.ll  ^ 

t  Nsinfi^i  wsipij  fr^^P.^  ^'^Tv  iiSDSi  ^^nn'^  '^n!:vN^,  insdi 
^Dp^b  ]nnDi  ir)5?5-'i:i  '^^  l^^^fi:^.  ipsa  i«n?.^-?n3   5 
njn  w>(S^^^i  i^^bp_  '^'7  i^^^^'^n  ^n^-^'^  ^^T^-^:^  ^^^l^.?. 
"inrni  '^niDt?  '^rii'^T  >i3^.5:  ]^;i^^   t  .NnnD  ^"^  vST  &s  e 

vsnni  J?;*]'^'^  wv^^s^'ijb  Ji^^:;n^.  i'^ri^  ^b^ i^np  t  i^pj^  7 
nnp']-^'=T  'diii^'b'D  'I'l  ^nn  ^53;snV  i^iji  i^s^.^  n?.::; 
-•^•^  i^^pi^.ni  tDab"!  ^'^?!!?>'^  '^^Diri']  Jinpsi  jidi  nnns 

"'r;T         ■•■;:"-         '      •      ;~:       •         •        "^   :    :  ~  i        '        -:  i  •~  t  •        "j 

%  n-'M''  V.  10.    'h  n''r\->  v.  8.    -(-ip  8S"«3tonV>  ibifl.    -i-ip  •'SnCS  v.  7.    i-ip  -ipss  v.  5. 


V*       oy  THB 

(ht  rr  T  "^ 

PART  III.     Dan.  5:  10 — 20. 

-•^n^Ni-n^rnz  n^^^m  i^nV^.'"?]  'ii^n:  Ti^Zws;^  ^52^31  in3 

^'^i  ^2p-V3  t  i{3^_!q 'riiius:^  tra^iPn  -jn^^  ■j^^^'^"^'^  ^stp&j  12 

j«:Db^_-^^  -^^''.n^.  »^?.  nnsmn  ]nLjp  J^Tjit^i  i^n^si^ 
*  ^inn''.  ^1"^^^  "^npn^  ^s\^_]^  1:^5-12x1^12^3  hm-d^d 

^\1P^^.  ]^1<^F!1  ^'^^^.'''.  TIP'?  '^^.'^^"''^  "''^.?'.  ^^l^.? 

xniD^^^n  vNnbni  ^"ivsr^-^:^  ^"^^n.l"'^"  ^^^^^^ni  d^bn 
5*3^52  n'lp^^  n^wsn  ^w^i^ri  n]:^   ]^>n3         ta^^pri  17 

i<n!?ij5  5<Dte  nnDi^  t  J^P.^^Iin^s:,  .^ndsi  i^^^bph  i^np.i^.  is 
iSDjDpq!?  nri"]  nn^irii  i«np/i  w\ni3-)i  vN{niD^^^_  jj^Vj? 

bw  nin  wv^ns  wv^irr^^  ^niti^p  -  p  ]^bnii  r^'wXT  iin 
-^"11  ant]  n^n  .sd^  J^in."''"!  ^^P^  ^]^.  ^^-^^  ^)^r^^) 
DDpn  tnm-ii  nnn^  nn  ^idi  {  bt^^_  s^iri.  ^"^^.^  ^"^jr^.  ^ 

^-\pyy'^-'ty.  19.        ■'-ip  nsV»  V.  18.        ^np  Visn  ibid.        i-ip  Vian  v.  16. 


118  I'AKT  III.     Dan.  5:  20— G:  4. 

nti/ip:  ws^au:  b'^iy^  i^P.^^^PI  l^l'i^"'?  ^^^'^p:?  »^li"-. 

N^  "):2N:p!?2  t^ns  nnDwVi  :  n'^V^'.  n'^prp  &i32^  ''T  i^'-."'  - 

'^^53'i|'?_  i^n;n  rin^3-''i  vN^DwN^^I  m)y\^r\ri  5<^ad 
lina  mv:  a^i'nn  r\r\2nb^  'rinbd  Ti'^Dnnn-n  nrDwsn 
^inb  ""-i  vs^inj^i  N:ji5  n!:t")2  .sipm  vs^nii  n*£D2  '^nbwx'r^i 

^rhp_  np's  riD'i  t  ]^^"isi  ^ipn  *{Dri  j^dX]  n'^pn  '^'^  26 
'TjmDba  npns  Dns  n^'on  nn^npni  .x^ra'^sn  28 
i-niDni  rinj^is-i?:;  ^^ni-*^";  ^?3ta^ni  ^t\};^j^_  b^^?"h 

CHAP.  VI. 

J  l^rnm  yr\t  p^  -ins  >iniD^^  ^3p  inr^rci  fein^ii  1 
fi^^DD-i'Mpriwxb  vxniD'!:^-!?;?  '2'^pni  din."  nij?,  nDp  2 
T^D-]D  ]in3;Q  >{V^^i  \  a^ri^^hrrby^,  '\^r}b  '^ ^  I'^nt^.i  nsj^q   3 

-^•H^np-^  ^^,^35'i^dnNi.i  N^^DnD-^:?  h^dh^d  nin  nj'i 

■«-ip  nxTtt  V.  1 .        inp  nsT»3  V.  30.        'p  s2-:ttn-.  v.  20.         -^pnKVyv.21. 


I'AKT   111. 


Dan.    0:  1—15.  119 


■j'^Vr^wNP  nn'^ndi  nV:?-^^'!  .NniD"^,^_  ^2:0  PwSjoY:? 

i^-jDwX  D'^j-n  vxsb^  i^D  t  ^'<n3!1''^  ^^^.  ^'^^T.'!  ^"^5^.^  ^ 
wv'in  >{:Qi'^n  nn'pn  ■{'']5qTi  nbuj'n']  "1:3  nn;^^  n!?. 

wVS^^D  riD:?  ^n^^l^'i  ^'i^^.  ^'^?.in'!  ^^}P-  ^i^.  ]^k  T^k^. 
t  wv^^yn  i^!:-'^'^  Dnsi  ""l^'n^s  i«nV:q  wvn^2^^  -^rm 

^?^.^  in?  ♦  ♦^n'15'3  Nj'2  fi<^^i^3  hni:n  ]^3^,n  nt3d-i  i& 
^s  c'^  ^it'D^  ^yi  ^riSh:^  m2  ^^^"O  :>12id  t^Dbti  ''"is 


120  I'AKT  III.      Dan.  G:  15 — 27. 


'qnbwNj^  ^.s'^Di^  n^.551  .vsb^nD:?  ^^'^5^.^"^ '"  l^'^'^r*'"  'i^T 

n  iD  nnrdi  ^^!^^^Z.  ^'^PM'^k  1 3^.11  ^r^  ^"^^'^  n'^p^nb 
n!:ri2nnni  wvri:iD:q  Dip^  i^^sisips  jxid'^^^  -jn^"^?.  *  ''5^'ib?  20 
!:p^3  bii'^p;ib  .s^s^!?  trtn-]p53Di  }  buNt_  J^nin^i^-'^T  j^s^b  21 

'Tjninrd^  !?3 v.  vVT^ns  n^-nbs  nns.^  ^^  ^nb.N5  .s^'i 
^ni^?'^  ni<;j  vv^5\r;  .x^^^^d  ]^i.\n  t  np,:?  'nib  rkj\2U  24 

bws^o']  '^'^  ^n'l^ip-  ''!^5^^r^'»  ii.^.  ^^n^A  '^''^'!^Il  ^^^^^^^ 

.v^^N  ■wS^^a>:-bD!:  nns  i!<tbp_  iiii^-ji  '|i'7N3    ♦  ip^ji  26 

•np  yy^^t  v.  27.        i-,p  -ji-ii-n  v.  26. 


PART  III.     Dan.  6:  27—7: 10.  121 

J  N^siD-i:?  t^pb'O]  !?3nnn  i&-^^i  ^ril'Dbpji  ]^i2h'^b 
^"1  vV3?nMni  i^^tim  i^nnm  m^  in::?i  b^i^"]  '2v^i2  23 

CHAP.  VII. 

J  n^N  ]^V53  ri.^'i  nnD  .s^^n.  ^'^  1^5  t^n 3^:2-^:^  t^'dNn. 
p"im  -irn  ^^siNn  :  n^s-i  .x52^^  "in^rir]  .s^/Dm  ^nin   3 

J  t^h  n'^n'i  u3]Ni.  nn^^i  n^^pn  uiDwNts,  i^^^.i"^:^l  wvn^fii 
ri^.'^pn.  "n""i'^0^1  ^"^k  n w  nD^Dn  nnij  ni^n  i-ini^'i  5 
i^p!si_  ^^ip  j^b^  •]^n^v^  "i^.i  n^sd  -^a  nsss  ]^vb:p^  rkn;^ 

i<ni;rib  j-^p^sn  r*:;^-!^^!  jn^sr^:^  qi>'-^^  5?3-iii  ]^t}_ 
^^}.^t  Min.s.  ^MH.  s^jn  hD'^  "irivs^s  t  »^^  nvp,  -jdV^i   7 
I^Ddi  riTn^  J^s^pni  ^'jTynta]  nb^n'n  Sj^>^"i.  wn  in^xT 
n^b:)-)^  ^nijpi  np™  wN^bDwX  jn-in-i  i^b  ^ns""^" 

"1^.  '^1P,?>>':^.  "^^I^^IR  ^^':^1E"1^  ^Vl''  P'^'.^r?.  ^H^.^ 
V'p^tia  cs^  ws"i-vs*5-)_p_ii  .s'dDwNt^  ''D^:?3  ■j'^r:?  ^Kni.i  "\^.1B 
nn^  l^^i^  P^n>-i  i^^n  pDnD  ^"^  "i:?  n^in  nrn  t  pn^-i 
in;^D-is  N^p_j  n^:;^5  »t»?^'<"?.  ^t^^  i^n  :i^n3  ndin!: 

•'^p  riipyns  ibid.       'i  -i^n-'  v.  8.       inp  risy^iin  v.  7.       •^-lp  nsD-is  v.  29. 

16 


9 


122  PART  III.     Dan.  7:  10—24. 

\  i<m  nijp;^.  nn^n^i  mip^^  inini  vsni;n  n^'^Dp,  '^'^ 
mb  nn'^n^  I'l^nn  nD-i>{i,  TinroVd  i^r^n  i^rn^'n  iws^iai  12 

nt:^,  N^aj*^  pm"iT\  friin  nnij  d^ist^  ins  n^'^m 

nn-ip  pD3,^nnvipN'n\iTni  nn^i^n.^N?.^^  16 

*iri^ib_^  I'lps.p'^l  t  n'^n:-]^  ]i52'ip^  ]^dhp_  si:!;3nw^  rs-i^s  is 
a^:^  IT)  ii^zbr-l'J  t^rri^hri  ]^:^m  f^^^b^,  ^la'^ip, 

pnn-i  bV^t)  DD^  t^b  ^3^1:^1  (31  iV3-ipi  nbn  rM^52"Tp 
^i"InJ  -31  w\3-)pi  n\in  njn  { rnrnnrrp^  21  r^iTni  21 
ji^;53i^  p^n3?  nnisi-^i  i;;?  :  jnb  nb^^^  I'lp^ ip_-a5?  nnp  22 
i3Dnn  ixn^i^52in"jri  nd^^ti  i^^i^^:'.  ^P^ip'^  nn';  ^cd^ii 

nnto:^  nniD^^^  riD^q  -i';i?:^.  ^ir^.p^  ♦^^n^ll  f^5P^"ri^  24 

SiiVa-i3  s"5  ibid.        'i  n^n-"  ibid.         s^H-*^  ^"^  ^-  ^^-         "'"'P  ytihvi  V.  10. 

inp  nsyian  V.  23.        ■'-ip  n?B:i  v.  20. 


PART  III.     Dan.  7:24— 28.— Ezra  4:  8—15.  123 

N^WjP-i^D  i>{3tp']  fri'ini  Tn^nm^  dip*;  i-jn^ji  ■ji^j?']  i^s^,^ 
^r^V?l  ^"^niiD^^ai,  t  w\s:iD-^:^  ninin^^i  JTiMn^.  27 

....       •  •  :      cT  ;  •        --J    '       -:   •     -   •;     •"•••  '»     :  :  ~ 

III.  Ezra  4  :  8—6  :  18. 

"bz  ^«'^^  iV-;55^  ^nn3  iXiSD  ^d^qpi  ci^t;"!^^^  mnn  § 
-^^j^  ninn  ]n?^.  t  ^5933  &{3^_^  j^n/ji'^annnw^^  n^.pi"i']  9 
iN'^iDnDnsi^i  ii^D^'n  linniDS  ^^i^")  fi^nsD  ^d^^u:!  0:^1: 

•.•IV  :  T  -;-         --:         t  ;         '  •^T   :  it         •        c-r  :' •  : 

fi<33nn  '^ji  vxn^np  ]ri.  ^'n  ^"^^^.^^  ^"^MH^.  ?^T.  1^^.  ♦  ^^'^H!; 
i^^D^n  nb^D-^^  !:3p-!?3  iJ's  tpTDnn  n^::^^  u^lm^  u 

T««»  —     .  •  •*}  m  T         '~r  •"!  *!""  I""! 

riD^-!::^  i^!np.^_  wSd^  T")^'^^"'^'^^  ^^}P~  ^^^-^  i^^n^^. 
i^'^nD^  ^s&n  npn-i^  ^'^  u\3^_^^^  ^'*?^l'i5i1  ^^^^JP  -'^ 

1-ip  iVVsio  {^-^-nwi  V.  12.     1-ip  Kim  ibid,     -inp  ^''li'nS  v.  9.     i^p  siK^rS  v.  25. 


124  PART  HI.     Ezra  4:  15 — 5:  3. 

-•TIT       't  ■^::'*         ■^t         ~  ■':iT  t  i«        t-; 

T  -:-  --:  T  :  'vst    ;  it     :     '      •    :t         •      I  I'-r  .•  t  : 

^"}p,  Dns^  N^D*^^.?.  iinn^ia-^'i  f^Jl^.^^   j  n3?.:D,i  n^iii  is 
'^1  ^^^?.?.  ^'  ^nb^ril  "^"ijl^"^  ^r^.  ^^'^  ^^^.'1    *  '^^."p,.  1^ 

n5^-^:^"is:?t).^,i^c:  iin'j'i-)'^n?') :  Di!:n>sWD '^3^-n:^  22 
ni'^n?.  hV^s  in^^s  :^w:?-;>>{3i^n^yL;ni  ws^-^^^-in^  24 

CHAP.  V. 

^'^I'.T^r'^^  N^N^n]  wsn'i3^"n3  nn_5Ti  n^y  ^nq  \in  '^2:nni   1 
C';i3-p  cn^  v^i2ii  pi  iinniDDi  "^DTia  nnt:i  nin: 


PART  III.     Ezra  5:  3 — 15.  125 

t]2^"^^i  i^l'P}..  ritvnt  Ti3&^-j^  tnb  i^ppA  ^^JP,  IH^"?.  ^ 

"")-_?.  i^n^  ^^nn  n^ti5-'»'i  ixnn!i&{  i^.'^'is   :  riD^-^:^  e 

^y:[l  ^^^A  ^^i  ^)pJ^!^M  ^^!P?^  ^T\^^  "in^'i  ^y^^- 
n^ns  nDi^^i  ^li^b^,  ^nbti  ^^^^^ns   t  i<s^.^  iiiin'^-^y  7 

'^^  5^riT^?.l  ^i^-^!PP  ^"^J^P.  ^^11  ^^.-1  ]^..^.  ^IP^P. 

r^y-i  N*!]']^  DipD  nb'^  ti'q-p_  tub  i^y^pA  ^^^?P  ii.^. 
i!^:b^}^  tnr\m'q  q^vi  }  tibbydb  nj"!  uS^D"i;^i^'i  ^^ppb  10 

^^si^annn']  wWd  nb^b  &i3r!n:3.N!.  iTrj-in  '^'n-']^  "jrib  12 
.>i^^]>^^^  hbi^^  nb-n^_wvi  { riM  nns  ^'m  mot  122^^?^  15 

'n  nimi  V.  15.  ssnV  n"3  V.  13.  i-ip  nsiiss  v.  12. 


126  PART  III.     Ezra  5:  15 — 6:  9. 

'i:p3-"i:5?i  i^'iis^-'i^i  DViiin^n  '•'^  ixn^wv^  n^n-^'^  >5^':jw>? 
■irJni3-'j^""^'s  ^^l^^  -jn  ^nnn  '^^  nan  i^s^_:q-^  ^  ti^m 

CHAP.  VI. 

h'^  &^ns&  rr^n^  i  ^njini  aro  m  i«s^52  tiii;-]'!  ]^":wN3   i 
tDrj  Die  i^5b:2  ^'ni!)  ii'^bi2  ^"i.is!?  JTin  nDpa  3 

iXnp^SDDi  nin  5?ij-^'n  '^s'idi  wxn^n  !:!?5  ];i.i<"'^  ^  r^?"^.  ^ 

nnd  ?T]n.r"i^?'.  ^ns  ^Dnn  ]:^3      t  ^irjbvv  mp.^  nnni  e 

is^pn^^_  'ijVwX  w\;i_'3in']  '^nia-D}^  )l"in:?ri-^^  v^i:a^.  arj  n^^'^i: 

ykt^-  Tl^!^^.  n^.ll  V^^^  ^P!^  V^^-  ^'^^  ♦  ^^J^?^.  ^ 
wsyris  1^5^55  ntaa.i  n^n  n!^t)  ]'^DDn  ^s^m  jhI^ws!:. 

Jinil  s"3  V.  5. 


PART  III.     Ezra  6:9 — 18,  etc.  127 

^^Tik  Vh'^^^  K^M  ^k^k  T^^^^"^.  V^.yXl^.  V\}^^^^i  10 
iVDuin-]  ^"^  uijwN-^D  "^i  arj  a^";!5  ^3^1   \ '^niDn'i  j<s^^  n 

n'ran!:  t^frdrib  rn^,';  n^^tp*]  '^'i  dipt  ^'^.^"bs  n^^^ 

"iTO  nnnD-"^^?  nns  '^Dnn  i^1wN{     *  i^p_.rr,  NDiSDij  13 
vS^52D3   w\3^^  D^n^  nbtii-'i'^  ^np^  linn^DiDi  ^2i-\^ 

t  D-js ':]V53.  .xntpdnriiw^i  wnii  ^nis  ^^j^P/^  '^^"^.1"^? 
ix'in-^7  n^'-uNi.  ht"^  nnb^n  Di^  "i:^  5157  nn'^B  ^'^''^''^1  i^ 

^D"!  *^n!:wN5-n^!i  ns^n  i^ni^^-^ps  -ij^tpi  i^'^^b)  ^lyn^^ 
niit]  ]^-iin  HDi  .vri'^wst-n^s  nsjn!:  ^nnpni  tsni^in^^  it 
iij'^nb  ]^rj  ^T2:s^  rifij^^  >'3"ifii  ]nau^  ]^nix5:  •jnD'i 

t  ntix:  nsD  nnr^s  c:':,^'!")''^  ^'^. 

IV.  Ezra  7:  12—27. 

-^"i  &in7  -)iDD  iiDriD  i<y;jb  i!^iihp_  r^p,  i<ripmvr\}i  12 
a^th'n  D^p-p  ^^  b:ip-bt)  j*r!n^  ^^::?  aV::in^!?  14 

ti^s  iK  jt'^rinV  t<"5  v.  18. 


128  PART  III.      Ezra  7:  14—27. 

ni2  GVidin^^.i  "iin^-^:^  ^IB^  n'^V^  '^n"'^?-  ^n^^ndi 

]ns,j^  ]'i-)5'7  ]nin  nn  i^EDSs  is^ppn  wVi^-iSDij  riD^ 

I  ]^"'a;jT\  nbn^^wN}  n^:pn3  iy^;nh  ^nnii  is^£D3  n^dii 
D^p_nVirri'rjriVwNtn^s  inbs^.  T]!:  i^nn^n^-^V'^t^^^.'i  ^^ 

-^D  ^'s  nnnD  nnij's  ^^  5<n_nir\  V^d^^  nrj  d^-oj  .s3b^_ 

N^^52p    n!:i<"'^'=T  iJn'l  15&   N^DniD  wXnTlJ?.  ]iiDbN!P?  '''^ 

nV_a.i  nij^q  np^q  ]^n3-'i:^i  nij^q  I'^ns  "i^n-"j5?i  ns^t] 

.x3b.^_  n^n^53~^^  q^p_  5<irib  nrfp^^'i  wv^^^ip  tnViS}  n^nb 
5<n^T  N;^_ibi  i<^Dri5-^5  '^^  T^T^*^.  ^'^<''  •  ^nisn^  24 
'Tj'^ni  i^n  n™  n3^^  wsn!:.vn^3  ^^^s^1  w\;D\nD  v\":^"}n 

1-ip  •'©-iSjV' V.  26.      1-ip  ^^i•'•'■I  V.  25.       vi^= '^''^^  v- 22.      "jiiVe*^  s"3  v.  19. 


NOTES. 


There  are  ten  Targums*  or  Chaldee  translations  of  the  Scriptures 
extant.  None  of  them,  however,  include  the  whole  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, and  some  only  a  single  book  or  a  few  books.  Daniel,  Ezra,  and 
Nehemiah  have  never  been  translated  into  Chaldee.  At  least,  no  Tar- 
gums of  these  books  are  now  extant. 

The  Targum  of  Onkelos  on  the  Pentateuch,  from  which  all  the 
sentences  in  Part  I.  are  extracted,  is  the  most  esteemed  of  all  the  Tar- 
gums, both  for  its  faithfulness,  and  for  the  purity  of  the  language  em- 
ployed. It  is  so  literal  that,  being  set  to  the  same  musical  notes  as 
the  Hebrew  text,  it  was  read  or  cantilated  in  the  synagogues  on  the 
Sabbath,  in  connexion  with  the  Hebrew  lesson  appointed  for  the  day. 
See  Prideaux,  Conn.  Vol.  IV.  p.  623.  Respecting  Onkelos  little  is 
known.  Prideaux  places  him  before  or  about  the  time  of  our  Saviour. 
Home  (Introd.  Vol.  II.  p.  158.)  gives  the  same  as  ihe  generally  receiv- 
ed opinion.  Jahn  (Introd.  p.  65  of  the  English  transl.)  supposes  him 
to  have  written  in  the  second  century.  The  same  is  Prof.  Winer's 
opinion.  Compare  his  dissertation  De  Onkeloso,  etc.  §  1 .  But  Ge- 
senius  maintains  very  satisfactorily  the  former  opinion,   Einl.  zu  Jesa. 

The  Targum  next  in  value,  and  probably  also  in  time,  is  that  of 
Jonathan  the  son  of  Uzziel,  who  translated  the  books  of  Joshua,  Judg- 
es, I.  and  II.  Samuel,  I.  and  II.  Kings,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  and 
the  twelve  minor  prophets.  He  is  generally  thought  to  have  been  ear- 
lier than  Onkelos.  Prideaux  assigns  him  a  later  date,  for  the  very 
probable  reason,  that  he  would  not  have  commenced  his  translation  at 
Joshua,  unless  the  books  of  Moses  had  been  already  extant  in  Chal- 
dee. 

There  are  two  other  Targums  of  the  Pentateuch,  both  of  a  late 
date.  To  the  unknown  author  of  one  of  these  the  name  Pseudo-Jon- 
athan has  been  applied,  because  it  was  long  supposed  to  have  been 
written  by  Jonathan  Ben-Uzziel.     The  following  literal  translation  of 

*  The  word  is  Chaldee,  Diann  ,  (from  DanP  to  interpret),  lit.  an  interpretation, 
a  paraphrase.  Its  use  is  hmited  however  to  the  Chaldee  versions  of  the  Scrip- 
tures. 

17 


1  30  NOTES. 

Num.  24:  24.,  as  it  stands  in  this  Targum,*  shows  how  little  care  the 
author  took  to  give  the  simple  sense  of  the  Hebrew  text ;  while  the  men- 
tion of  Constantinople  and  the  Lombards  makes  it  certain  that  this 
Targum  was  not  the  work  of  Jonathan  Ben-Uzziel.  It  was  probably 
composed  in  the  ninth  century.  "And  wings  (ships?)  shall  come 
with  instruments  of  war,  and  shall  go  forth  with  great  multitudes  from 
Lombardy  and  from  the  land  of  Italy,  and  shall  be  joined  with  the  le- 
gions which  shall  come  from  Constantinople  ;  and  they  shall  afflict  the 
Assyrians  and  enslave  all  the  sons  of  Eber  ;  but  the  end  of  these,  as 
well  as  of  those,  shall  be  to  fall  by  the  hand  of  king  Messiah  ;  and  they 
shall  be  destroyed  forever." 

The  Jerusalem  Targum,  so  called  from  the  dialect  in  which  it  was 
composed,  is  the  other  of  the  two  mentioned  above.  It  belongs  pro- 
bably to  an  age  still  later  than  the  preceding.  It  is  very  imperfect, 
omitting  many  verses,  and  so  loosely  rendering  the  rest,  that  it  hardly 
deserves  the  name  even  of  a  paraphrase.  It  abounds,  much  more  than 
the  Targum  of  the  Pseudo-Jonathan,  with  digressions  and  fables, 
which  may  be  traditions  of  some  antiquity.  No.  IV.  of  Part  II.  may 
serve  as  a  specimen.  Both  these  Targums  abound  in  Greek  and  oth- 
er foreign  words.  In  the  above  extract,  the  word  translated  multitudes 
is  ^■^D^i'pN,  plainly  nothing  but  a  Chaldee  plural  of  the  Greek  o'/}.og, 
and  the  word  rendered  legions  ']"'Di"^^b  . 

These  four  are  the  longest  and  most  valuable  of  all  the  Targums. 
The  first  two  are  esteemed  most  highly  as  affording  critical  aid  to  the 
student  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  and  (especially  that  of  Onkelos)  in- 
troducing us  to  a  pure  Chaldee,  nearly  resembling  the  style  of  Daniel 
and  Ezra.  Being  extremely  literal,  they  also  serve  to  vindicate  the 
Hebrew  text,  as  it  has  come  down  to  us,  against  those  who  charge  the 
Jews  with  having  corrupted  it  for  the  sake  of  evading  the  arguments 
of  Christians.  The  other  two  mentioned  above,  and  indeed  all  the 
Targums,  are  valuable  as  affording  many  expositions,  particularly  of 
passages  relating  to  the  Messiah,  which  agree  with  those  given  in  the 
New  Testament.  These  passages  many  of  the  modern  Jews  attempt 
to  explain  au'ay,  so  as  to  get  rid  of  the  evidence  that  Jesus  was  the 
Messiah.  Several  examples  of  this  kind  are  given  by  Prideaux  (Conn. 
Pt.  II.  B.  VIII.  p.  639,  seq.).     One  instance  will  suffice  here. 

"  Micah  5:  2.  The  words  of  the  prophet  are  :  And  thou  BetJde- 
hem  Ephratah  shall  he  chief  among  the  thousands  of  Judah ;  out 
of  thee  shall  come  forth  unto  me,  he  that  is  to   be  ruler  in  Israel. 

*The  English  translation  of  this  passasje,  which  is  literal,  is  as  follows. 
"  And  ships  shall  come  from  tho  coast  of  Chittim,  and  shall  afflict  Asshur,  and 
shall  afflict  Eber,  and  ho  also  sliall  perisli  forever." 


NOTES.  131 

This  is  the  true  translation  of  the  Hebrew  text,  and  this  all  Christians 
understand  of  the  Messiah  ;  and  so  anciently  did  the  chief  priests  and 
scribes  of  the  people  of  the  Jews,  when  consulted  by  Herod.  But 
since  that  time,  in  opposition  to  the  gospel,  Jewish  writers  have  en- 
deavoured to  give  this  text  another  meaning,  some  interpreting  it  of 
Hezekiah,  some  of  Zerubbabel,  and  some  otherwise.  But  Jonathan, 
who  perchance  was  one  among  those  scribes  whom  Herod  consulted, 
gives  the  true  meaning  of  it  by  interpreting  it  of  the  Messiah,  in  the 
same  manner  as  Christians  do :  for  his  version  of  the  text  is  :  Out 
of  thee  shall  come  forth  before  me  the  Messiah,  who  shall  exercise  sove- 
reign rule  over  Israel."     (Id.  p.  642.) 

In  another  place  (p.  635)  Prideaux  remarks,  that  "the  Targums 
of  Jonathan  and  Onkelos  are  in  so  great  esteem  among  the  Jews,  that 
they  hold  them  to  be  of  the  same  authority  with  the  original  sacred 
text." 

The  other  Targums  are,  one  on  the  Hagiographa  ;  one  on  the  Me- 
gilloth  or  five  books  of  Ecclesiastes,  Song  of  Solomon,  Lamenta- 
tions, Ruth  and  Esther ;  three  on  Esther  alone  ;  and  one  on  the  two 
books  of  Chronicles.  The  first  has  been  ascribed  to  Rabbi  Joseph 
the  blind,  who  lived  in  the  third  century.  But  neither  the  dates  nor 
authors  of  any  of  these  Targums  are  known  with  certainty.  The  bar- 
barous style  in  which  they  are  written,  is  considered  as  affording  suf- 
ficient proof  that  they  are  comparatively  modern  ;  though  they  appear 
to  have  been  compiled  from  more  ancient  materials. 

For  a  full  account  of  the  Targums,  see  Prideaux,  Conn.  Vol.  IV. 
pp.  618—645.  Home's  Introd.  Vol.  11.  pp.  157—163.  Walton  Pro- 
leg.  XII.  §§  4 — 20,  and  Winer  De  Onkeloso  ejusque  paraphrasi  Chal- 
daica  Dissertatio.  Compare  also  Stackhouse's  Hist,  of  the  Bible,  pre- 
lim, discourse  p.  90,  seq.  Calmet's  Diet,  of  the  Bible,  articles  Jona- 
than, Onkelos,  and  Targum.  Father  Simon's  Crit.  Hist.  B.  II.  Ch. 
18.  Eichhorn's  Einleitung  §§  213—245.  De  Wette,  Einl.  §§  57— 
62.  Wolffii  Bibliotheca  Hebraea  Vol.  II.  pp.  1135—1189.  AUix, 
Judgment  of  the  ancient  Jewish  Church,  etc.  Ch.  VII.  Carpzov.  Crit- 
ica  Sacra,  Part  II.  Ch.  T.  Gesenius,  Comm.  iiber  Jesa.  Einl.  §  H. 
and  Jahn's  Introd.  to  the  O.  T.  pp.  64 — 68  of  the  English  translation. 


»t 


132  NOTES  ON  PART  I. 


NOTES  ON  PART  I. 

I.  Gen.  1:1,  '}'^ttnj5 ,  plur.  of  Dtij?  Decl.  III.  a.  comp.  §  33.  a.  a 
prep,  is  prefixed  regularly  with  _  as  in  Hebrew.  Lit.  in  principiis. — 
^■^  ,  §  4.  note.  This  is  strictly  an  abbreviation,  and  must  not  be  read 
yeyct,  as  though  it  were  a  distinct  name.  It  is  said  by  some  to  have 
been  formed  by  prefixing  the  first  letter  of  Tl'M-^l  to  the  last  of  "'siN  , 
thus  combining  the  Q,;ri  with  the  K«thib  and  saving  the  trouble  of  mar- 
ginal notes.  Others  affirm  that  its  original  form,  which  indeed  ap- 
pears in  some  editions,  was  "'"'■i,  i.e.  the  initial  of  Mifr^  repeated  three 
times  to  expi-ess  Trinity ;  and  that  later  Jews,  rejecting  the  doctrine  of 
the  Trinity,  have  preferred  the  other  form,  and  given  it  the  other  expla- 
nation. It  is  pronounced  Adho-ndy.  As  here,  it  is  generally  employ- 
ed in  the  Targums  to  render  t3'»n'bN  ,  when  the  latter  stands  alone 
(i.  e.  without  any  other  name  of  God)  and  signifies  the  true  God. — n^, 
i.  q.  Heb.  riN  . — f«*^UJ ,  emphatic  state  from  yiy^  ,  not  used  in  the  abs. 
form.  See  <^  29.  3.  c.  The  term  emphatic  seems  to  imply  more  than 
it  really  means ;  and  the  reader  of  Chaldee  naturally  inquires  how 
strong  that  emphasis  can  be,  which  falls  upon  three  fourths  of  the 
nouns  with  which  he  meets.  Perhaps  the  term  definite  would  be  pre- 
ferable, if  the  other  were  not  in  use.  A  noun  in  the  emphatic  state 
expresses  usually  the  same  idea  which  would  be  expressed  in  Hebrew 
by  the  noun  with  the  article. — N2?'nN  ,  emph.  state.  See  i>•^^{  in  the 
vocabulary. 

The  reader  will  observe,  on  comparing  the  translation  with  the  He- 
brew text,  that  the  same  train  of  accents  appears  in  both.  §  2.  9.  h. 
This  agreement  is  not  perfect  throughout.  Where  however  the  train 
of  accents  in  the  Targum  is  different  from  that  of  the  Hebrew  text,  the 
accents  are  still  similar.  For  the  sake  of  comparison  with  the  He- 
brew, the  accents  are  inserted  in  the  sentences  of  this  part. 

II.  Gen.  9:9,  N2Nl,§  7.  d.  1. — tD^-.jTIO ,  do  establish,  1st  Part. 
Pael  from  Qnp,  §22.  3.— lis^nna  from  nnV,  §  8.  3.  II.  Note  4.— The 
first  two  accents  in  this  sentence  differ  from  those  of  the  correspond- 
ing Hebrew  words.  Instead  of  Rebhia  the  Hebrew  has  Zaqeph  Gha- 
dhol,  and  instead  of  Merka,  Darga.  The  two  former  are  both  large 
disjunctives,  and  the  two  latter  both  conjunctives,  and  of  course  might 
easily  be  interchanged.  Perhaps  however  the  accents  were  originally 
transferred  to  the  Targum  from  a  Hebrew  MS.  which  had  Rebhia  and 
Merka.  The  remaining  accents  in  this  sentence  are  the  same  as  in 
the  Hebrew.  Similar  remarks  might  be  repeated  on  the  other  senten- 
ces ;  but  it  will  be  unnecessary. 


NOTES  ON  PART  I.  133 


III.  Gen.  9:  13,  "^niiijl ,  with  suff.  1.  p.  sing,  from  nujp. ,  Dec.  III. 
a. — rrian;;,  1.  sing.  Pr.  Peal  from  iii"^ ,  I  do  set,  §50,  1.  The  He- 
brew likewise  has  the  Praeter  "^nnJ. — ^"n  apoc.  for  Ninin  2  f.  sing. 
Fut.  from  M]n  .  See  the  note  at  the  close  of  §  23. — nN  ,  const,  state, 
_  being  immutable. — '^")^'^^, ,  pronounced  mem-ri,  §  2.  3.  In  sense  it 
is  precisely  equivalent  to  the  Hebrew  ■'\1;d2  ,  mi/ self  or  inc.  See  '^'!^'^'!2 
in  the  vocabulary. 

IV.  Gen.  9:  27,  ^r\z2  ,  3  sing.  m.  Fut.  Aphel  from  nns  ,  §  6.  d  1. 
— ):  ,  sign  of  the  Accusative  case,  §60.  3. — And  shall  cause  his  glory 
to  dwell,  i.  e.  and  he  [God]  shall  dwell. — n"*..  pleonastic  suffix,  §  47. 
2.  lit.  in  the  tents  of  him,  (even)  of  Shem.  •^j  sign  of  the  Gen.  case, 
§60.  1. — Servant  to  them;  Hebrew  ittb  n?.^  ;  Sept.  na7g  amov  ' 
Vulg.  servus  ejus.  But  the  Syriac,  Arabic,  and  Samaritan  versions 
agree  with  our  Targumist  in  giving  a  plural  rendering. 

V.  Gen.  13:  15,  ">jn ,  §  23.  1.  note. — r7:"';nwS: ,  1  sing.  Fut.  from 
■jna  ;  r73%  with  2  epenthetic,  i.  q.  ri_ ;  §16.  nute  1. — ^jilb  ,  to  thy 
sons.     See  la . 

VI.  Gen.  15:  6,  ']"'»"'rt ,  Aphel  from  ';»';=';»«,  (see  the  latter 
word  in  the  lexicon),  §20.3.6  and  §12.11.5. — I",'!  H^^'^"'^.  ^  the 
Lord,  i.  q.  "'i'tn  ,  §49.  1.  c.  But  this  expression,  which  occurs  fre- 
quentlv  in  the  Targums  as  a  translation  of  the  Hebrew  Tl'iTtl  ,  is  con- 
sidered by  some  critics  as  designating  that  Word  which  was  afterwards 
"  made  flesh  and  dwelt  among  us." — ni'iJh  ,  He  (the  Lord)  reckoned 
it,  §  16.  2.  «.— n^ib  ,  §  7.  d 

VII.  Gen.  27:  28,  ■:;,  sign  of  the  Gen.  case,  §  60.  1. 

VIII.  Gen.  42:  38,  mn^. ,  Fut.  of  nn:  ,  Tseri  compensating  for 
Dagesh  forte,  omitted  on  account  of  the  guttural. — -iNn'vIJN  ,  §  6.  6. 

IX.  Gen.  45:  4,  'r^  l^na^t-^  ,  §  48.  I.  ''n^,  pleonastic. 

X.  Gen.  49:  10,  iny^  ,  for  Nny;; ,  §  6.  d.l. — ']t2b=iu;  nay,  one  exerci- 
sing sovereignty,  a  ruler. — "^pa  ,  irreg.  see  15  . — n''b"''l'T  ,  (=Hebrew 
ib  .  .  .  .  ton),  to  lohom,  §8.  3.  II.  n.  3. — NTT ,  the  pron.  used  for  the 
substantive  verb  in  the  present  tense.  See  §  47.  1. — ]13>»rTp"; ,  Ithpe. 
from  yailj ,  §  6.  6. — N'^tt^?  ,  irreg.  see  tJ?.  One  bearing  rule  shall 
not  depart  from  {be  wanting  to)  the  house  of  Judah,  nor  a  scribe  from 
the  posterity  of  his  sons  forever ;  until  3Iessiah  shall  come,  whose  is 
the  kingdom  ;  and  to  him  shall  the  people  hearken,  or,  him  shall  they 
obey. 

XI.  Ex.  33:  14,  Ti23'2i ,  »»y  glory,  doubtless  equivalent  to  the  He- 
brew "'zs ,  my  presence,  i.  e.  a  mere  periphrasis  for  /,  used  of  course 
only  in  relation  to  God.     Corap.  nos.  4  and  13. — ^rjn  ,  §  22. 1. — h''3N  , 


134  NOTES  ON  PART  I. 


vi 


Aph.  Fut.  1st  pers.  sing,  from  n^a  ,  I  will  provide  a  resting  place,  ^b  , 
for  thee. 

XII.  Lev.  26:  2,  ^ir^^ ,  §8.  3.  II.  note  3.— "j^^m ;  1st  Part  Pe, 
from  bn?  . — "{"^Vtl"  P!^I?»  treat  the  house  of  my  sanctuary  with  habit- 
ual reverence.  Such  appears  to  be  the  force  of  this  combination. 
See§51.  1. 

XIII.  Lev.  26:  12,  inrtN  ,  1st  pers.  sing.  fut.  Pe.  from  N^n  ,  instead 
of  the  usual  form  N^JiN  ,  §  23.  1.  6.  note.  For  the  plural  suff.  of  •j"'2 
and  nij^  see  §  8.  3.  it.  note  4. 

XIV.  Num.  10:  36,  iriT~)'>p73,  a  plural,  with  suffix  of  the  third  per- 
son sing.,  formed  from  the  inf  Pe.  of  N-|"i3 ,  §  35.  note  2.  In  its  rest- 
ings,  i.  e.  whenever  it  rested. — The  frequent  repetition  of  Maqqeph  in 
this  sentence  is  not  occasioned  by  any  special  intimacy  of  connexion 
between  the  words  thus  joined.  Its  cause  exists  in  the  train  of  ac- 
cents, which  is  the  same  as  in  the  Hebrew.  Three  words  are  intro- 
duced into  the  Targum  which  do  not  appear  in  the  original — "  Dwell 
in  thy  glory,  in  the  jniclst  of' — but  for  these  there  is  no  accent.  It  is 
for  this  reason  that  they  are  joined  by  Maqqeph  to  the  next  word. 
The  four  words  are,  in  cantillation,  theoretically  one. 

XV.  Num.  24:  5,  ^-i\l3^73  ,  thy  valley,  if  we  derive  it  from  "^lij-;  . 
But  perhaps  "1'^'^Q  should  be  regarded  as  a  verbal  from  iTTi3 ,  and  then 
we  may  translate  it  dwelling,  habitation. 

XVI.  Deut.  5:  7.  XVII.  Deut.  6  :  4.  XVIII.  Deut.  6:  5. 
XIX.  Deut.  10:  19. 

XX.  Deut.  10:  20,  bh^n,  §  15.  3.— nbcn,  Qamets  for  Pattahh  on 
account  of  a  pause-accent. 

XXI.  Deut.  32:  18,  n^h'5,  plur.  const,  from  ^?brt2.  Lit.  the  ter- 
rors of  the  Mighty  One  who  created  thee,  thou  hast  forgotten  ;  i.  e. 
the  terrible  and  mighty  One,  §  61.  1.  note  1. — ^i<"l3,  §26.  2.  a. — 
J\'n'^\p3nN  ,  §  23.  note  1.— NPip^'IJ ,  §  12.  I.  note  2.— ^n^y,§  16.  2.  a. 
— vT^jPn ,  strong,  mighty,  occurs  likewise  in  vs.  30,  31,  as  a  rendering 
of  the  Heb.  'nlit. 

XXII.  Deut.  32:  29,  "jinSTD,  plural  from  ;qiD  with  suff.  3.  pi.  m. 
defectively  written,  §  6.  c.  (4.) 

XXIII.  Deut.  33:  26,  i^rrrN ,  an  instance  in  which  the  emphatic 
state,  (as  is  sometimes  the  case  with  the  Hebrew  article),  corresponds 
to  our  indefinite  article,  a  or  an. — n'^n33>13~  {scriptio  plena),  §  8.  3,  I. 
note  1.  Lit.  who,  his  glory,  i.  e.  whose  glory,  <^  48.  1. 


.4 


NOTES  ON  PART  II. 


No.  I.  Gen.  3:  [Onkelos]. 

(1)  "Jtt  b'^";5' ,  comparative,  §64.  1.  a.  rnoi-e  cunning  than. — ^3  ,  eve- 
ry. — '^'^ .  So  the  London  Polyglott,  which  has  been  followed  in  the  text 
of  the  Chrestomathy.  Also  Buxtorf  Bibl.  Heb.  Basil.  1665.  The  Paris 
and  Antwerp  Polyglotts  read  "^^"^ .  The  title  page  of  Miinster's  Bibl. 
Heb.  Basil.  154G  exhibits  the  form  ^'''^ .      Compare  the  note  on  Part 

I.  No.  I. — tJ"'!n '^,  •  Here  likewise  the  Polyglotts  differ,  Buxtorf  and 
the  London  edition  giving  constantly  the  Hebrew  form,  and  the  oth- 
er two  mentioned  above,  NtlVN  . — 'j^b^"'n  ,  §  2L  a. 

(2J  nnJON  ,  §  15.  note  2. — r'la"'?. ,  Fut.  expressing  the  sense  of  the 
Eng.  Potential  mood,  wc  may  eat. 

(3)  "jT3-!i5n,  Future  Pael  instead  of  ^innpn,  §2.  7.  6.  Buxtorf 
has  ]=il")i>n;  the  Antwerp  and  Paris  Polyglotts,  ^^l-ipp,  in  Peal. 

(4)  "jimari  n!^72 ,  an  Inf  with  a  finite  verb  to  denote  certainty,  as  in 
Hebrew.     Heb.  Gr.  §  514.  6. 

(5)  ■'b^  ,  Part.  Peil  from  i^ti.  ,  §  6.  rf.  (1),  it  is  manifest  before  the 
Lord. — ■jtinsn";') ,  For  this  use  of")  instead  of  another  conjunction, 
see  Heb.  Gr.  §  560.  'jhriDn'; ,  Ithpaal  Fut.  3d  plur.  fern. — "jTMn  ,  Fut. 
Peal  2d  plur.  masc.  from  Nin  . — 'j'^nnin  ,  see  i"}  in  Lex. — "j'^^^n ,  1st 
Part.  Peal  from  QSrj  §  32.  note  2,  knowing  [how  to  distinguish]  he- 
tioeen,  etc. — b "j"'2  For  this  use  of  b  after  ■J"'2  conip.  Stuart's  He- 
brew Chrestomathy,  p.  83.  Note  on  Gen.  1:  6. 

(6)  nT^t ,  3d  sing.  fem.  Praet.  Peal  from  Ntn  . — 1DN  (medicamen- 
tum)  appears  to  refer  to  the  effect  which  Eve  expected  the  eating  of  the 
fruit  to  have,  in  opening  her  eyes  to  a  clearer  vision.  But  all  the  other 
ancient  versions  agree  with  the  English  translation  in  rendering  niND 
t?rV.^,  pleasant  to  the  c_?/es.— a^-}^  ,  2d  Part.  Pael.  n"*!  Nb^ftDiXb  ^I'i'q 
expresses  the  idea  conveyed,  according  to  the  other  translators,  in  the 
previous  clause  ;  desirable  to  behold,     rr"*!!  is  pleonastic. — ni''D2  ,  <5,  12. 

II.  1. — n3iN» ,  see  IN  in  the  vocab. — nnri"^-] ,  §  7.  </.  1. 

(7)  i^nnsnN ,  3d  pers.  plur.  fem.  Praet.  Ithpaal,  from  rtns . — 
I'l^^I'^J^  ,  §  42.  1.  a.  note.— TD^qh,  §  12.  I.  1.  &.— ?JNn,  see  ND^JSn 
in  the  vocab. — pnT,  a  Hebrew  form.  But  Buxtorf  points  it  'J'^T'nT. 
See  his  lexicon. 


136  NOTES  ON  NOS.   I,  II.  PART  II. 


(8)  "jV^N  ,  collective.     For  the  pointing  see  §  31.  6.  note  1. 

(10)  n'^';;"^^]'7  ,  §  13.  2.  For  the  insertion  of  "^  quiescent  in  the  last 
syllable  of  this  word,  and  of  rT^y^UJ ,  see  §  12.  I.  1.  a. 

(11)  ""^h  §  12.  I.  1.  6.  But  Buxtorf  points  it  here  ■'^h  .— ?5''»b , 
§21.  a.  Inf.  from  b?N. 

(14)  t3''r  ,  2d.  Part,  from  D^b  •— b''T^n  ,  Fut.  from  bTN  ,  §  21.  a. 

(15)  "I'lDT  ,  1st  Part.  Peal,  from  "iD"!  §  12.  I.  1.  c.  He  will  remember 
against  thee  lohat  thou  hast  done  to  him. — 'j''73'7j?b73  ,  i.  q.'  ^'^'31)^  "JQ 
from  the  beginning — ancientli/. 

(16)  !-5J*apN-,  Inf.  Aphel.  See  the  paradigm. — 'J'^lbn,  Fut.  2d  sing, 
fem.  from  lb"] . — ^"^3  ,  prep.  3  with  suft".  2d  sing.  fem.     See  the  table. 

(17)  r;5b3"'n,  Fut.  2d  sing.  masc.  from  b^N  with  fem.  sufF.  3d  sing, 
and  2  epenthetic. 

(19)  Nns^T ,  defectively  written.     See  N2J''jr . — niiy^  ^  from  which. 

(21)  '5"''2JTib  ,  etc.  garments  of  honor  for  the  shin  of  their  flesh. 

(22)  S'"7»b  ,"  Inf.  Peal  from  ^T.>^  20.  A.—nr^llZ  ,  of  himself  ,  indepen- 
dently. '^  Adam  has  become  the  only  [being]  in  the  world  [able]  of  him- 
self to  distinguish  good  and  evil."  Onkelos  seems  to  have  considered 
the  Hebrew  =127273  singular,  as  indeed  it  is  capable  of  being ;  and  this 
probably  led  him  to  render  nhN3 ,  {as  one,)  by  "'"J"'!!'^.  only.  The  other 
Targumists  agree  with,  or  perhaps  rather  follow,  Onkelos.  Nearly  all 
the  ancient  versions,  however,  give  the  sense  expressed  in  the  English 
translation.— no^T  Fut.  of  3D: . 

(23)  172^173 ^  ,  whence,  §  48.  1. 

(24)  ^'^■^.ri ,  Praeter  Pael,  merely  a  full  orthography  for  *]ni;|i . — 
N3S?jn73  ;  Part.  Ithpe.  fem.  sing,  agreeing  with  Na"!  h  • — "it?'^  ,  Inf. 
from  'i'O^ . 


No.  II.  Gen.  3:  Pseudo-Jonathan. 

(1)  nni^'T  ,  for  the  pointing  see  below.  No.  III.  (7)  and  (9).  It  will 
be  unnecessary  to  notice  such  cases  in  future. — '7  NtOw^Jpfi ,  is  it  true 
that,  etc.  ?  fi  interrogative  with  Dagesh  forte  euphonic.  So  in  Hebrew 
sometimes.  Heb.  Gram.  §  152.  a. 

(2)  rrittN  ,  §  15.  note  2.  The  Qamets  is  probably  the  result  of  a 
pause  in  pronunciation,  though  no  accents  have  been  appended  to  this 
Targum. — 'jb  ,  contraction  for  tizb  . 

(3)  N:bl< ,  §  2.  6.  c— ■'S'l ,  see  "^3  in  vocab. — N^'iTj ,  Hhireq  is  short, 
the  '^  being  a  mere  7nater  lectionis,  §  2.  1 . 

(4)  "nttN  ,  etc.,  the  serpent  spake,  calumniating  his  Malccr,  and  said. 
— Nni373iN  -13,  (comp.  the  Heb.  "ja^D  "jSI"}.!^,  a  fruitful  hill,  etc.)  the 


PART  11. 


NOTES  ON  NO.  II.  137 


thing  made,  the  result  of  labor.     Every  workman  -bates  the  work  of  his 
own  hands. 

(5)  ]'':3"n^")  '}'^5^{bC  ,  superior  angels. — "J'^^pH'^ ,  u^ho  know.  See 
above  No.  I.  (5). — ^''7373  ,  to  discern,  discriminate.  For  tTie  form,  see 
§20.4.  Comp.  §2.  7. 'a. 

(6)  r)J2f]l ,  Praet.  Pe.  3.  s,  f.  §  23.  Note  1.  on  Par.— Dj^nT  ,  §  13. 2. 

(7)  J<~iSlt3  '^'I'zb  ,  garments  of  the  colour  of  the  "iSD  ,  i.  e.  purple. — 
l^nn,  for  ']1'^'n,  2  Part.  Pe.  fem.'pl.  §53.  1.— I'lnnnria  see  nrrn^. 

'  (8)  'n7Jt2\V  ,  Ithpe.  from  "^^D  ,  §  7.  a.  (2).— -"'nnzN  ,  §  6.  a,  note. 

(9)  ^^26  ,  §  12.  I.  1.  c.  and  the  parallel  passage  in  the  Jer.  Targ. 

(10)  n^^TO-^  ,  §  12.  I.  1.  a.  and  2.— n^-iS^;^ ,  Aph.  1.  s.  Praet.  from 
^5?:  §  12.  I.  2. — ND1S"'3  "j^D  ,for  shame,  i.  e.  because  I  was  ashamed. 

(13)  "^^i^dJ*  ,  probably  an  incorrect  reading  for  '^3"».v;iN  . — '^3'^?|t3&J  , 
seduced  me,  Aphel  from  n^'tD  with  suffix,  §  26.  2.  a. 

(14)  "'n"'';^  ,  Aph.  from  NHN .  For  the  pointing  see  §4.  a.  and  §2. 
5.  6.'— i-^DTO  N-n ,  §  53.  1.— Nnti ,  adverbially,  once. — Nnitt'?  ND''"liJ 
deadly  poison,  §  61.  1. 

(15)  "'=!;i3''wN; ,  1  sing.  Fut.  Pa.  from  "'^.ilJ .  The  form  is  perfectly  anom- 
alous. Compare  ^»w*<  instead  of  '^ttN  .— n^?;")?  ,  plur.  const,  from  ""^'nt . 
— ]"'^pD ,  1  Part,  from  '-i£23 .  See  above  No.  II.  (7).— ■}"^:;hJ?  ,  1  Part, 
plur.  from  ^Y\12  .  This  also  appears  to  be  a  masculine  form  like  "j^'j.^, 
§35.  Schaaf,'  (Opus  Aramaeum  p.  308,)  points  it  'i':h72.  1ir;;;[i.q. 
■jni^i^  ;  so  Schaaf  ibid.]  is  understood,  making  it  future,  §  53.  1.  "  Oper- 
am  dabunt  ut  percutiant."  They  shall  make  efforts  and  shall  bruise  thy 
head,  i.  e.  they  shall  do  it  intently,  and  with  all  their  power  : — or,  they 
shall  be  established,  etc.  taking  the  act.  Part,  in  an  intransitive  sense. 
Comp.  ';"'13ri»  &iirin  below,  and  above  No.  II.  (15). — 'J'^J?^^ ,  §  32. 
note  2. — 'j'^lSri:^  ii^'}pT}. ,  thou  shalt  be  established,  or,  perhaps,  thou 
shall  be  intent  upon  injuring  them. — li^'?.,  this  use  of  Hhateph  Pattahh 
after  Seghol,  which  is  not  un frequent  in  this  Targum,  is  probably  the 
result  of  mere  negligence  in  transcription. 

(16)  ^:c^:*^q,  for  ^"Is^iiD;  and  ^T.^l^iJ ,  for  ^'':.1^5> .  For  the 
pointing  of  these  and  similar  forms,  see  §  7.  a.  (2). — l]"''in73  ,  contracted 
from  ^■'^■ina ,  and  so  Buxtorf  points  it,  ^"^intt  .— D"!!:;*!: ,  \  12.  I.  1.  c. — 
IJH  ^M1^ ,  an  obscure  passage.  Lit.  he  shall  rule  over  thee,  to  do  justice 
and  to  commit  sin,  i.  e.  as  I  understand  the  Targumist,  whether  he  does 
right  or  wrong. 

(17)n5lj?,§12.  II.  1. 

(19)  ns"*?: ,  for  T\m  ,  §  6.  a.  note. 

(21)  n^ttJN'7 ,  which  he  (the  serpent)  put  off,  TlT'llZfrom  himself. 

(22)  ""n^h-^ ,'  for  ^ii(T^\  •— '^^^  ''^ »  \f  ^  ^^  kept.—»^'Fny>Q , 

18~ 


138  NOTES  ON  NOS.  H,  III.  PART  II. 

1  s.  Pr.  Pe.  with  suffi  3  m.  s.  §  16.  2.  a.— Nm-'psB ,  §  12. 1. 2.— ^«^^•7  ,/or 
behold. — ■'in ,  Praeter  in  a  future  sense,  or  rather  both  this  and  the  par- 
ticiple b''3>5  are  to  be  taken  as  we  use  the  Present  tense  in  Enghsh,  ex- 
pressing a  general  truth  : — or,  still  differently,  both  may  be  regarded  as 
Subjunctives,  (I  use  the  term  in  the  general  sense  which  it  has  in  Latin 
grammar,)  if  he  should  eat,  etc.  he  would  live,  etc. 

(23)  bTN  and  isTi;  (§  12.  II.  1.)  are  both  Praeters. 

(24)  NbTlQ-^  ,  2d  Part,  from  bna  ,  which  is  like.  Tseri  is  inserted, 
like  Clamets  in  "TSJJ"]  ,  etc.  on  account  of  the  prefix  with  Sheva,  §  7. 
d.  note. — ~i13'''7,  i.  q.  "n:'7  §  60.  1.  b. — Nn">lJi< ,  an  unusual  pointing  of 
N\-i-*Z^N  or  NnuJN  ,  (§  2.  7.  c.)  emph.  state  from  N'i'N^ . — ■j'lab  ,  §  7.  c?.  note. 
■jnTa  ,  Inf.  of  'j^T — ]ir;3  ,  toith  them,  by  means  of  them. — nnbcr  ,  1  Part. 
Pe.  The  law  is  better  to  him  who  observes  it. — 'JO ,  than,  §  64.  1.  a. — 
t3*p  ,  either  this  word  should  be  pointed  C^fD  ,  or  it  may  be  considered 
as  a  different  form  of  the  adjective.  "  The  law  is  better,  to  him  who 
observes  it,  than  the  fruits  of  the  tree  of  life,  which  Jehovah  hath  pre- 
pared for  him  who  keeps  it  [the  law],  that  he  may  be  established,  and 
may  walk  in  the  paths  of  the  way  of  life,  in  the  future  world." 


No.  III.  Gen.  3: — Jerusalem  Targum. 

(7) 'ilSy'i  instead  of  the  regular  form  Ili^V  The  almost  entire 
confusion  of  Pattahh  and  Q,amets  and  even  Hhateph  Pattahh,  which  pre- 
vails in  this  Targum  and  that  of  the  false  Jonathan,  appears  here. 
It  will  not  be  necessary  to  notice  it  in  every  instance.  See  §  2.  2.  The 
reader  will  also  observe  the  singular  character  of  this,  so  called,  Tar- 
gum. It  is  evidently  rather  a  collection  of  Rabbinical  and  traditionary 
remarks  on  the  text,  than  a  translation  of  it. —  They  made,  etc.  This 
perhaps  implies  the  author's  opinion  that  Adam  and  Eve  made  them  by 
divine  direction.     Hebrew,  The  Lord  God  made,  etc. 

(8)  In  the  strength  of  the  day — probably  incorrect,  although  the 
Hebrew  \V\  ~\  has  sometimes  a  signification  analogous  to  this.  See  Josh. 
2:  11. 

(9)  rT'nST,  which  I  have  created.  Regularly  n'''i^T .  So,  espe- 
cially in  the  Targum  of  the  false  Jonathan,  'IMN,  with  the  prefix  ], 
becomes  "M^HC] .  The  punctuators  probably  had  in  mind  the  analogous 
Hebrew  form,  §  7.  d.  note.— ""^a  ,  Pass.  Part.  Pe.,  §23.  1.  note,  ismani- 
fest  before  me. — "l^D  ,  1st  Part.  Peal. 

(15)  ''^."^T  ,  And  it  shall  come  to  pass.  The  Vav  conversive  does  not 
appear  in  Chaldee. — "J"'13ri^  ,  Part.  Ithpa.  from  'j-iD ,  full  orthography, 


PART  rr.  NOTES  ON   NO.   III. 


139 


§  12.  II.  4.— ]^h72  ,  masc.  pi.  Act.  Part,  from  4<ha  ,  §35.  But  Schaaf 
(Op.  Aram.  p.  333,)  points  it  regularly,  ym  . — ri"'3: ,  §  12.  I.  1.  c. — 
yniDO ,  1st  Part.  Aph.  from  JJn^  — ^^t'^\  >  suffix  pleonastic,  §  47.  2. — 
']''\iib  T'V>S* ,  tJiese  to  those  i.e.  one  to  another. — J?n^1  WJJ,  "Prave  ut  puto," 
says  Buxtorf,  Lex.  art.  Nnrs-^; .  But  whether  the  reading  Nn^"'D"dJ  (or 
i^nT'E'i:)  be  admitted  or  not,  the  meaning  is  still  doubtful.  Buxtorf 
renders  it  a  trampling  underfoot,  conculcatio.  Castell  gives  incolumi- 
tas,  (probably  deriving  it  from  NC'^li  in  the  Rabbinical  sense,  to  be  quiet, 
at  peace  ;)  which  the  connection  seems  to  favour. — "'iT^'i"' ,  suff.  pleon. 
§  47.  2. — "  And  it  shall  come  to  pass,  when  the  descendants  of  the  wo- 
man shall  diligently  study  the  law  and  do  the  commandments,  they  shall 
be  established,  bruising  thy  head  and  killing  thee  ;  but  when  the  pos- 
terity of  the  woman  shall  desert  the  precepts  of  the  law  and  not  obey 
the  commandments,  thou  shalt  be  established,  biting  them  in  their  heels 
and  afflicting  them  with  sickness.  Nevertheless,  there  shall  be  a  re- 
medy for  the  sons  of  the  woman  ;  but  for  thee,  O  serpent,  there  shall  be 
no  remedy.  Moreover  they  shall  apply  remedies  to  the  heels  of  one  an- 
other in  the  end  of  the  last  days,  in  the  days  of  king  Messiah." 

(18)  ■'Snn,  i.e.  N^"1N,  the  earth  shall  bring  forth  abundantly. — 
N"l5  ''SNl'T ,  which  is  upon  the  surface  of  the  field,  i.  e.  the  grass. — ''ZV  , 
Part,  used  for  the  Praeter.  Adam  ansivered,  §  53.  1.  note. — I'^^l ,  see 
the  notes  on  vs.  7  and  9  of  this  chapter. — Nn'^^a  "J^ ,  Let  us  not  be 
regarded  as  though  we  were  of  the  cattle,  i.  e.  cattle.  Comp.  the 
French  des  betes,  etc. — ''ybD ,  for  N^bs  §23.  1.  note. 

(22)  na  adds  nothing  to  the  sense.— ]"'7a=ikX ,  see  N72N  in  Lex. — 
N'^-]D73!:,  evidently  an  Infinitive  form.  Perhaps  it  should  be  pointed 
iJ<\i;-)D73  ,  §  12.  I.  4. — Nb  15  Dnj5  ,  before  he  shall,  etc.,  or  while  he  does 
not,  etc. 

(24)  The  glory  of  his  presence,  i.  e.  his  glorious  presence. — Til'lBti 
'J'^a'ljib  ]^  ,  these  two  expressions  are  doubtless  synonymous,  the  se- 
cond being  explanatory  of  the  first,  which  sometimes  has  a  different 
sense.  On  the  east,  towards  the  sun-rising.  This  I  think  is  better  in 
the  present  instance  than  to  consider  "TaTj^b  ]72  as  relating  to  time ;  al- 
though it  is  evident,  from  other  places,  that  both  the  author  of  this  Tar- 
gum  and  the  Pseudo-Jonathan  supposed  the  garden  of  Eden  to  have 
been  planted  before  the  creation  of  the  world.  See  the  next  verse. 
Also  Gen.  2:  15.  Jeru.  T.  Gen.  2:  8.  Pseudo-Jon.— l":n  N^  ny  t]-)j5  , 
two  thousand  years  before  the  world  was  created,  he  made  the  law,  etc. 
See  above  (22). — ^nU'-TT  b?  ,  because  they  kept. — N^on):  ,  1st  Part. 
Pa.  fem.  sing,  from  N'3T .  §12.1.3. — n-itsD,  plural,  contracted  for 
itn"ltOD  ;  nnDD  l^nl?^  J^bSN  ,  lit.  a  sword,  destroying  from  both  sides, 


140  NOTES  ON  NOS.  III.  IV.  V.  FART  II. 

i.  e.  a  two-edged  sword. — "j'^'nysa,  1st  Part.  Pa.  from  11*3. — "TiiJT , 
(Part,  from  NnN)  the  world  which  is  coming,  or,  as  we  more  commonly 
say,  the  world  to  come. — NTt ,  §  47.  1.  the  tree  of  life  is,  i.  e.  represents 
the  law. — "iin,  a  form  of  the  Praeter  (§23.  2.  note,)  here  used  in  the 
sense  of  a  present  tense,  or  as  expressing  a  general  affirmation. — Q"'"[5  , 
$4.  a.  This  double  "^  originated  with  an  unpointed  text,  and  should  not 
have  been  retained  when  the  points  were  affixed,  nnboi?  for  nn'-Db  , 
see  above  (7),  to  him  who  obeys  it. 


No.  IV.     Gen.  4:  8.     Jerusalem  Targum. 

■jnTsb  ,  Inf  for  Fut.  "  no  reward  shall  be  given  to  the  righteous  nor 
vengeance  taken  of  the  wicked.  The  world  was  not  created  in  mercy, 
neither  in  mercy  is  it  governed.  Why  was  your  offering  accepted  from 
you  with  favor,  but  [mine]  was  not  accepted  from  me  with  favour  ? 
Abel  answered  and  said  to  Cain ;  There  is  a  judgment,  and  there  is  a 
Judge,  and  there  is  a  future  world,  and  a  reward  shall  be  bestowed  upon 
the  righteous  [lit.  there  is  the  giving  of  a  good  reward  to  the  righteous,] 
and  vengeance  shall  be  taken  upon  the  wicked ;  and  the  world  was 
created  in  mercy,  and  in  mercy  it  is  governed.  But  it  is  governed  ac- 
cording to  the  fruit  of  good  works.  Because  my  works  were  more  up- 
right than  yours,  my  offering  was  accepted  with  favor,  but  yours  was 
not  accepted  with  favor.  And  they  were  both  contending  in  the  open 
field ;  and  Cain  rose  up  against  Abel  his  brother,  and  killed  him." 


No.  V.     JuDG.  14.    Jonathan. 

(1)  n32  ,  see  na  in  Lex. 

(2)  pAo  ,  §  12.  I.  1.  and  II.  1.— ^zD  ,  Imp.  from  n03 ,  §  12.  II.  1.  a. 

— ^Viii ,  see  NnN;. 

(3)  n^;^D  ,  3  sing.  fem.  from  "lUiS,  §  15.  note  2. 

(5)  iriwV,  3  m.  pi.  Pr.  from  i^rjwN; . — nnianpb,  Buxtorf  gives  the 
pointing  m;a']jO  ,  which  analogy  demands. 

(8)  rrao^jb,  Inf  from  :nD:  with  prefix  and  suffix. 

(9)  br»,'^21.  a. 

(12)  ■jiirtJirN;  Buxtorf  points  it  'jlb.tiirN. 

(13)  nsijr^-i:? ,  Fut.  1  pi.  with  suff' 

(15)  '^^''Ti:',  Imperative  Pael.  §  12.  I.  1.— "'^jn*'!  that  he  may  tell. 
— T^jpi: ,  Aphel  from  ^Ji"; . — i<:nT53p55^fn  ,  is  it  to  try  (perphx)  us? 
For  the  ending  n=i  see  §  16.  2.  c.  and  for  the  prefix  tt,  §  12.  I.  4. 


PART  II.  NOTES  ON  NOS.   V.   VI.   VII.  VIII.  141 

(16)  NIJil! ,  while,  etc. 

(17)  "IptJT,  3.  sing.  fern.  Praet.,  with  suffix,  from  ph'7 . 

(18)  iiVpp_ ,  see  ■'np  in  Lex.— ^ya  Inf.  from  bb?.; . 

(19)  ]irT'T"jT ,  c'ontrary  to  the  analogy  of  Chaldee,  but  according  to 
that  of  Hebrew. 

(20)  rr'nlih'ib ,  to  the  person  who  was  his  companion. 


No.  VI.    Ps.  2.    Author  of  the  Targum  not  certainly  known. 

(2)  X'TTJi  >  ist  Part.  plur.  from  Q^ip  .  See  the  Par.— iX'i'na ,  Inf  Pa. 
— '^^IZ'q ,  Inf  Pe.  from  Ni23 ,  §  18.  note  1. 

(4)  i"'n^T  ,  by  ellipsis  of  the  pers.  pron.,  he  who  sitteih. 

(7)  :3"'ih  ,  Vocative  ;  O  thou  beloved.,  etc. — ^il<31 ,  eniph.  masc. 
"  Tu  mihipurus  es."     Buxtorf 

(9)  "ja  ,  see  "JN'O  in  the  vocabulary. 

(11)  V?:^  Imp.  Pa.  2.  pi.  from  ^Vx . 

(12)  NhiN  "p-!:3Trirn  ,  "  et  amittatis  viam,"  Walton.  But  the 
words  are  certainly  susceptible  of  the  sense  expressed  in  Hebrew.  Bux- 
torf, (Lex.  under  the  word  11N),  cites  several  examples  in  which  liT^i  has 
evidently  the  intransitive  sense  to  perish. — "i1""'.1,  Fut.  from  "l"ih  . — 
rfnitD ,  suffix  pleonastic,  §  47.  2.    Comp.  Heb.  "'n'^iN  . 


No.  VII.    Psalm  8. 

Title.  T'T'ib  ,  b  auctoris,  as  in  Hebrew.  The  mode  of  writing  this 
name  with  '^,  which  belongs  in  Hebrew  to  the  later  writings,  is  in  Chal- 
dee the  usual  orthography. 

(2)  ^n  ,  for  the  ordinary  form  T^y] ,  §  2.  6.  c. 

(3)  ':]ip^''^":o  ,  Part.  Aph.  from  p^J? ,  enemies. 

(4)  "  ^'^'012  ,  probably  this  rendering  originated  in  the  false  supposi- 
tion that  the  Hebrew  "^3  is  necessarily  a  causal  conjunction.  It  should 
evidently  be  considered  here  as  an  adverb  of  time,  when. 

(8)  ''~\fiV\ ,  const,  for  emph.  §60.  1.  note  3. 


No.  VIII.     IsA.  5.  i — 7.   Jonathan. 

Instead  of  the  fine  poetical  allegory  of  Isaiah,  we  are  here  presented 
with  an  interpretation.  The  Targumist  has  not  simply  translated  the 
words  of  the  prophet  into  Chaldee,  as  Ae  has  generally  done,  but  has 
translated  the  allegory  into  plain  language.     Still,  the  extract  is  curious. 


142  NOTES  ONNOS.  VIIJ.  IX.  PART  II. 


and  worthy  of  a  perusal.  As  it  differs  so  considerably  from  the  original, 
I  subjoin  the  Latin  translation  of  the  London  Polyglott. 

"  Dixit  propheta:  Cantabo  nunc  Israeli,  qui  comparatus  est  vineae, 
semini  Abrahae  dilecti  mei,  canticum  dilecti  mei,  vineae  suae.  Popu- 
lus  mens,  dilectus  meus  Israel  dedi  eis  haereditatem  in  raonte  excelso, 
in  terra  pingui.  2.  Et  sanctificavi  eos,  et  honorificavi  eos,  et  sustenta- 
vi  eos,  sicut  plantationem  vitis  electae ;  et  aedificavi  sanctuarium  raeura 
in  medio  eorura.  Altare  quoque  meum  dedi  ad  propitiandum  super 
peccata  eorum  :  et  praecepi  eis  ut  facerent  opera  bona  in  conspectu  meo, 
et  ipsi  inique  egerunt  in  operibus  suis.  3.  Propheta,  die  eis  :  Ecce  do- 
mus  Israel  recesserunt  a  lege  et  nolunt  converti.  Nunc  habitatores 
Hierusalem  et  viri  Juda,  judicate  nunc  judicium  inter  me  et  populum 
meum.  4.  Quod  bonum  dixi  ut  facerem  populo  meo  quod  non  fecerim 
eis  ?  et  cum  praeciperem  eis  ut  facerent  opera  bona,  quare  fecerunt  ope- 
ra mala  ?  5.  Nunc  autem  annunciabo  vobis  quod  ego  facturus  sura 
populo  meo.  ToUam  majestatem  meam  ab  eis,  et  eruntin  direptionem  : 
conteram  domum  sanctuarii  eorum,  et  eruntin  conculcationem.  6.  Et 
ponam  eos  derelictos  :  non  erit  eis  sustentaculum  nee  fulcimentum  ;  et 
erunt  transmigrantes  et  derelicti.  Prophetis  quoque  mandabo,  ne  pro- 
phetizent  super  eos  prophetiam.  7.  Cluia  populus  Domini  exercituum 
Israel  est,  et  viri  Juda  plantatio  laetitiae  ejus.  Et  dixi  ut  facerent  ju- 
dicium et  ecce  facti  sunt  calumniatores ;  dixi  ut  facerent  justitiam,  et 
ecce  ipsi  multiplicant  peccata." 

(1)  rr'^hau.-N  and  n'^i^'iT,  pleonastic  suffixes,  §47.  2.—'' Ofn,  »iy 
beloved,  1st  Part,  from  Shn*. 

(3)  ]iiC  ,  contracted  form  of  the  act.  part.  m.  pi.  from  t«5"j: ,  §  35. — 
anX) ,  Inf  from  iln, 

(5)  7553  Inf  from  na  .  See  the  Par.  It  is  treated  as  a  noun,  plun- 
der, and  the  corresponding  word  in  the  parallel  passage,  'ij''^  ,  is  a  noun. 

(6)  l-^babaTO ,  Pass.  Part.  Palpel  from  b^D . 

(7)  "jap^,  Aph.  1st  Part.  plur.  from  K^D,  §  35. 


No.  IX.     IsA.  52:  13.— 53:  2.    Jonathan. 

(13)  M'lhb  ,  see  N'lh  in  the  vocabulary. 

(15)  =lN''yn"i;s< ,  they  have  told,  for  has  been  told,  or  rather,  in  the 
present  instance,  had  been  told,  §56.  2.  b. — I^T  Ttri ,  tohat  had  not  been 
told  them  they  have  seen,  etc.  The  Latin  Vulgate  and  Syriac  versions 
agree  with  our  Targumist  in  rendering  these  verbs  in  past  time,  they 
have  seen,  they  have  considered;  the  LXX  and  the  Arabic  version  give 


PART  II.  NOTES  ON  NOS.  IX.  X.  143 

the  Future  tense,  as  does  our  common  English  translation.     The  He- 
brew verbs  are  both  in  the  Praeter  tense. 

(1)  'J'^Q'^n  ,  see  ]ttJ<. — V:\T  fliprn  ,  lit.  and  the  strength  of  the  arm 
of  JthovaKs  power.     Comp.  §61.  I.  and  note  1. 

(2)  Nn-in-; ,  §  23.  Note  2.— '^i-|Ti-)i\2; ,  §  33.  h.—n-^^  ,  in  the  land 
which  was  in  need  of  him,  i.  e.  of  the  p'^"^  mentioned  above,  the  Mes- 
siah. But  the  passage  is  quite  obscure,  and  the  more  so  as  there  is 
nothing  in  the  original  corresponding  to  this  phrase. — V^T  ,  so  that  every 
one  who  sees  him  shall  attentively  consider  him. 

In  the  remainder  of  this  chapter,  so  beautiful  in  the  original,  we  are 
presented  by  the  Targumist  rather  with  his  own  views  than  with  a  trans- 
lation of  Isaiah,  and  those  too,  expressed,  for  the  most  part,  in  a  dull 
and  sometimes  quite  obscure  manner. 


No.  X.     Prov.  10:  1 — 12.  Translator  uncertain. 

Title,  "'ibn^  ,  pleonastic  suffix,  §  47.  2. 

(1)  •'nn: ,  instead  of  "^nn;: ,  Fut.  Aph.  from  Nnn  ,  §  12.  1. 3.— N^SD 
for  NbrsD ,  §  32.  note  2. 

(2)  Y"!r?!!'2  ,  Part.  Pa.  from  "in*; .— "^niriN,  Buxtorf  points  the  con- 
struct form  of  this  word  regularly  '^n2£iN  . — Ni"^^n'7  ,  §  60.  1.  note  2. 
— M;i:c:q,  Part.  Pa.  fem.  sing,  from  ItiSS,  §2.  7.  c. 

(3)  ;^'lhp3 ,  Fut.  Pe.  3d  p.  sing.  §  12. 'l.  3. 

(4)  NDDM ,  Part.  Pa.  without  Dagesh  forte,  §2.   7.  c. 

(5)  n"'rD'T  ,  Part,  with  full  orth.  §  12.  I.  He  who  cultivates,  viz.  the 
earth. 

(6)  -j-^iriri ,  §  23.  note.— >:'»-^n  ,  §  60.  1.  note  3. 

(8)  rr^'ab  fi^s^i ,  §  63.  5.— rT\niD^4}n ,  plur.  from  nsip ,  §  39.  note  1. 

(9)  bn ,  for  irn;: ,  Fut.  of  blN  !  "    " 


NOTES  ON  PART  III. 


No.  I.    Jer.  10:  11. 

NI'lS ,  an  adv.  of  manner,  compounded  of  3  and  IXZ"^  (dem.  pron., 
this,)  after  this  (manner.) — Ni^-)N  ,  emph.  of  p^N.  This  commutation 
of  S>  and  p  resulted  probably  from  a  pronunciation  of  i*  in  this  word  like 
the  Arabic  P  or  nearly  like  our  g  hard.— Tii:^;; ,  for  "jl — ,  §  12.  3. 
Pattahh  is  restored  by  Darga,  a  conjunctive  accent.  This  is  not  usual, 
although,  I  believe,  similar  cases  are  not  wholly  wanting  in  Hebrew. — 
!l!rN  ,  probably  in  apposition  with  N'^nbN! ,  and  giving  emphasis  to  the 
declaration,  "  thei/  shall  perish."  So  Veneraa,  C.  B.  Michaelis,  Rosen- 
miiller,  etc. 

In  respect  to  the  authenticity  of  this  verse,  three  things  may  be  ob- 
served. 

1.  It  would  be  remarkable  that  any  author  should,  in  the  midst  of  a 
discourse,  insert  a  single  sentence  in  a  language  different  from  that 
which  he  generally  employed. 

2.  All  agree  that  this  part  of  Jeremiah's  prophecy  was  composed 
several  years  before  the  captivity,  and  consequently  before  the  Chaldee 
language  came  into  use  among  the  Jews. 

3.  This  verse  interrupts  the  connexion  of  the  preceding  and  follow- 
ing verses.  Verse  12  commences  with  a  participle,  Tr^'y,  which  must 
be  read  in  close  connexion  with  the  noun  with  which  it  agrees  in  verse 
10.  tJinb  also,  in  v.  11,  has  no  antecedent  expressed.  "  Thus  shall  ye 
say  to  them,  etc."     To  whom  ?     The  text  does  not  inform  us. 

"  Non  sine  ratione,  aut  temere,  statueretur,  additamentum  esse  ab 
alia  manu,  tempore  morae  in  exilio,  profectum,"  says  Venema  ;  and  this 
Rosenmiiller  quotes  with  approbation. 

I  will  merely  subjoin  two  extracts  from  writers  of  different  opinions 
on  this  point.   • 

"  This  verse  is  omitted  in  one*  MS It  seems  probable  to  me  that 

some  public  teacher  during  the  captivity . . .  had  it  inserted  in  the  margin, 

*  526  Kennicott. 


PART  III.  NOTES  ON  NOS.  1.  II,  145 


and  perhaps  usually  read  together  with  this  section  of  the  prophecy  in 
the  assemblies  of  the  people,  in  order  that  the  common  people  might 
have  their  answer  always  ready  whenever  they  were  molested  on  the 
point  of  religion,  or  importuned  to  join  in  the  idolatrous  worship  of  the 
Chaldeans."  Dr,  Blayney  on  Jeremiah. 

"  This  verse  is  writ  in  the  Chaldean  tongue,  and  not  in  the  Hebrew, 
that  when  they  came  among  those  that  did  worship  their  idols,  they 
might  openly  and  plainly  profess  the  true  God  in  that  language  which 
the  enemies  understood  better  than  they  did  the  Hebrew,  and  that  in 
such  kind  of  language  as  this  ;  Let  all  those  gods  perish  from  off  the 
earth,  and  under  the  heavens,  that  were  not  able  to  make  either.  It  is 
an  imprecation  upon  their  idols."  Matthew  Poole,  Annotations. 

With  this  latter  opinion  Scott,  Henry,  etc.  substantially  agree. 


No.  II.  Dan.  2:  4—7:  28. 

Ch.  II.  v.  4.  ■^•;h.  Imp.  from  N^f,-  See  the  Par.— "i^N  ,  Imp.  Pat- 
tahh,  §  15.  4. 

(5)  MDy  and  i:Di< ,  participles  used  instead  of  the  Praeter,  §53.  1. 
note.  So  "i:gN  and  its  plural  ]''"i»N  frequently. — ^."''1^51:5 ,  the  pointing 
is  intended  for  the  marginal  reading,  "'N'^iU?,  the  regular  form  of  Dec. 
VI.  The  Kethib  is  generally  pointed  by  Lexicographers  N.I'^jtJ?  .  Per- 
haps it  should  rather  be  N^'7ip?  in  analogy  with  the  other  declensions. 
— N-TTN  ,  a  peculiar  form.  It  is  probably  fem.  from  1TN,  2d  part.  Peal 
from  n]^t. ,  §  12.  I.  1.  d.  The  _..  would  regularly  be  impure  and  immu- 
table. It  is  here  treated  as  if  pure  and  mutable,  and  the  Part,  is  varied 
according  to^  Dec.  III.  a. — "^ssiyninn  ,  Fut.  Aph.  from  3>n^ ,  §  12.  II. 
5.  For  the  suffix  see  §  16.  2.  6.  and  Par.  II.— "jilD^n^ ,  PI.  of  n^a  with 
suff.  2d  pers.  pi.— ']l»-rin'^ ,  3.  pi.  m.  Fut.  Ithpe.  from  tiTiU  ,  see  Par. 
VIL 

(6)  f^hJlJ?  ,  2.  pi.  Fut.  Aph.  from  NJln  ,  §  12.  II.  5. 

(7)  mUJST ,  Emph.  !-i  instead  of  N,  a  substitution  very  common  in 
the  Biblical  Chaldee,  Intr.  3.  note;  unless  this  word  should  have  been 
pointed  rTi/iUDI  . 

(9)  'j'lnsjsTri,  the  pointing  is  that  of  the  Keri  'j^M;72'jTri ,  2.  pi.  m. 
Pr.  Ithpa.  from  "jm  .  The  Kethib  should  be  read  in  Aphel,  ITDDttTrr,  or 
like  the  Heb.  Hiph.  ITM^trt .— ^^^N,  1  sing.  Fut.  from  3>n": ,  §20.  4. 
and  §  2.  7.  a. 

(10)  JS'^'^J^'^ ,  see  above  on  verse  5. 

(12)  PlEpi  D33 ,  synonymous  terms,  used  to  heighten  the  idea.    Per- 
"'      "'  19 


146  NOTES  ON  NO.   II.  PART    HI. 

haps  however  ?]^p  may  be  understood  as  expressing  more  violent  anger 
than  D3Z . — fTiainb  ,  Inf.  Aph.  from  liN  ,  perhaps  derived  from  an  ob- 
solete verb  Pe  Yodh. 

(14)  ■'^."'Shb,  Accusative,  §60.  3. 

(16)  "jn;"; ,  Fut.  of  in:  with  the  force  of  a  subjunctive  in  consequence 
of  the  •^7 ,  that  he  would  give.  For  the  form  see  §  18.  note  2.  and  §  12. 
I.  1. 

(19)  ^r.5  ,  Praeter  Passive,  §13. 2.— -^-i^  ,  Pael,  §  12. 1. 1.  &•— nrN^. , 
Accusative  §  60.  3. 

(20)  Ml tiV. ,  for  Nirr;;b  ,  Fut.  with  b  and  an  optative  sense,  §  50.  2. 
(22)  Nnj^'^ay ,  fem.  pi.  emph.  from  p'^^?.,  deep,  inscrutable  thi?igs, 

§  41.  note. — NnnnDTO ,  Pass.  Part.  Pa.  fem.  pi.  emph.  from  "inp. — 
^inynin,  2.  m.  sing.  Praet.  Aph.  from  S-"i^  with  suff.  Ip.  sing,  see  Par.  II. 

(25)  b?:- ,  Aph.  from  r?^  ,  §  12.  II.  5,  and  §  2.  7.  «.— bN^inb  ,  this 
Accusative  with  b  is  of  frequent  occurrence.  It  will  perhaps  be  unne- 
cessary to  notice  it  again. — ■•"  in  the  beginning  of  a  speech  superfluous 
like  the  Greek  on. — ni^^uin ,  §  15.  4. 

(26)  ^"'rj^'Kri ,  art  thou  ?  compounded  of  the  interrogative  11 ,  "'ri'^N 
and  the  suffix  ^''_. — ":ny^inb,  Inf.  Aph.  from  ^'T'  with  suffix,  §  16. 
2./. 

(27)  n^innl:,  Inf.  Aph.  from  NTi,§23.  Notes  on  the  Par.  4. 

(28)  i<inb  ,  7nust  take  place,  §  50.  2. 

(29)  ^pbp  ,  comp.  the  English  expression  "  thoughts  cotne  up,  arise 
in  the  mind." 

(31)  nh,  indef  art.  §29.  1.  note. 

(32)  ■'nTnn  ,  a  plur.  form,  see  'j''"Tn  in  the  vocabulary. 

(33)  p?lS73 ,  part  of  them.  So  the  French  distributive  article  rfw, 
de  la,  etc.  The  punctuators  seem  to  have  considered  bs"^.  as  necessari- 
ly feminine.     The  writer  doubtless  understood  it  to  be  common. 

(34)  np."7ri ,  Aph.  from  pj^T ,  3.  s.  f  Pr.  segholate  form. 

(35)  npri'^pn ,  Ithpe.  from  n:^t . — nnn  ,  §  23,  Notes  on  the  Par.  1. 

(38)  rii?^  or  (Keri)  l""^'!^,  1st  Part,  from  -|T7. 

(39)  N^'nN  ,  here,  as  in  all  such  cases,  the  pointing  is  that  of  the  Keri. 
N^'"]N  may  have  been  used  in  the  same  sense.  See  ^^niS!  in  the  vocab- 
ulary. 

(40)  i"nn ,  3.  s.  f  Fut.  Pe.  from  yy-) ,  Ilhireq  of  the  regular  form 
being  lengthened  to  Tseri,  on  account  of  the  Resh. 


I'ART  111. 


NOTES  ON  NO.   II.  147 


CHAP.  III. 

(2)  The  best  critics  are  uncertain  as  to  the  precise  meaning  of  sev- 
eral of  these  words.  Neither  etymology  nor  usage  sheds  much  light  on 
them.  Those  meanings  which  are  considered  most  probable  are  given 
in  the  vocabulary. 

(4)  'J'^'niaN  ,  it  is  spoken,  lit.  they  speak,  §  56.  2.  d. 

(6)  Nr^l"';?^ ,  fem.  Part,  from  nj^'^,  burning. 

(8)  pn"':?"}!^  I^SN ,  lit.  ate  or  devoured  the  pieces  of  them,  of  the 
Jeics.  The  sense  unquestionably  is,  calumniated,  or  accused  the  Jcics. 
The  Syriac  usage  is  the  same.  The  Arabians  also  employ  the  phrase 
to  eat  the  flesh  of  a  person,  in  the  same  sense. 

(12)  ayt:  ,  this  word  is  connected  with  170"i)  and  the  phrase  signifies, 
as  explained  in  the  vocabulary,  (see  under  Qya  ,)  to  shotv  regard. 

(13)  !-T;n?rii;,  Inf  Aph.  from  NnN  .— ^^-^■^"^t ,  a  kind  of  irregular 
Hophal  or  passive  of  Aphel.     See  Nni<  in  the  vocabulary. 

(14)  na"^)?n  ,  the  regular  pointing  would  be  ria"'pn.  Comp.  §  12. 
I.  1,  where  Tseri  and  Hhireq  seem  to  be  employed  almost  indifferently. 
But  the  changes  of  vowels  in  Chaldee  seem  hardly  capable  of  being  re- 
duced to  rule. 

(16)  iaS  J?b  ,  the  shade  of  meaning  seems  to  be,  "  We  do  not  think 
it  necessary^iio  return  a  favourable  answer,  to  comply  with  thy  wish. 

(18)  N^r.^.,  Optative,  §  50.  2. 

(19)  ntn ,  2  Part.  Pe.  from  NTH,  literally  seven  times  more  than  it 
had  been  seen,  or  known,  etc. 

(21)  ^nc3  ,  Praet.  pass.  §  13.  2. 

(24)  yp_^  ',  Plur.  Part,  from  Njy .    See  Par.  IX.  Dec.  V.  a. 


CHAP.  IV. 

(3)  nb»3Jlb  ,  Inf  Aph.  from  bbs ,  §  2. 7.  a. 

(4)  ■j'^bby,  so  the  Kethib  should  evidently  be  pointed.  The  Keri, 
rby  is  a  contracted  form  of  the  same.  Comp.  nbb^? ,  Keri  nV? ,  Dan. 
5:  10. 

(9)  )'']n1 ,  Ittaphal  Fut.  3.  sing.  m.  from  )^^  .  Here,  as  frequently 
in  the  poetical  style  of  the  orientals,  the  future  is  employed  as  an  aorist, 
§  50.  1. 

(10)  nns  ,  1  Part.  Pe.  §  12.  I.  1.  c. 

(11)  ^nP.N  ,  Aph.  from,  ina . 

(12)  ^Js'qV.  ■>  Fut.  Ithpa.  from  yiii: . 
(13)nn:n:,§12.  1. 1. 


148  NOTES  ON  NO.   11.  PART  III. 

(14)  Q'^'vUDt* ,  Hebraism,  Intr.  3.  note  1. — bsip,  in  the  construct 
state,  the  base  of  men,  i.  e.  the  basest. 

(16)  ■>«-)«  ,  from  i<y2  ,  Keri  "'-)?3  from  "nQ  . 

(19)  rr^n-) ,  the  Keri  is  anomalous.  The  Kethib,  pointed  n^l'n  , 
would  be  the  regular  2d  p.  sing.  m.  Praet.  from  niil  . 

(28)  "{"^"i^N  ,  see  above  on  3:  4. 

(30)  nso",  Praet.  3.  s.  f.  from  ;i=iD. 


CHAP.  V. 

(6)  ^ni  jp ,  3  pi.  Pr.  from  N3"2:  with  pleonastic  suffix  in  the  Dative, 
compare  *'rnb5>  v.  9. — 'J^'^J^.^JO  ,  Part.  pi.  Tthpa.  from  S^yi  No.  II. 
(8)  ^!'^uj2^ ,  the  pointing  is  that  of  n"^;>pDl . 

(15)  ^b2^n,  Hophal,  a  Hebraism  not  of  frequent  occurrence,  Introd. 
3.  note  I.  See  bb?  .  The  marginal  reading,  without  Dagesh,  seems  to 
be  required  by  the  analogy  of  Aphel,  though  Peal  receives  Dagesh. 

(16)  bsin,  point  the  Kethib  b^nn.  This  and  the  Keri  biSn  are 
both  in  use  as  Futures  of  b^^  ,  q.  v. 

(20)  Qi  ,  Praet.  pass.  §  13.  2.— T^^yrr ,  3.  m.  pi.  Pr.  Aph.  from  fifl?. 
(25)  I^T  n:73  ,  These  are  passive  participles  Peal,  the  third  and 
fourth  in  a  contracted  form,  §  12.  I.  1.  d. 

(27)  Nnir^pPi ,  Praet.  Pass.  2.  sing.  m.  §  13.  2. 

(28)  nD"'-iiS  and  nn"'--; ,  Praeters  Passive  3.  sing,  f 

(30)  N'^'^UJS ,  according  to  the  pointing,  and  to  the  marginal  reading, 
this  word  is  an  adjective  in  the  emph.  sing,  agreeing  with  Nsb/Q . 


CHAP.  VI. 

(1)  V^'l^  >  fern,  of  )^^p\ ,  see  Par.  XI. 

(2)  V'nb,  ■•'7 ,  who  were  to  be,  should  be,  §  50.  2. 

(3)  pp^","  1  iPart.  Pe.  §  12.  I.  1.  c. 

(14)  iai  ba^j^  "^"T,  as  '^'7  occurs  so  frequently,  its  several  uses  should 
be  carefully  distinguished.  It  occurs  four  times  in  this  verse.  In  the 
first  instance  it  is  a  conjunction,  equivalent  to  the  Greek  on,  and,  like 
that  particle,  in  the  beginning  of  a  speech,  need  not  be  translated  into 
English  ;  in  the  third  it  is  the  preposition  of,  or  a  sign  of  the  Genitive 
case  ;  and  in  the  second  and  fourth,  it  is  a  relative  pronoun,  in  the  for- 
mer case  Nominative,  in  the  latter,  Objective. 

(15)  ■'nibi^ ,  the  suffix  is  reflexive,  §  49.  1.  b. — Lit.  the  king  was  dis- 
pleasing to  himself,  better  in  English,  was  displeased  with  himself. 


PART  III.  NOTES  ON  NOS.  II.  III.  149 

(18)  n^n%'l,  an  irregular  Hophal  3.  sing.  fern.  Pr.  from  JtnN  . — 
nTOjD  ,  Pr.  pass.  3.  sing.  fem.  from  Cnt),  §22.  1.  note,  and  §  13.  2. 

(19)  ^nVry ,  so  in  Latin,  verbs  oi  taking  away  are  construed  with  a 
Dative  of  the  person. 

(24)  bNl'.a'ib ,  Accusative,  §  GO.  3.     It  is  governed  by  nj5D3r;^ . 


CHAP.  VII. 

(3)  -J^SUJ ,  1  Part.  pi.  fem.  from  N3ip. 

(4)  ^U"'-):^  ,  Praet.  pass,  from  D-^a . 

(5)  "it^UibT ,  "itiip ,  the  Keri,  is  doubtless  the  true  reading.     The 
Targums  employ  "nup . 

(15)  n!-]3riN  ,  §  12.  II.  2. 

(20)  bVaa  ,§12.  I.  1.— ]»  3"5 ,  comparative,  as  in  Heb.  §  64.  1.  a. 


No.  III.     Ezra  4:  8—6:  18. 

Chap.  IV.  v.  (10)  DDySI ,  according  to  Gesenius,  equivalent  to  the 
common  expression  and  so  forth.  His  different  etymologies  do  not 
however  appear  entirely  satisfactory. 

(12)  t?n"4i=iNi=i  NP)nn?3,  these  forms  are  both  feminines  in  the  em- 
phatic state  from  ina  and  ^^J<2.  §  41.  note. 

(14)  acrim  ,  prob.  lit.  "  we  eat  our  salt  from  the  palace"  i.  e.  we  de- 
rive our  sustenance  from  the  royal  bounty.  If  the  sense  proposed  by 
Buxtorf  and  some  others  be  admissible ,  Nbri"'!^  must  be  taken  as  refer- 
ring  to  the  temple.     See  hb73  . 

(18)  ■'"IP. ,  Praet.  pass.     The  composite  Shevais  occasioned  by  the  '~\. 


CHAP.  V. 

(I)  nN^S3 ,  in  this  and  similar  forms  of  the  same  word,  N,  with  the 
pointing  of  the  text,  must  be  considered  otiant.  It  might  be  treated  as 
a  consonant,  and  receive  the  pointing  MiJ'^32 ,  N*'^N''i3  ,  etc.  See  N''i3 
in  the  vocabulary. 

(3)  nn?  ,  const.  St.  from  nhs .— nbbS'iib  ,  Shaph.  from  b^3  No.  I. 
(8)  t)il5ri73  ,  Part.  Ithpe.  from  filii: .— i<"inyn53  ,  Part.  Ithpe.  fem.  sing, 
of  the  same  form  with  the  absol.  masc.  Dec.  111.^. 

(II)  •^r;;^,^ 26.  2.  a. 

( 13)  ^}ib,  §  50.  2.  The  pointing  of  the  Keri-,  (without  Dagesh,)  is 
doubtless  the  correct  one. 

(15)  Nia,  Imp.  of  NiD3 ,  §  18.  2. 


150  NOTES  ON   NOS.  III.   IV.  PART  III. 


CHAP.  VI. 

(5)  ^r:-^^, ,  Fut.  of^'n. 

(15)  N'^^'^TD  ,  Pass.  Part.  Shaph.  or  Praet.  Passive  from  n:£\ 


No.  IV.    Ezra  7:  12—29. 

(12)  ^■'tta  ,  perfect  (peace),  according  to  the  common  Eng.  version. 
Gesenius  explains  it  as  a  term  of  respect  applied  to  the  person  address- 
ed, and  renders  it  learned. 

(14)  "Ti't:?.;; ,  for  "^rit^?^  ,  pl-  Part,  from  1:^"; .  The  frequent  substitu- 
tion of  Pattahh  for  Qamets  has  been  mentioned  before. 

(24)  N'3'^n2 ,  strictly  2d  Part.pl.  from  'jn3 ,  consecrated  persons, 
hence,  those  devoted  to  the  service  of  the  sanctuary,  Nethinim. 


VOCABULARY. 


i^ 


13N ,  iN  m.  a  father,  irreg.  emph. 
MSN  ,  with  sufl'.  it  takes  tlje  form 
1::n";  e.  g.  ^nSN  thy  father,  Tl^nN  , 
•^TiN  Ms  father,  N^ln^iriN  her  fa- 
ther^' N;^nN  our  fctlherl  pS^iN 
your  (masc.)  father,  "j^lSN  your 
[fern.)  father,  etc.  Instead  of  "^InN 
my  father,  which  occurs  only  Dan. 
5:  13,  the  empli.  t{2N  is  elsewhere 
universally  employed.  Plur.  ^^^N 
const.  nniN  ,emph.  NnniN  with 
sufF.  TiniN  or  "^nnSN  my  fathers, 
etc.  mth  the  sufT.  of  either  sing. 
or  plur.  nouns. 

SN  emph.  N2N  ,  NS""/}*  and  N32N 
m.  Dec.  IV.  h.fi-uit. 

n^N  to  perish.— Aph.  ^n^N  and  151  n 
to  destroy ;  also  intrans.  to  perish. 
— Hoph.  ^^Irt  to  be  destroyed. 

•jlaN  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  stone. 

ISN  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  reward. 

t{'~l3N  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  an  epistle,  a 
letter. 

^■''IN  adv.  then.  With  i  prefixed, 
■jilNS,  idem. 

fi"tN  m.  pr.  n.  Adam. 

tD'lN  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  also 

&3N  and  tS'l'^N  Dec.  II.  a.  also 

C'^N  and  tn''i<  Dec.  I.  b.  i.  q.  hi 
blood. 

J^n'IN  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  the  ground,  the 
earth. 

•^TN  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  the  month  Adar, 
part  of  February  and  March. 

^■JN  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  threshing-floor. 

V^^-^'yy^-  ™'*  (fo^'"d  only  in  the  plu- 
ral), chief  judges,  senators. 


N'TT'iIN  adv.  (i.  q.  c(S^d(na=udQdu- 
TO)?),  carefully,  exactly. 

i>nnN:  c.  g.  Dec.  II.  a.  (i.  q.  Heb. 
5T"1T  with  i<  prosthetic,)  an  arm. 

T'lllIN  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  other,  another. 

IsblN  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  doctrine,  instruc- 
tion. 

]J31N  m.  Dec,  I.  b.  an  artificer,  work- 
man ;  a  maker. 

tliaiK  and  T:;ciN  f  Dec.  VII,  c.  the 
making  or  doing  any  thing;  the 
thing  made  or  done. 

"l^TJ^  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  treasure  ;  place 
of  deposit. 

niTN  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  a  loay,  access. 

i^'^'^TM  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  law. 

MT N  and  riTN  ,  2d  Pait.  NJN  ,  to  light, 
kindle. 

TTNi.  q.  btwS. 

bjii'  Fut.  b^T\': ,  Inap.  VlN  ,  b\rN: 
"and  bT^.  >  ^'^  SO  ;  to  depaii. 

!lN  m.  a  brother,  irreg.  emph.  ftflNl , 
with  sufF.  ''tlN  or  ""rii*  my  brother  ; 
rf^hN  thy  brother,  ""n^nN  ("'Tni* 
Gen.' 4:  8.  Jer.  T.)  his  brother,  etc. 
Plur.  -J-^hN  with  suff.  ""hN.  my 
brothers,  r]"'.-TN  and  ^rjN.  %  broth- 
ers, "ri'inN  his  brothers.  This  form 
is  distinguished  from  the  sing,  by 
Hholem  while  the  latter  has  Shu- 
req.  '}TD"»hN,  etc. 

nhN  to  lay  hold  of,  take,  take  posses- 
sion of.    Ithpe.  pass. 

N^iinN  and  NnTlN.  f.  Dec.  VII,  a. 
taking  possession,  possession. 

n-inN  f.  Dec.  VII,  a.  (verbal  froni 


t\bi^ 


152 


"^DiV 


STjn  to  announce,  to  explain),  ex- 
planation. 

tnT^hN  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  an  enigma. 

NjCHN  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  possession ; 
inhentance. 

■''^ni<  prop,  after. 

^"itiN  Dec.  VIII.  c.  and  "J-inN  Dec. 

•  t:  T  J     T  T;  IT 

I.  b.  adj.  other,  another. 

"•■nnN  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  that  ivhich  is 
last ;  extremity,  end. 

^i:E)-)Ti;hN  m.  ])!.'  Dec.  II.  (from  the 
c  /  c 
Persian  ^€   V^  a  satrap,  perhaps 

•»/    /         c    /^ 
with  the    prefix  /  iiX:i.|       excel- 
lence,) principal  governors. 

IViH  m.  (in  the  sing,  hke  Dec.  I.  pi. 
'j''1l2N)  brier;  especially  the  kaiv- 
thorii. 

^J'^ij  adv. /(Oi<;  ?     y^p''ii  idem. 

*b'^N  m.  Dec.  1.  b.  a  tree. 

fW'^N  f.  Dec.  Vll.  a.  terror  ;  fear. 

yii  conj.=Heb.  QN  if 

'nj^'';N  and  "ip/iN  ,  i.  q.  '1)5'; ,  q.  v. 

M'^i*  or  '^n''N  adv.  of  affirmation  (:= 
Heb."ylj ■',)</( ere  is,there  are  ;  there  ex- 
ists, ■'b  "n^N  I  have.  It  takes  the 
suffixes  of  plural  nouns.    Dan.  2: 

II,  3: 14. 
I'^niDN  i.  q.  !]''N  q.v. 
b^M  to  eat ;  to  consume. 

^N  adv.  not,  especially  before  the  fu- 
ture tense,  expressing  a  prohibi- 
tion, etc. 

bij  (Keri  Ez.  5:  15,)  and 

^iVn  dem.  pron.  these. 

J^i;N  ni-  Dec.  I.  a.  God.  PI.  excel, 
sometimes  as  in  Hebrew  Q'^inVN. 

ibN  interj.  i.  q.  TIN  ,  behold! 

I^N  conj.  if;  interj.  oh  that,  utinam! 
i'bao  as  if 

•>i^.^bN  and  •jicVlbN  or  'jiD^rT'bN 
unless,  comp.  of  ^'^ii  ,  Np,  and  the 
enclitic  syllable  "JTD  ;  i.  q.  ^l^N  ,if 

^\H  and  I^N  ,  or  fully  written  ^"^Vf^ 
and  1^ V.N  ,  dcm.  pron.  plur.  masc. 
</iese  ;  those. 

f\\ii  and  p]l:i<  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  thou- 
sand. I 


DN  f.  irreg.  emph.  M73N ;  with  suff. 
^73i<  ,  etc. ;  plur.  ""JHT:}*  ;  with 
suffi  p'tnntnTaN,  (and  with  masc. 
form  pn''73N^)  a  mother. 

Dtt  conj.  if. 

NttN  f.  irreg.  (in  the  sing,  like  Dec. 
VIII.  a.  but  in  .pause  ^i-;73N;  in 
the  plur.  ImJSN  ,  nnQN  ,  etc.)  a 
nurse ;  a  maid! 

N73i*  and  Timii  fem.  Dec.  VII.  a.  in 
sing. ;  plur.  "{V^ii  Dec.  IV.  a.  a 
cubit. 

H'Bti  f.  plur.  'J'^/ijN  ,  a  people,  nation. 

■JTsV'  Aph.  I'^lq'^TJ  to  believe  ;  with  3 
to  confide  in,  trust  in.  Pass.  part. 
'J73"';i73  certain,  true;  faithful. 

'^TON  to  speak,  say  ;  to  command. 

l7aN  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  lamb. 

^3n73N  adj.  Dec.  VII.  b.  strong. 

■JN  adv.  tvherc'7  whither?  'J57J  whence  ? 

N"N  ,  less  frequently  In; N  and  "^SN , 
'p'ers.  pron.  com.  gen.  /.— PI.  N2H2N 
ive. 

■j^SN  pers.  pron.  3d  pi.  m.  they ;  them. 

Di2N  and  DT  :N  adj.  and  sub.  Dec.  I. 
a.  violent ;  a  violent  person ;  a  rob- 
ber. 

DIN  to  constrain,  compel ;  to  oppress 
the  mind,  occasion  anxiety. 

;):N  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  i.  q.  ;:)N  ,  /ace, 
countenance.  Dual  and  Plural 
idem. 

'>i;2i!< ,  (UJ3N  ,  and  by  Aphaeresis  ^1)2) 
m.  irrea;.  emph.  N'»li;N  ,  N\1J;  Gen. 
3:20.  Pseudo-Jon.;  plur.  '}"'\l3:it 
and  V"^1 ;  const.  "^i^DN  ;  man.— 
IU3N  12  idem. 

riDN  ,  (in  Bibl.  dial.  Ml3l2^l ,  pointed 
like  the  other  form  which  is  em- 
ployed in  the  Targums,  Avith  rt 
in  otio.  The  iviiters  doubtless 
pronounced  it,  in  analogy  with 
the  Hebrew,  fllniN.)  pers.  pron. 
com.  gen.  thou. 

■JlPlSN,  i.  q.  "(iriN,  ye. 

!)  Cn"  and  T  DN  f  Dec.  VII.  c.  a  med- 
icine, something  salutary. 

"1*1  Dt<  ni.  Dec.  I.  a.  band,  fetter. 

"^pN  iii-  irreg.  emph.  N^pN  ;  pi.  "J^pN  , 
NmpN  ,  etc. ;  a  physician. 


1"li« 


J  53 


in« 


IDjCN  m.  pi.  n.  Asnapptr,  perhaps 
the  same  with  Esarhaddon,  or  an 
officer  under  him.  He  collected 
the  Samaritans  from  different  na- 
tions and  settled  them  in  the  land 
of  the  ten  tribes.  Ez.  4: 10.  Comp. 
V.2. 

{{DTsOi*  (milel)  adv.  speedily. 

*^CN  ni.  Dec.  I.  a.  prohibition ;  obli- 
gation. 

N~lDN  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  chain,  hand. 

]T'7n~")DN  m.  pi.  n.  Esarhaddon,  son 
of  Sennacherib  and  king  of  Assy- 
ria. 

ta^DN  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  (from  the  Latin 
strata,)  street,  ivay,  path. 

5>N  (by  a  double  commutation  i.  q. 
Heb.  Vi?,)  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  ivood. 

I.  p|N  couj.  also. 

II.  fJN  (contr.from;]2N)  m.  Dec.  IV. 
a.  face,  countenance. — N*ii  ""EN 
surface  of  the  field,  i.  e.  simply  the 
field. 

i<|]D'n3N  m.  pi.  pr.  n.  of  a  people  set- 
tled in  Samaria  and  subject  to  the 
AssjTians,  perhaps  the  Parrhasii. 

NI'SDICN  m.  pi.  and 

N^JDnDTCN  m.  pi.  proper  names  of 
nations,  now  unknown,  settled  in 
Samaria  and  subject  to  the  Assy- 
rians. Ez.  4:  9. 

fi'riEN  (only  Ez.  4:  13.)  according  to 
Buxtorf,  treasury.  So  modern 
critics  generally.  Aben  Ezra  ex- 
plains it  by  DTNliTn  ,  expenses  ; 
R.  Sol.  Jarchi  by  0!^ ,  tribute. 

3>3i:Nl.  f.  Dec.  II.  a.  (PL  ]_  and  ]_) 
finger ;  with  bj;."!. ,  toe. 

■'irplSi*  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  (Greek  aro- 
A?;;)pl.  ]1^(J22N  ,  robe,  garment. 

ya-jN  f.  fn3;3-lN  m.  num.  adj.  Dec. 
II.  a.  four. 

pa'nN  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  purple.    Heb. 

)m^,ii,  Syr.   (.JQ^M  J    Arabic 
/  /  c  S 

sj'^N:  interj.  lo  !  behold! 

20 


nniS   f.   Dec.  III.  d.  (pi.   generally 

"j  h~] M,)  journey  ;  loay,  path. 

"^yA  aiid  nr,"}N  ra-  '^rreg.  emph. 
N"'-jN;  phir.  'J^'IIN ,  emph. 
Nn]^-)N  ,  a  lion. 

■'"IN  conj.  because ;  that. 

^■i-l'N  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fit,  suitable,  pro- 
per,  verbal  from  Tj^N  <o  be  pro- 
longed, to  be  long ;  in  Talm.  to  pre- 
pare, adapt. 

nS")N  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  prolongation, 
continuation. 

liniSnN  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  knee. 

kXDlN"  and  ND"'nN  f-  Dec.  VII.  a. 
poison. 

I.  i^lN  e.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  the  earth,  i.  q. 
Heb.  y- IN ,  Gr.  Introd.  4.  note  2. 

II.  3>nN  adv.  beloxo ;  with  yn,  infe- 
rior, ban.  2:  39.     Hence 

^Si^N  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  whai  is  loivest, 
bottom. 

p-lN  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  (i.  q.  ^-^N,) 
earth.  In  the  bibUcal  Chaldee  only 
Jer.  10:  11.  but  frequent  in  the 
Targums. 

•>IJN  .  NUJN  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  and 

NtSN  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  fire. 

"i'N  in.  Dec.  IV.  c.  foundation. 

P]UJN  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and 

f]lJN  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  astrologer.  He- 
brew and  Syriac  idem. 

'l')'^^  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  ivall. 

Nni^N  with  prosthetic  N,  i.  q.  Nn'ilJ 

to  drink. 
TT^rUJN  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  rebellion. 
DN  m!  Dec.  I.  a.  a  sign. 
nN  pers.  pron.  2d  p.  sing.  m.  thou. 
NnN  Fut.  ■'n'^;;,  '^n'^n  ,  etc.  to  come. 

Aph.  '^n'^N  and  in  the  bibl.  Chaldee 

'^n'^fi  to  cause  to  come,  bring.  Pass. 

of  a  pecuUar  form,    (a   kind    of 

Hophal,)  Ti'^n  to  be  brought,  Dan. 

3:  13.  6:  18'. 
NriN  f.  (In  sing.  Dec.  VII.  a.  but  in 

pause  ^nN;    PL  l^'^^  Dec.  II.  a.) 

a  woman ;  a  wife. 

I.  "JTriN  pers.  pron.  2.  pi.  m.  ye ;  you. 

II.  "jinN  c.  g.  Dec.  I.  a. furnace,  oven. 


&{sn 


154 


nn 


^nN  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  aplace.—'^^  *nnN 
ivfiere. 


3  prep,  in ;  by ;  with. 

;r^N3  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fem.  NU3=1N2  Dec. 

VII.  a.  evil,  tvicked. 
\Di<{3  to  be  bad.  b?  ^'NS  to  displease. 

A'ph.  to  do  in  a  bad  or  disagreeable 

manner. 

*^n^{^  prep.  i.  q.  "in3  ajler. 

■J^^a  prep.  o?i  account  of.  ■^  '!'^:(3conj. 

because. 
bb^a  idem.    '7  bb^3  l^a  because ;  so 

that,  ifa  br:j3  -ja  t%? 

b"'-]2  Jt/eni.    •^  b'^'IS  so  <Aaf ;  that,  ut- 
Y>*^'Z  to  inquire,  investigate. 
*l2?  P^'  ^0  scatter,  dispei-se. 
^'b'^Tj'3  f.  Dec.  VII.  chaste,  quickness. 
^b''~23  quickly. 

I.  bi^S  Pa.  to  terrify.  Ithpa.  pass. 

II.  b!72  Pa.  to  /laston.  Ithpe.  Inf. 
ribnsn^  ,  as  a  noun,  haste. 

Nnrja'f!  bee.  VIII.  a.  and 

Nnnaf.  Dec.  VII, a.  shame;  modesty. 

ma  to  lodge,  pass  a  night. 

7T3  to  spoil,  plunder  ;  to  depopulate. 

"1'^n3  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  choice,  excellent. 

"3  Sep.  prep.  i.  q.  a  {«,  etc.  See  al- 
so under  0*^3 . 

'J'^2  and  ^p/'a  prep,  between,  among- 
It  takes  the  suffixes  of  botli  singu- 
lar and  plural  nouns. 

!-l3^3  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  understanding, 
intelligence. 

H'^^^  f.Dec.  VII.  a.  jmlace. 

Ui^a  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  bad,  evil. 

n*;?  m.  irreg.  Enipli.  5<n';2 ,  rT^S , 
("«3  Ex.  7: 21.  Pseudo-Jon. j";  const- 
n"'3  ;  plur.  •j-'na  etc.  like  Dec.  IV. 
a  house ;  the  place  in  which  any 
thing  is  contained  or  kept ;  e.  g. 
^ll'."^.  ri'^?  treasury^  i^<''^r'5  T'a 
archives. 

it3a  to  weep. 


I  ba  m.  Dec.  1.  a.  heart. 

Nba  to  trear  oui ;  met.  to  afflict,  op- 
press. Pa.  i<Ze»i. 

iba  verbal  from  i<ba,  excise,  lax  on 
articles  consumed. 

•JS  (In  the  Targums  found  only  in 
the  plural),  see  "i3. 

?133  to  build;  to  rebuild,  restore.  Ith- 
pe. pass. 

'J'';3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  building,  structure. 
Verbal  from  MIS , 

D^a  to  6e  angry. 

N"^iD3  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  message,  an- 
nunciation. 

iny3  to  seek  ;  to  ask,  request. 

lya  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  7-equest,  petition. 
^i'aa  is  taken  as  an  adv.  or  interj. 
/  entreat,  quaeso  ;  often  followed 
by  l'^  ;  as  ^:73  i:?a3,/  fteseecfe  f^ee. 

T^i'a  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  brute ;  cattle  ; 
beasts  of  burden. 

b2>a  or  b2>3  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  lord,  mas- 
ter ;  husband. 

^y2  and  Pa.  ^^^'Z  to  bum ;  to  con- 
sume. 

Mi-'ps  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  valley. 

~ijv3  Pa.  to  seek,  search.  Ithpa.  idem. 

"15  or  "^3  m.  a  son,  irreg.  empli.  N"13 , 
with  s\ift*.  ^"13  ,  rt''";i3  ;  plur.  'j^;3 
(from  "J 3),  eniph.  N'^:3 ,  (with 
prosthetic  N  ,  i<;aN  ,)  const,  "^ra  ; 
with  suft:  1:3  j^'ija  orrj:3,  p3'':3. 
In  various  combinations  it  has  the 
force  of  the  Heb.  "jS  q.  v.  in  Lex. 
Heb. 

'^a ,  N13  ivithoid,  (for as,  =Heb. 
y'lfl) ;  T^  '^3  prep,  besides,  except ; 
as  a  subst.  that  which  is  without, 
the  field. 

N~>3  to  create.  Ithpe.  pass. 

!^"l3  to  kneel.  Pa.  ^na  to  bless,  praise. 

^^3  and  ^"la.  f-  Dec.  III.  b.  knee. 

ND-J3  and  N3")3  f.  Dec.  VII.  a. 
blessing,  benediction. 

Cn3  adv.  certainly;  indeed;  also, 
moreover ;  conj.  i/e^,  but. 

■-liUS  m.  Dec.  III.  h.  flesh. 

na  hi.  Dec.  IV.   a.   bath,   a   liquid 


iiy 


155 


^1 


measure,  equal  to  seven  and  a  half 
gallons. 
n^  f.  a  daughter,  irreg.  Empli.  Nn'ia 

~  7 

(comp.  Syr.  Zh^),  const,  n^a, 
with  suff.  ^n-na ;  pi.  1:3  ,  (from 
N:3  ;)  const,  nzia  ;    emph.  Nn33  , 

'J''^T  nS  pi.  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  virginity. 

"Tiria  prep,  after.  With  suff.it  takes 
a'plm*.  form;  as  "^^112. 


ia  ni.  Dec.  IV.  a.  back ;  surface.    I^y 

i3  and  "^33  b^  upon. 
S4  and  -12^'"  (with  suff.  "'a.l,  ^3^) 

prep,  loith;  subject  to,  penes.     *■ 
i-l  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  pit,  den ;  pit  for 

toater,  cistern. 
N"m3    f.    Dec.    VII.     a.    courage; 

strength  ;  power. 
^i-j  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  (PI.  '("''^na  and 

"j^^^il  as  if  from  ^'d:^ .)  a  man  ;  a 

male'. 
'J"^")i'ia  (with  the  flat  pronunciation), 

i.  q.  '^'^ISTil  . 
Tl-J  to  cut  off;  to  cut  down  a  tree. 
•"iVe.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  PL  yi^  and 

'J^'ia ,  a  kid. 
13  or  Ta   m.  irreg.  const.  T-i  ;    with 

suff.  Ji]i.2 ,  Tt^i,  midst.  "153  among ; 

in. 
t^T-1  idem. 

ni.?.  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  pride. 
iyiii  and  Aph.  h"'^N  to  go  forth ;  to 

burst  or  break  forth. 
•nSTi]   m.  Dec.   I.  b.  treasurer.    PI. 

1^_3T3  and  '}"'-inia  . 
N^I^IiJ  (not  found  in  abs.  sing.)  m. 

Dec.  II.  a.  a  coal. 
fiTT3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  threatener ;  avenger. 
'^l-i  to  cut  off;  to  decree.  Ithpe.  to  be 

cut  off,  detached. 
"Ijfii  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  astrologer,  divin- 
er, ht.  Part,  from  Ita  ,  one   ivho 

utters  a  decree.    Comp.  "also  M'lTa  , 

fate. 
N'HTjI   f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  decree ;  thing 

decreed.. 


^n5  to  laugh ;  to  deride. 

{•{•^a  or  "'ii  m.  irreg.  (pi.  ni'^N"'?.)  a  val- 
ley. 

fiatl'^il.  or  insna  ,  (compounded  of  ""i 
a  vaZ/e?/,  and'diJl  pi'op.  n.)  the  val- 
ley ofHinnom,  where  children  were 
passed  through  the  fire  to  Moloch ; 
hence,  met.,  hell,  the  place  of  future 
and  eternal  punishment. 

'iva  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  stranger,  a  for- 
eigner. 

'^'^a  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  chalk,  lime ;  plas- 
tering of  a  wall. 

Nba  ,  nbi}  and  ■'^a  to  emigrate,  go 
into  captivity ;  to  reveal,  make  man- 
ifest. Praet.  Pass.  "^^3  and  "^b^ 
Dan.  2:  19,  30.  Aph.  ''"Van  to  car- 
ry captive. 

bllba  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  wheel. 

^ba  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  captivity. 

bbii  m.  found  only  in  the  phrase  "Jlli* 
^ba  ,  prob.  lapis  devolutionis,  a 
stone  which  cannot  be  carried,  but 
must  be  rolled,  on  account  of  its 
great  size.    LXX,  choice  stones. 

'1'^:d-|  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  perfect. 

"ja  ni.  Dec.  IV.  a.  and 

Nia  f.  irreg.  (emph.  Nnsa  and  NPlJ-J , 
frequently  in  Targ. '  Pseudo-Jbn. 

Nn-3=isa  or  Nn-^DTra ,  const.  n|a ; 

pl.  'jsa);  a  garden. 

T32)  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  treasure. 

?)5'm.  Dec.  IV.  a.  wing. 

]£)a  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  vine  ;  a  vine- 
yard. 

S'la  and  Pa.  Si'^^S^  to  excite,  stir  up. 

'^'^^si  Pa.  to  rouse,  excite.  Ithpe.  and 
Ithpa.  pass,  and  refl. 

Cia  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  bone. 

na  f.  pr.  n.  of  a  principal  city  among 
the  Philistines,  Gath. 


■7  rel.  pron.  ==Heb.  ^"iii*  ,  who,  etc. ; 

conj.  that,  so  that ;    because,  etc. ; 

sign  of  the  Possessive  or  Genitive 

case. 
N'T  f-  demonst.  pron.  this ;  that. 


r^ 


156 


n 


^1  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  a  bear. 

an?  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  enmity.    Nil'l  "b^a 

an  enemy. 
la^TT  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  enmity. 
na?  (comp.  Gram.  Intr.  4.  note  2.)  to 

offer  sacrifices. 
hi'7  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  sacrifice. 
p5'7  'o  adhere,  cleave  to. 
'^'2'^  and  Pa.  '^3'7  to  lead,  conduct; 

to  govern  ;  to  take,  receive. 
N'li'7  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  cause.  nnsT  ^19 

^■^  so  f^af. 
f^'li?  and  NKa?  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a 

bee. 
itl'7  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  gold. 
^n'i  to  deride. 

•»i;5T7  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  and  U53'7  Dec. 
III.  b.  honey. 

I^')'^  m.  pr.  n.  David. 

'J'llDI'T  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  memory  ;  a  me- 
morial. 

"JT?  and  'J'^'7  to  judge  ;  to  adjudge  ;  to 
contend. 

pi":;  to  be  broken  in  pieces. 

^11  <o  dwell. 

N'n^'7  Dura,  a  plain  in  Babylonia, 
ban.  3:  1. 

UJI'T  <o  tread  underfoot,  trample  upon ; 
to  crush. 

fin^l'7   f.   Dec.   VIII.   a.   concubine. 

Comp.  Ar.  V.^u>  subegitfeminam. 

bri'T  to  fear.     It  refers  both  to  rever- 

eiice  toward  God,  and  to  dread,  as 

of  an  enemy,  etc.  Pa.  ^ih^  to  ter- 

nfy- 

^\^.1  ^'  I^^^'  VIII.  a.  fear;  terror. 

pii'?  to  press,  urge. 

'1  ='7  which  see ;  also  as  a  disjunc- 
tivej  but ;  it  is  sometimes  redun- 
dant like  the  Greek  on  in  the  be- 
ginning of  an  address,  as  Dan.  2: 
25. 

Ti'T  and  b"'?  signs  of  the  Genitive 
case,   contracted  from  T  ""T   and 

Yi,  J-  q-  1=i'7 ,  q-  V. 

I'l'sT  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  judgment ;  justice,  i 
righteousness ;   judicial   tried ;    the 
reckoning  or  account,  giveri  by  men  j 


of  their  actions  in  the  day  of  judg- 
ment, Gen.  3:  18.  Pseudo-Jon. ; 
punishment. 

'I'^'T  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  judge. 

ti'll''!  m.  pi.  Dinaites,  one  of  the  na- 
tions which  settled  Samaria.  E'/:. 
4:9. 

"1^2  m.  Dec.  I.  an  inhabitant ;  a  so- 
journer, stranger. 

■i23^7  m.  Dec.  III.  c.  treading  under 
foot. 

^•t;  m.  ^fi  f.  and  ']3'7  c.  g.  demon, 
pron.  this. 

-)D'7  {Heb.  "nST,  Intr.  4.  note  2.)  to 
remember. 

•^1D'7  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  ram. 

mjV~i3~  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  and 

"inbl  m.  Dec.  1.  b.  record,  memorialy 
histoi-y. 

'^^db'n  or  -in^b'^'^  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  (Lat. 
delator,)  calumniator;  accuser. 

N^b'^^  adv.  that  not,  lest.   comp.  N'oK 

pW  to  burn,  intrans. 

CT  ni.  Dec.  II.  a.  blood. 

N:?3'7  to  resemble.  Pa.  id. ;  to  think. 

'^72i  to  sleep. 

1"!!'  V  "  ^^^^-  proii-  m.  this  ;  that. 

i<2'7  and  nil:  dem.  pr.  c.  g.  this ;  that. 

bN^:?  m.  pr.  n.  Daniel. 

H-^  <o  g"0  out,  be  extinguished. 

ppT  to  be  broken  in  pieces.  Aph.  p-^j* 
axid  in  the  biblical  Chaldee  p^j}  to 
break  in  pieces. 

*T7  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  age,  generation. 

"TIIT  ra.  Dec.  I.  b.  a  thistle. 

'»2JT'^"','7  m.  pr.  n.  Darius. 

5'-5'7  i.  q.  Heb.  2|T-lt ,  m.  Dec.  III.  a. 
and  S'TT'  Dec.  I.  a.  the  arm. 

rr^  f.  Dec.  I.  lair ;  decree  ;  purpose ; 
UTiba  DT  religion,  Dan.  6:  6. 

Nri/Tm.  Dec.  III.  h.  young  tender  herb. 

nnrTT  m.  pi. 'j''~i;2n'7  ,  jurisconsultus, 
a  person  skilled  in  law,  judge,  a  Per- 
sian word. 


n 


!l  interrogative  prefix,  as  in  Hebrew. 


1 


157 


y-lT 


Ntn  and  Mln  interj.  behold! 

'J'^ni'TrT  m.  pi.  minister  of  state,  a 

Persian  word. 
Urnri    (Gr.  ldiojTi]g,)  m.  Dec.  I.  a. 

a  low  person,  plebeian. — As  an  adj. 

low,  vulgar. 
tl'Tin  Pa.  to  tear  in  pieces ;  to  divide. 
C^Vl  m.  Dec.  1.  a.  piece,  fragment. 
'J'ln  i.  q.  'J'^ ;  adv.  then. 
Tin  Pa.  *T7!n  to  honor. 
Nl-',  riTtn    and  "^nri ,  <o  be.      Fut. 

Nin; ,  a'poc.  ■'r)';,  ""^rtn ,  "tin  ,  etc. 

Fut.  with  b  prefixed  drops  its  pre- 
fonnative  "^^  and  is  employed  in 
an  optative  or  subjunctive  sense  ; 
e.  g.  pMb. ,  that  they  might  be, 
Dan.  6:  2,  3.  See  Gram.  §  23, 
note,  and  §  50.  2. 
ti^n  pron.  pers. and  demonst. m.  he; 
this  ;  that. 

^nr;  flit,  ^n'^  <o  g-o. 

NTs  pron.  pers.  and  demonst.  f.  she ; 
it ;  this  ;  that. 

Vl'?^.  de™-  pron.  i.  q.  'J'^, ;  adv.  then. 

^""rr  adv.  andconj.o*;  asif.  ti^^'^H 
and  ii^lDTn  id. 

'b'D'^'n  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  temple;  palace. 

■j'^Tq'^r!,  see  "JON  . 

^Vin  to  ivalk.  Pael  and  Ithpaal,  id. 

^bn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  toll  paid  by  pas- 
sengers, verbal  from  ^bn  . 

t<Sbn  and  N'lsbn  adv.  hither. 

172"  and  i^'^iH  m.  pi.  pers.  pron.  3d 
pers.  they. 

M^jlari  or  ^''3'OtT;  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  chain 
for  the  neck'  or  arm.  Syr.  idem. 

yTi  adv.  i.  q.  "JN   ivhere'? 

"IT:  conj.  and  adv.  if;  sign  of  a  ques- 
tion {=Tj)  an,  num ;  'jn....')ri 
whether  ....or. 

!^Bri  to  turn.  Ithpe.  refl, 

SVllIj  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  thought,  mu- 
sing, cogitation. 

nii~;nri,  see  ans . 


1 


•J  conj.  fmrf;  but;  &c.  as  in  Hebrew. 


But  Vav  conversive  does  not  ap- 
pear in  Chaldee. 


T 


■J^T  to  buy ;  to  gain ;  Pa.  "JSl  to  sell ; 
ithpa.  'J3'7TN  to  be  sold;  to  be 
bought. 

TTIT  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  prudent,  cautious. 
Lit.  enlightened,  2d  part.  Peal  from 
•^mT  to  shine. 

'y\1  to  feed,  to  nourish.    Ittaph.  pass. 

2^nT  <o  tremble,  be  afraid. 

'VI  Aph.  T^TH  to  be  proud,  to  act 
proudly. 

I^T  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  splendor,  h-ightness. 
■^niVT  Dan.  4 :  33.  Ut.  his  splen- 
dors, i.  e.  the  bright  and  cheerful 
appearance  of  his  countenance. 

nl3T  to  be  clean,  pure ;  to  be  just,  in- 
nocent. 

T3T  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  and  IIDT  Dec. 
VIII.  c.  purity ;  justice ; '  right- 
eousness. 

^3T  ,  "^52  adj.  Dec.  VI.  pure,  inno- 
cent. 

ii:r>l  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  sweat. 

'jJa'T  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  time,  period  of 
time. 

■jTaj  Pa.  to  appoint,  prepare.  Ithpa. 
'}72"t;n  to  concert,  agree  together. 
Aph.  'I73Trr  idem,  Dan.  2:  9,  Ke- 
thib.     ■■'" 

■^IDT  m.  Doc.  I.  a.  music. 

'^TaT  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  singer,  musician. 

"jT  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  species,  sort. 

"I'^iJT  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  adv.  little, 
a  little. 

pyt  to  ci-y  out. 

pT  pT  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  spark. 

i^pT  to  elevate ;  to  suspend,  as  a  mal- 
efactor on  a  gallows  or  cross. 
fll  ni.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  girdle. 

JJ^T  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and 
■"i"")}  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  seed ;  posterity  ; 
family ;  plm:  families. 


!5in 


158 


Y^in 


n 


nbliri  f-  Dec.  VII.  a.  injury,  hurt. 

i'^atl  and  ;3'^3h  adj.  Dec.  I.  beloved. 

iiSh  Pa,  to  injure ;  to  destroy,  waste, 
overthroiv.  Itlipa.  to  be  destroyed. 

b^n  m.  pr.  n.  Abel. 

^ili  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and 

b^ti  "^'  Dec.  III.  a.  hwt,  injury. 

^5'i  aud  '^5d  ™'  Dec.  III.  a.  a  com- 
panion. 

'nah  to  associate,  unite;  to  put  to- 
gether, compose.  Ithpa.  to  associate 
themselves,  join  together. 

rrnSh  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  fern,  of  >^yn_ , 
female  companion. 

in  ,  in  pause  m  ,  fern.  N"!)!  ,  num. 
adj.  ojie ;  Jlrst ;  before  numerals, 
time,  times ;  e.g.  ^^  n^iUJ  Th  , 
seven  times  more  than,  lit.  seven 
times  above,  Dan.  3:  19. 

I.  Nin  adv.  once.  Nin3  together. 
i^^nb  very  much,  exceedingly. 

II.  aiU  to  rejoice,  be  joyfid.  Aph.  to 
cause  to  rejoice,  to  please,  gratify. 

nTiri.  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  joy,  gladness. 
pin  jn.  plur.  Dec.  II.  b.  breast, 
trm  adj.  Dec.  III.  a.  (i.  q.  Heb.  liinh) 

new. 
J^^n  and  ""^h  to  tell,  declai-e  ;  to  make 

manifest.  Aph.  idem. 
i'liTl  m.  Dec.  1  a.  and 
i^inh  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  guilt,   crime; 

debt. 
*1T  n  to  speak  in  enigmas ;  to  propose 

(a  riddle). 
J^Tnn  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  and 
''im  f-  Dec.  VII.  b.  a  riddle,  an  enig- 
ma. 
rt^h  f.  pr.  n.  Eve. 
D^h    to  seiv.  Aph.  to  repair;   e.  g. 

a  wall,  Ez.  4: 12. 
^pin  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  a  staff,    a  rod. 
ti'^'in  and  i<''Th  m.  irreg.  PL  TT^rt ; 

a  serpent. 
bihand  bit!  adj.  Dec.  1.  ti. profane; 

common. 
N^bl  n  m.  emph.  (found  only  in  this 


form  and  with  sufT.  >'^y>^  H) ;  siveel- 

ness. 
^=1  h  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  ivhite. 
■JSUJin  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  and 
13U3n  n  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  act  of  thinking ; 

reckoning ;  account. 
NTn  to  see. 
IIU   m.  Dec.  III.  c.  vision  ;    aspect, 

appearance. 
nrn   f  Dec.  VII.  c.  and  TTn  Dec. 

VIII.  c.  (with  FUiT.   nriTTn'  Dan. 

4:  8.)  idem. 

Nt2h  m.  (pi.  ]"'NDh ,  const.  \s:ah , 

with  suff.  ^^Un  ,  ^iS'^iXton  ,  a  sin. 

NDn  to  err,  to  sin. 

tlNtan  f.  Dec.  IX.  a  sin-offering. 

P]1t2n  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  violence  ;  plun- 
der, rapine. 

tDt^n  to  sew.  Pa.  ide^n. 

■^h  adj.  Dec.  IV.  a.  living. 

^in  ^"d  '^'^D  ^'^  ^^^^-  Aph.  part. 
atjlo  preserving  alive. 

NT^n  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  beast,  animal. 

'Ji'^h  pi.  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  (But  Q'^'^h  and 
"'I'ln  occur  instead  of  the  regular 
absolute  form.)  life. 

b'^.^I  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  strength ;  a  host. 

l3'^3h  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  wise ;  as  a  noun, 
wise  man,  magian. 

fiSn  and  Pael  Cl3h.  ^^^  tS'^Sn  to  be 
ivise ;  to  understand. 

Nttpn  or  N723nri  (pron.  hhukhma,) 
f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  ivisdom. 

^bn  and  ■'b'.n  adj.  Dec.  III.  sweet. 

Db.n  rii'  Dec.  III.  c.  a  dream. 

P]bn  to  change  ;  to  be  changed;  to 
pass  through ;  to  pass,  spoken  of 
time. 

Fjbn  ,  F|bn  ,  (in  the  Jerusalem  dia- 
lect Plibn  and  Pjbitl)  prep,  in- 
stectd  of. 

pbn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  part,  lot. 

Dh  m.  a  father-in-law,  irreg.   with 

"suff.  ni  72n ,  ^^an . 

iiJ2ri  to  contemplate ;  to  see. 

N73n  and  NttH  f  Dec.  VIII.  a.  heat; 

anger. 
yall  to  vex ;  to  grieve. 


niD 


159 


"1^ 


'l^n  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  ivine. 

'{"'ili^rt  m.  pi.  wheat. 

Ir52:n  f-  Dec.  VII.  a.  dedication,  con- 
secration. 

"jan  to  compassionate,  shoio  favor  to. 
Itlipa.  to  pray,  make  supplication. 

'I'^&h  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  defective. 

"jOn  and  Aph.  ]DhN  to  possess,  to 
have  in  possession. 

"jDh  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  power,  might. 

p]Dn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  clay;  patterns 
iv'ork. 

*lDn  to  be  deficient  or  lacking.  Pa.  to 
diminish ;  to  depress. 

"I^n  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  harvest. 

V\'4U  ^^^  Aph.  to  urge,  hasten.  Part. 
Aph.  Jjl^iin^  urgent,  hasty. 

^(5n  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  afield. 

S~^n  f.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  sword. 

"J''"2i;:"jh  111.  pi.  Dec.  IV.  c.  divin- 
ers,'Magians,    from    the    Persian 

C  ^  y  C  y 

(-\A/COy.^ ,  a  ivise  man ;  or  from 
Heb.  I3~l.ri ,  persons  skilled  in  hie- 
roglyphics. 

*^"in  to  singe,  burn.  Ithpa.  Pass. 

ynn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  loin,  thigh. 

S*nn  ^9  burn  ;  to  be  hot. 

^"ilin  to  think;  to  reckon  to  the  account 
of  any  one,  to  impute.  Pa.  to  regard. 
Ithpa.  pass. 

^T>2;n  111.  Dec.  I.  a.  darkness. 

^idH  and  ^"^Ipn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  poor, 
indigent. 

ri'iJn  to  think  necessdry,  with  ^  and 
Iiif. ;  to  be  necessary. 

"^'•ijUto  be  thin ;  to  make  thin  or  small ; 
to' crush.    Pa.  idem. 

finn  <o  seal. 

UNO  to  he  glad,  joyful. 

nu  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fern,  i^yo  Dec.  VII. 
a.  good ;   beautiful. 

T['3.'0  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  executioner,  armed 
attendant. 

12113  ni.  Dec.  I.  a.  goodness,  excel- 
lence ;   happiness. 


^Tt3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  mountain  ;  a  rock. 
Ileb.  -)ilS  . 

nip  vn\].  fasting.  Ar.  (j^^  to  fast. 

b'l3  Pa.  to  go  out;  to  ivalk  abroad. 
Palpel  bpbtD  to  cast  out;  to  re- 
move. 

'I'^'O  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  clay. 

^13  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  dew. 

■^^tD  m.  irreg.  emph.  iJt'^blD ;  pkir. 
i'ib'q ,  "^^ibx^  ;  emph.  N^^p , 
•'NVd;  with  suff.  •'i-iba  Gen.  22: 
3.  Pseudo-Jon. ;    a  boy,  a  servant. 

bVu  to  hide.  Aph.  to  recline  for  rest 
under  the  shade. 

pbu  to  throw  away. 

"1726  and  Pa.  I72t3  to  hide.  Ithpe. 
lia^N  and  ^^p'^N  ,  and  Ithpa. 
l73t3N ,  to  hide  one's  self. 

H"'Q  to  err,  to  wander.  Aph.  to  cause 
to  err,  to  seduce. 

'D^'O  to  taste ;  to  eat.  Pa.  to  give  to 
eat,  to  feed. 

tiyq  and  Qyp  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  taste, 
iparticularly  pleasant  taste ;  wisdom, 
Dan.  2:  14.  ;  command,  edict ;  cause 
for  trial,  Ez.  5:  5. ;  reckoning,  ac- 
count.,  Dan.  6:  3 ;  regard,  respect ; 
by  tjyp  mil) ,  to  regard,  Dan.  3: 
12.  Dy.b  bya  ,  chancellor,  lit.  mas- 
ter of  decrees.' 

I.  ^SD  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  nail,  of  a  hu- 
man finger  or  toe  ;  claw. 

II.  "iDu?  ill.  Dec.  III.  emph.  N'n«D>lt3, 
the  blatta,  a  shell-fish  of  a  purple 
colour. 

TlU  to  expel,  drive  out. 

V\'y6  m,  Dec.  III.  a.  a  leaf. 

fi<;;V3"il3m.plur.  emph.  proper  name 
of  a  nation  settled  in  Samaria,  or- 
igin unknown,  Ez.  4:  9.  LXX. 
TagcpuXaloi,. 


'b'2^  Aph.  bii^J7.  to  bring. 
n'>p3''  f.  Dec.  III.  c.  the  dry  land. 
T'  f.  a  hand,  irreg.  Emph.  NT)  and 
with  N  prosthetic  N'l'JN  ,  with  suff. 


np"^ 


160 


?= 


•jiriT' ,  "jin'^T' ;  (dual  -j^T^ ;)  plur. 

Nn-;  Aph.  Part,  ii'li'm^  and  N'lia 

praying,  praising. 
2'T'  <o  ^7iou) ;    to  understand.   Aph. 

2' IT  In  <o  shew,  declare,  make  known. 
^•1?  to  give;  hence  to  set,  place.  Ith- 

p'e.  pass, ;  to  be  given  up. 
^^!-I^  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  the  Jewish  people, 

the  Jews. 
^Tin"*  m.  proper  name,  Judah. 

''I^^l  "^-  ^^^-  ^^'  ^  '^^^'^-  P^-  emph. 

KV  ^  ^  • 

Si'i  mi'.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  day.  PI.  const, 
fena.  DQi"^  and  masc.  "•Jo";  . 

pp/l"^  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  sucking  child, 
suckling. 

PjDT"'  m.  proper  name,  Joseph. 

'^'I'ih;'  Dec.  I.  or  Wn"*^"!  adj.  Dec. 
VI.  only,  alone. 

ia*^  Fut.  ntp/^l'.  to  be  good;  to  seem 
good,  h'S,  to  any  one,  to  be  pleasing. 

■''1  an  abbreviation.     See  Chrestoma- 

"thy  p.  132. 

VS^  and  b^'l' ,  Fut.  b^^*;  (and  like 
"the  Heb.  '^5:1^  Jud.  14:  13.)  to  be 
able ;  to  prevail. 

^h"^  to  bea7;  bring  forth;  sometimes 
to  beget. 

D"^  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  a  sen,  the  sea. 

pjO*]  to  add.  Hoph.  Heb.  form,  PjCIM 
to  be  added. 

Dy  to  advise,  counsel.  Part,  a  coun- 
sellor.    Ithpa.  to  consult  together. 

ipy^  iP-  proper  name,  Jacob. 

nsr.  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  proper  name, 
Japheth. 

NiT"^  Shaphel  Ni:''^  and  '>:i'^u3  to  fin- 
ish. 

iiS"'  to  be  certain,  true.  Pa.  to  tell  the 
truth. 

i'^iS'^  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  true,  certain ;  con- 
firmed, valid,  i'^it^  ^Q  certainly, 
of  a  truth. 

^P"^  to  burn  (neut.),  be  consumed. 
Aph.  to  burn  (act.),  consume. 

Jinp^  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  burning. 


I'^PU  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  hard,  difficult ; 

honored,  honorable,  noble. 
^p"^  to  be  or  he  esteemed  honorable  or 

valuable  ;    i.  q.  Pa.  to  honor.    Aph. 

idem. 
*^p")  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  honor  ;   splendor  ; 

glory.     Sometimes  it  has  N  pros- 
thetic. 
d">">IJTT'  and  d^.tli!)"!''  Jerusalem. 
Y^'^1  m.  Dec.  Ill,  a.  month. 
rjll  f.  Dec.  III.  a.  pi.  ]D'^2  j  ^^^S^- 
biNlilJ")  m.  proper  name,  Israel;  the 

people  of  Israel, 
a^^  in  Peal  not  used.  Aph.  D'^'iJitt 

to  stretch  forth,  reach  out. 
n"* ,  Heb.  riN  ,  sign  of  the  Objective 

or  Accusative  case, 
^n**   or  IT)"'  to  sit;  to  reside,  stay. 

Aph.    IT] Tin   to  place,    cause   to 

dwell. 
^Tl"*  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  abundant,  great^ 

eminent;    adv.  T'n]]   and    N'J'^n^J 

very,  exceedingly. 
'^n"'  to  revnain,  be  left.    Pa.  "^nl  to 

make   to   abound,    to  cause  abun- 
dance. 


3    prep,    and    conj.;    like;    as,   as 

though. 
SN3 ,  niS3 ,  S''3  and  13  m.  Dec.  I. 

a."  grief  sorrow. 
nns   adj.    Dec.  III.    b.    (i.  q.   Heb. 

ST3 ,)  false. 
■jinS',^  113  and  nnS   adv.   (=Heb. 

N3)  now.  'J^nsn  nmv  therefore. 

•j-ins  adv.  so,  thus,  x^^p;^  id.  "jinSI 

nolo  therefore. 
!-i3  adv.  now.  n3  n^  hitherto. 
bn3  to  be  able.  Const,  with  ^   and 

'inf 
13  f.  Dec.  IV.  a.  loindow. 
'j'^ni  3  (only  in,  pi.)    m.  Dec.  I.   a. 

thorns. 
1313,    (sometimes  AVi-itten   1313,) 

m,  Dec.  II.  a.  a  star. 
■313  Pa.  to  confirm ,  establish;  to  make 


n&s 


161 


n^ 


vigorous  efforts.  Ithpa.  pass. ;  also, 
as  Pa,  to  endeavour  earnestly. 

*li3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  cor,  a  measure  for 
things  liquid  or  dry,  equal  to  the 
homer  or  to  ten  ephahs,  supposed 
to  contain  about  eight  bushels. 

"133  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  talent. 

^•3-3  Kethib  Ez.  7:  22.  idem. 

y3,"i:3,  ^«y^,  i<>5.,  "'V.'i^,  adj.= 

Heb.  ^3 ,  all,  the  whole,  every. 

I.  bb3  Shaph.  bbS"*y  to  complete,  Jin- 
ish.  Ishtaph.  bb^rnpN  pass. 

II.  ^Vs  and  Aph.  bbpN  to  crown ; 
met.  to  adorn. 

N733  ,  n703  and  "'733  conj.  and  adv. 
hotv  !  quam  !  as  ;  ~i  ^123  like. 

■jS ,  y3  adv.  rightly;  thus.  "jlDS 
then  ;  therefore  ;  thus. 

■JTjS  m.  pi.  with  fem.  form,  Dec. 
VII.  a.  colleagues.  LXX.  avvSov- 
Xoi. 

'^^^D  and  153  m.  Dec.  I.  a  harp. 
Gr.  XLVVQu,  Lat.  cinyra,  generally 
considered  to  have  been  a  plain- 
tive instrument. 

NttpS  adv.  i.  q.  ^S  thus. 

■J^iS  (Milel)  m.  proper  name,  Ca- 
naan. 

U^DS  to  collect,  act.  Ithpe.  to  assemble, 
to  meet. 

■^•753  m.  Dec.  VI.  i.  q.  ■''7iU3  a  Chal- 
dean. 

MD3  ,  mD3  and  •'DS  to  lie  hid,  to  he 
concealed.  Pa.  to  hide,  conceal ;  i.  q. 
Peal. 

p)l  &3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  afoeling  of  shame ; 
ignominy. 

f]D3  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  silver. 

■ji'S  adv.  noiv.  ]^S  "ly  wnh7  noif>. 

FjS  c.  g.  Dec.  IV.  a.  a  hollow;  the 
pcdm  of  the  hand  ;  the  sole  of  the 
foot. 

■JDS  fo  hunger.  Aph.  to  cause  or  suf- 
for  another  to  he  hungry. 

"^33  Pa.  to  wash  ;  to  purify  ceremo- 
nially ;  to  atone,  make  expiation. 

n£3  <o  hind.  Pa.  idem. 

21 


N"^  3  to  be  grieved.  Ithpe.  and  Ithpa. 

idem. 
Nb3*l3  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  mantle,  cloak. 
iT)3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  cherub. 
Til 3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  herald. 
TXZ  to  proclaim,  make  proclamation. 

Aph.  ide7n. 
fl*^.3  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  vineyard. 
NOT 3   m.  Dec.  V.  a.  a  throne.    PI. 

■'■711:3  m.  Dec.  VI.  pi.  n;','7^3  ,  a 
Chaldean  ;  as  astrology  flourished 
principally  in  Chaldea,  an  astrol- 
oger. 

"l"4J3  to  be  right;  to  be  Jit;  to  be 
agreeable,  to  please. 

T,IJ3  and  "iu33  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  II. 
a.  right;  just,  upright ;  Jit ;  legiti- 
mate. 

ir]3  to  write. 

anS  m.  Dec.  T.  a.  ivriting ;  prescrip- 
tion, limitation,  Ez.  7:  22. 

i»n3  and  ]rri3  m.  Dec.  III.  e.  a  wall. 


b 


):   prep,  as  in  Hebrew,  to;  for;  of; 

b  .  • . .  "I'^a  between — and. 
N?   adv.  not ;  nothing,  Dan.  4 :  32. 

H.'^pft  and  Mbn  nonne  ?  also,  ecce ! 

Zo/Gram.  §  68.  3. 
rri<b  and  ^a'^b  ,  see  N^}r  and  12>'»b, . 
!lb.  or  i3b  m.  i/^e  /ieff?-f,  irreg.  Emph. 

!S3b  ;  with  sufF.  "^Sb  ,  ^3b  ,  N23^, 

etc. ;    plur.  emph.   N^i^b ;    with 

suff.  •jirT'sb ,. 

"ii^lib  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  clothing  ;  a  gar- 
ment. 

■j'^^blab  f.  plur.  plants ;  Jlowers. 

'ij'^_  to  clothe  one's  self  Aph.  to 
clothe. 

]?jb  conj.  therefore,  with  prosthetic 
N  ,  l^ibN  ;  comp.  of  Nb  and  "jn  , 
except  (comp.  Lat.  nisi) ;  but,  sed. 

12 lb  1^0  curse. 

■^1^    m.  Dec.  VI.  a   Levite.     Plur. 

if'ib. 


b^i2 


162 


iibi2 


^n^lb  m.  a  sea-monster,  according  to 
Buxtorf,  the  a;rampns. 

nib  ]nep.  to  ;  toward  ;  with. 

1:''V  «i"l  ^^''t.  '"•  i""eg-  emph.  N^V"^V' 
plur.  "lib"*? ;  nisf/t^ 

n''b.  a  contraction  for  rT'i*  Nb  ,  there 
is  not ;  there  are  not. 

"Jirib  adv.  and  prep,  alone;  only; 
also.  It  is  strictly  a  noun,  loneli- 
ness ;  hence  with  S  ,  "'riiTinbs  , 
in  his  loneliness,  i.  e.  he  alone. 

fin':?  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  bread. 

nnb  m.  a  feast,  Dan.  5:  1. 

niiib  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  concubine. 

N72b  and  —Tab  (as  a  noun,  nothing,) 
adv.  not;  lest.  NTsb'^  that  not; 
lest,  f  ■•  ^ 

Ni'b  or  4<ii{b  to  labor,  toil ;  to  he  fa- 
tigued with  labor. 

n-ir  or  TN-^b:  ^-   J^^<^-  VI^-  ^-  ^«^or; 

labi'b  adv.  ybreuer. 

"Jiab  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  tongue. 


12 


a  and  before  gutturals  72 ,  prefix, 
i.  q.  the  sep.  prep,  "ja  . 

N73,  n73  or  -n73  (with  Dagesh  forte 
euphonic  in  the  first  letter  of  the 
next  word,)  interrog.  pron.  lohaf? 
It  is  sometimes  used  adverbially, 
how  ?  also  in  exclamations  how  ! 
quam !  iiJZ3  as ;  Iww  !  H'ob  and 
i<72b    vMther'?    whr)    "'T  N73  that 

XT  "^  •  T 

ivhich. 
^it73  fern.  num.  a  hundred.      Dual 

ynim  . 
'i')5.TN73  m.  dual,  scales,  balance. 
■1^N73  ,  more  common  orthography, 

-173  "'73.  ,  q.  V. 
'}i<73  and  173  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  vessel; 

an  instrument;  a  garment,  (=Heb. 

■jnnllTS    adj.    Dec.   I.    b.    shameful ; 

ashamed. 
y^273  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  fountain. 
rsbaa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  roll,  book. 


na73  Pa.  to  throw  down,  destroy.     '     s 

h5n73  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  an  altar. 

n-173  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  tax,  tribute.     By 

a  resolution  of  Dagesh  forte  into 

Nun,  it  is  sometimes  written  Ti'^zn, 

Ez.  4:  13. 
"11173  ni,  Dec.  I.  a.  residence. 
"'"I'O  Vn.  pr.  n.  Dec.  VI.   Media ;  a 

Mede. 
n^-'Ta  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  province ;  land, 

comiti-y. 
h^lTS  or  n:l^  m.  Dec.  II.  a.   the 

east,  (lit.  </je  ming-,  viz.  of  the  sun.) 
ti11T2  (found  only  in  this  form)  in- 

def.  pron.  any  thing. 
T173  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  dwelling,  residence, 

I'q.  -\il». 
tl73  see  N73  .' 

fT^-)T73  f  pr.  n.  Moriah,  a  hill  in  Je- 
rusalem. 
ni73  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  death;   a  deadly 

pestilence. 
m  73  or  n'^73  to  die. 
•jit73  ,  empli.  N;if 73 /oorf,-  sustenance. 
Nri73  and  nh73  to  strike;  to  wound.  Pa. 

Nh73  idem ;  also  to  restrain.  Ithpe. 

to  be  fastened  or  nailed,  Ez.  6:  11. 
i<t373   and  ntl73  to  come,  arrive;    to 

reach ;  with  b^ ,  to  come  upon,  be- 

fal ;  happen  to  a  person. 
Npbh73  f  Dec.  VIII.  a.   course    or 

class  of  the  priests  or  Levites. 
biDQ  prep,  on  account  of.  ~  blt373 

because,  since. 
bS"''3  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  food. 
'173'^ri  or  -I73i<73  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  ivord, 

speech;    command.     With   suff.   it 

is  sometimes  reciprocal,  like  the 

Heb.    "vUD?..     So  ;'^n  N-ia-ia    the 

Lord,  Jehovah. 
•jiQ  pi.  m.  irreg.,  emph.  N'^73 ,  const. 

^73  and  sometimes  "'73"'73,  water,  iva- 

ters. 
Tii'iTS  m.  Dec.  II.  a  verbal  from  'y^l , 

a  plain ,  a  valley. 
^D73   to    depress,    humble ;    to   crush. 

Pa.  idein. 
tib^  to  fill.  Ithpe.  pass. 
^i<b73  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  an  angel. 


D&53 


163 


2ni2 


il\J2  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  PI.  'j''>a  ,  word, 
speech  ;  thing. 

ribJZ  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  $aU. 

tlhfi  denom.  from  the  preceding,  (in 
tile  Tai'gums,  to  salt,  to  seaso7i  with 
salt,)  in  bibl.  Chaldee  only  Ez.  4: 
14.  Gesenius  renders  it  to  eat  salt. 
According  to  the  Hebrew  com- 
mentators, Buxtorf,  and  others,  the 
meaning  would  be  to  devastate,  de- 
stroy, derived  from  the  fact  that 
salt  land  is  generally  waste,  bar- 
ren; or  from  the  custom  of  so  wing 
the  site  of  adevastated  city  with  salt. 

^^73  or  '^12  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  king. 

^'r^  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  advice,  counsel. 

nS^^  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  queen. 

IS^b  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  a  kingdom;  do- 
minion, reign. 

^^^^  Pa.  to  speak. 

1^  and  I'a  interrog.  pron.  who7  tvhaf? 
■^^r  "J^  whoever. 

"J  73  prep,  yroffi;  of,  out  of ;  some  of , 
(comp.  the  French  du) ;  because 
of;  rather  than,  in  preference  to; 
after  an  adjective,  than. — "jQ  fre- 
quently takes  after  it  the  charac- 
teristic prefix  of  the  Gen.  or  Dat. 
case,  which  is  then  pleonastic ;  as 
rr^i'^^  ,  Gen.  49:  10,  i.  q.  n"'3a  ; 
-p^nj^b  p. ,  Gen.  3:  94.  Jer.  Targ. 
i.  q. 'i"'?3'lf5  ]73  . — "''7  ]^  because; 
since. — d"'2£;;""j  73  <ntZ?/.— t:t;p~]73 
idem.  With  suffixes  'j73  takes 
Dagesh  forte ;  as  "^373  . 

N373  to  number,  reckon.  Pa.  '^3.73  to 
constitute,  appoint. 

1^^:12  i.  q.  ST773  ,  q.  v. 

yfrb  m.  DecT  il.a.  verbal  from  »']';, 
(i.  q.  Heb.  y'773  ,  the  Dagesh  foi-te 
being  resolved  into  Nun.  y'373  al- 
so occurs  in  the  Targums,  e.  g. 
Jer.  3: 15.)  knoivledge,  intelligence; 
the  understanding,  the  mind. 

r!373  i.q.  N373  . 

In373  m.  Dec' I.  b.  rest;  quietness,  si- 
lence. 

Jlt1373  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  gift,  offering; 
trihxde. 

1^373  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  number. 

^33073  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  poverty,  want. 


N^73  c.  g.  irreg.  (with  suff.  ^^73  ,  pi. 
Y^^  oi'  H'? ,)  the  belly,  venter.  PI. 
idem. 

by73  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  (verbal  from  bb?. 
to  enter,)  setting  of  the  sun.  PI. 
idem. 

UJ'nS^  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  distinction ;  di- 
vision. 

i^73  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  planting. 

N1iL73  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  command,  i?i- 
jiinction. 

^5''':t73  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  middle,  midst. 

t]^-}2£73  pr.  n.  Egypt. 

Ui'jpig  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  sanctuary,  holy 
place. 

^^73  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and      ^g^.^ 

N"5.Q  111-  Dec.  II.  b.  ^oraTSyr.  and 
Arab.  idem. 

T^T2  to  rebel,  to  be  rebellious. 

Tl73  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  rebellious. 

T~TU  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  correction;  in- 
struction. 

QT"i73  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  height,  elevation. 

'0112  to  pluck  off. 

ni^73  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  oil. 

ri"';p73  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  (strictly  2d  Part, 
from  JT(2J73  to  anoint)  ;  anointed ; 
Messiah. 

^"IJ73  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  b.  skin. 

33'vI573  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  bed. 

']3",2373  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  dwelling;  atent. 

Nn\b73  m.  Dec.  V.  a.  (strictly  Inf. 
from  JinUJ)  a  resting. 

■'PT'^;U73  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  ajlute,mim- 
cal  'reed. 

Itlrfii'a  in  the  bibUcal  Chaldee,  i.  q. 

■^n'^TS  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  feast;  a  ban- 
quet. 

^Iin73  f  Dec.  V.  a,  desire ;  appetite. 

bri'3  to  compare  ;  to  use  similitudes. 
Heb.  ^'^12. 

bn73  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  parable,  simili- 
tude ;  a  sententious  remark,  a  pro- 
verb. 

'}Pi:n  m.  Dec.  1.  b.  and  "jriTS  Dec.  11. 
'a.  a  gift ;  a  reivard.  'nSN  1073  a 
gift  of  a  revmrd,  i.  e.  the  giving  of 
a  reward. 

J<:ri^  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  (fem.  of  the 
preceding,)  a  present,  gift. 


ni3 


164 


t)p3 


3 


N^3  Itlipa.  "^ainNfo  prophesy;  to  ut- 
ter (a  ])ropliecy). 

!1S<=1S3  f.  Dec.  Yll.  a.  prophecy ;  pre- 
diction. 

JlST^:  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  present,  gift ; 
coll.  gifts  ;  plur.  "J^3]a:  . 

ff^lS  and  N"':::  m.  irreg.' eihph.  N'Ij; 
plur.  pN"'5D ;  empb.  N^N"^a3  and 
^'''»23;  with  siifF.  l^i^^Z  ,  "^ni'nD  : 
a  prophet. 

ii'^'im  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  candlestick. 

153  to  flow. 

i;i;  prep,  over  against ;  tqivard. 

'{"''1:5;  (found  only  in  the  plui-.  abs.) 
streams,  rivers. 

TOD  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  brightness,  light, 
of  the  morning. 

li:j:  ,  T^53  and  Tt32  m.  Dec.  I,  a. 
leader,  chief,  prince. 

^"13  Ithpa.  In'^inN  to  he  willing;  to 
do  ivillingly ;  to  give  voluntarily. 
Inf.  mi'73nn  as  a  noun,  that  ivhich 
is  given  voluntarily,  a  free-will-of- 
fering. 

!^3T3  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  row  of  stones ; 
structure  ;  wall. 

nt}?  to  flee. 

yr:  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  in  the  biblical 
Chaldee  with  n  paragogic,  ti:'13 , 
sheath ;  hence  by  a  metaphor, 
hody,  q,  d.  sheath  of  the  soul. 

^in3  ra.  Dec.  I.  a.  light. 

^"I'^ris  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  illumination, 
wisdom. 

bt^^to  roar  ;  to  bellow ;  to  groan. 

^Jlb  to  shine  brightly.  Pa.  '-]nz  to  en- 
lighten.      Ithpa.  pass. 

"nn:  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  stream-. 

'^^V'toflee. 

hn3  to  rest ;  Aphel  h'^3N  to  cause  to 
rest^to  give  rest. 

1V32  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  and 

^^3  r.  Dec.  VII.  b.  a  dunghill. 

'5=13  in.  Dec.  I.  a.  afsh. 

"1=13  m.  Dee.  I.  a.flre. 


pT3  to  suffer  injury.  Aph.  pT3t<  or 
p33tl  to  injure. 

U3h3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  brass. 

n^3  to  descend,  go  doivn.  Aph. 
nhN ,  Fut.  nn^ ,  Imp.  nni<,  to 
bring  dotvn,  carry  down  ;  to  depos- 
it. Hoph.  nh3n  to  be  brought 
down,  deposed. 

~lit33  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an  observer,  one 
loho  keeps  (e.  g.  a  law.) 

5rt33  fo  lift  up,  elevate. 

"It33  fo  keep,  preserve  ;  to  observe,  re- 
gard. 

Wn''3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  sweet  odour, 
hence  an  acceptable  sacn/ice. 

D53  ,  033  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  iveallh  ; 
power,  strength,  of  body  or  mind. 
PI.  riches. 

n52  to  bite. 

"l!D3  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  leopard. 

1D3  to  take ;  to  receive. 

nC3  to  take  away,  remove ;  to  pull 
asunder.     Ithpe.  pass. 

^03  and  Pa.  to  pour  out ;  to  offer. 

'ioi  m.  Dec.  ill.  b.  libation,  drink- 
offering. 

pD3  <o  ascend.  Aph.  p'^Q'nto  take  up, 
cause  to  ascend.  Hoph.  pD!i  pass, 
of  Aph. 

bS3  Fut.  b?";  to  fall ;  to  fall  doivn  ; 
to  be  throivn  down  ;  to  fall  out,  hap- 
pen. 

pD3  to  go  out,  to  depaii ;  to  come 
forth. 

NJ^S3  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  expense,  cost. 

UiD3'or  u;C3   e.g.  Dec.  III.  a.  and 

NVUS3  f  bee.  Vll.  a.  life;  soul; 
self ;  a  living  being. 

2^3  ni.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  planting;  a 
plant. 

^3123  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  stre7igth,  solidi- 
ty, flrmriess. 

nil3  to  quarrel,  contend.  Pa.  id. 

nili  to  conquer,  surpass,  prevail  over, 
be  superior  to.  Ithpe.  Pa.  and  Ith- 
pa. idem. 

biC3  to  liberate,  deliver.     Aph.  idem. 

Np3  i.q. 

■'ps'adj.  Dec.  IV.  h.  pure. 

*ijp:  to  smite,  strike. 


or  THB 


b^o 


165 


Ithpa. 


NiDD  to  take;  to  take  away, 
to  rise  up  against,  with  by  • 

rTi:3  to  forget ;    Ithpe.  to  forget ;  to 
be  forgotten. 

Nttuiq  f.  Dec.  VII,  a.  hreath,  life. 

TiIJ:  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  an  eagle. 

■Jlnuia  m.  Dec.  I.  a,  letter,  public  let- 
ter. Persian. 

•jn:  fo  give.  Gram.  §  18.  note  2. 

"in 3  to  fall  off,  as  leaves  or  fruit, 
Aph.  to  shake  or  strip  off. 


NS2D  f.  Gr.  (jci^^mri,  samhuca,  a 
three-cornered  stringed  instru- 
ment, similar  to  the  harp. 

?5^  to  erect.  Poal,  to  he  erected. 

*l5^  to  hear,  sustain ;  to  expect,  Dan. 
7:  25. ;  to  consider ;  suppose ;  with 
2  J  to  hope  in. 

it3D  to  he  numerous  ;  to  he  increased. 
Aph.  to  cause  to  increase  ;  to  mul- 
tiply. 

lap  to  fall  prostrate,  to  worship,  con- 
strued with  ^ . 

p)13p  m.  Dec.  I.'  a.  affliction. 

N"^i5p  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  much ;   many. 

■JJp  m-  Dec.  III.  b.  deputy,  governor. 

•^55.  ^0  shut  up. 

ST'^iiTilD  f.  i.  q.  Greek  av^cpoovla,  a 
bag-pipe. 

PjlD  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an  end. 

p]TD  io  come  to  an  end,  to  be  fulfilled, 
spoken  of  a  prediction.  Aph.  to 
put  an  end  to  any  thing. 

Tl  D  to  recede ;  to  go  aside. 

IhlTD  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  perverseness ;  a 
cnme. 

Plhp  to  dnve  out,  expel. 

"ID 6  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  side  ;  extremity. 

"IJI'^D  m.  Dec.  II.  b.  the  moon. 

P]""p  and  ri'^C  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  i.  q.  P)iD  , 
an  end  J  extremity. 

bSD  to  understand.  Ithpa.  b^ripN  to 
look  at ;  to  reflect ;  to  consider ; 
const,  with  2  ,  mV,  etc. 


NIVEESITY 

Ithpa. 


Tip  to  t)-y,  prove, 
idem. 

bpD  adj.  Dec.  II.  a.  foolish,  univise. 

]nV30  or  "jnbpTD  adj.  Dec.  I.  b. 
intelligent ;  prudent. 

pbp  or  pbp  to  ascend,  go  up.  Pa. 
to  cause  to  ascend ;  to  take  away  ; 
to  destroy. 

5]'^V0  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  perverse. 

bN72D  ni.  pr.  n.  Sammael,  an  evil  an- 
gef,  sometimes  called  the  angel  of 
death,  and  sometimes,  prince  of  the 
air. 

^^p  to  sustain.  Ithpe.  passive. 

Nip'  to  hate. 

TH^-'^O  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  hatred. 

lyp  construed  with  b  ,  to  aid,  assist 
Pa.  idem. 

nyp  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  H'l^'O  or 
N-^yO  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  support; 
aid;  strength. 

^yp  (=Heb.  IPS)  to  visit;  to  in- 
spect. 

■^SD  and  *^CD  m.  Dec.  II.  a  scribe; 
a" learned  man.  The  emph.  form 
is  sometimes  wi-itten  Nipp  . 

*^Dp  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  hook. ' 

bS'^b  ni.  Dec.  I.  a.  Plur.  loide  ori- 
ental breeches. 

^p'^np  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  vanity ;  vacu- 
ity.' 

^"^D  m.  Dec.  II.  h.  prefect, president. 

"inp  Pa.  "iriD  to  hide,  to  conceal;  to 
destroy.  Compare  the  Greek  «qp«- 
vl^o),  which  has  both  these  senses. 


■ji^y  and  ]y  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  collective 
noun,  (i.  q.  Heb.  'JN^ ),  s/ieep, 
flocks. 

"I^y  to  make  ;  to  do,  perform  ;  to  ex- 
ercise (authority,  etc.) ;  to  till  (the 
ground);  Ithpe.  to  fee  made;  to 
take  place,  happen.  Ithpa.  idem. 

*liy  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  servant. 

MT'iy  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  ivork,  labour  • 
business. 

'^:33?  to  go  over ;  to  transgress.  Aph. 


n^i? 


166 


np:? 


to  send  over,  transmit ;  to  transgress. 

*i;iy  Dec.  III.  b.  that  which  is  beyond. 
J5<"lJl2  ^Sy  the  other  side  of  the 
Euphrates. 

15  prep,  and  conj.^o ;  until.  With  suf- 
fixes it  takes  a  plural  form.  ^^-"15 
while  ....  not,  before,  antequam. 

ai^  or  ril^  to  pass  away ;  with 
2  to  go  to,  come  npon ;  to  pass  away, 
he  abolished,  destroyed.  Aph.  to 
take  away  ;  to  depose. 

'^'nv  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  conception. 

"j^l;  m.  pr.  n.  Eden,  (pleasure). 

'}'73>  c.  g.  Dec.  I.  b.  time ;  a  year. 

"iaiy  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  labor,  work. 

Tiy  adverb,  yet,  further,  moreover. 
Sometimes  it  is  a  mere  expletive. 

N*''iy  and  N;*!?  f.  pi.  'J^]?,  iniquity, 
pei-verseness,  sin. 

t}\'\  5>  m.  Dec.  1.  a.  a  boy ;  a  young 
man. 

pT  5?  to  be  straitened,  to  be  in  difficulty, 
Aph.  p'^S'N  to  molest,  be  hostile; 
to  constrain. 

^iy  only  Dan.  2:  35.  chaff.  In  Syr. 
and  Ar.  idem. 

'J'li/'iy  m.  Dec.  II.  a.frmness,  strength. 

iXpTy  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  ring,  seal-ring. 

NIT?  m.  pr.  n.  Ezra. 

H'Oy  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  counsel,  ivisdom, 
K'"q.  Heb.  ^2:2?. 

b'^i; ,  i^'^^Z-i  -'^V^  ^"'i  '■'?^'3  adv. 
and  prep,  above.  "{Jo  b"^!;  idem. 

j^y  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  d.  an  eye  ;  a  foun- 
tain. In  the  latter  sense  the  plu- 
ral is  'JID'^y . 

■J'y  Pa.  denom.  to  look  at;  to  exam- 
ine ivith  care,  comp.  Eng.  to  eye. 

^■'y  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  loatcher,  a  name  of 
angels,  or  of  an  order  of  angels, 
Dan.  4: 10,  14,  20. 

by  prep,  upon ;  above  ;  concerning ; 
besides;  before;  against;  some- 
limes  for  bi<,  to,  toivard,  etc. — 
•:j  by  because. 

Nby  adv.  over,  above,  followed  by  "j^ 

tlby  f-  Dec.  VIII.  a.  burnt-offering. 
Plur.  -Jib?.. 

nVSJ  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  occasion ;  pretext. 


"^'ibS>   and  inb^y  or  ''Tby,   forms  of 

b'y.       "■ 

■''^y  adj.  Dec.   VI.    upper;   highest; 

^  emph.  riijby  the  Most  High. 
'ji'^i^y  m.  Dec.'l.  a.  the  Most  High. 

Plur.  excel.  ]'^3i'^'::y  idem. 
■'Iry  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  an  upper  chamber, 

a  lodging  chamber. 
'c?.  to  go  in,  enter ;  (of  the  sun)  to 

set.  Aph.  byin  and  by^Jj  to  bring 

in.  Hoph.  by!l  pass. 
Dby  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  and 
Dby  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  an  age;  eternity ; 

the  world.  Nioby-iy  or  NX3by~iy 

-  T  :iT         -  T  :-         - 

Jor  ever. 
•'^b?   "1-   Dec.   VI.  PI.  N^'.'aby   an 

Elamite. 
y^y  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  i.  q.  Heb.  y^2i: , 

a  rib ;  perhaps  a  tusk  Dan.  7:  5. 
Qy    c.  g.  a  people,   irreg.  sing,    hke 

Dec.   IV.  a.  plur.  ]'^:q^y,   emph. 

N'ja^oy. 

Qy  prep,  with ;  in.  Before  suff.  the 
t)  takes  Dagesh  forte ;    as  ''73y . 

P'^73y  and  p'^Qy  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  deep, 
unsearchable. 

b»y  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  b^?.  Dec.  III. 

a.  labor,  toil. 

^:gy  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  i.  q.  Heb.  '^7a^^  , 
ioool. 

In3y  to  answer ;  to  speak  in  conversa- 
tion, to  begin  to  speak. 

py  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  cloud. 

C):y  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  bough,  branch. 

UJ3y  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  mulct,  fine. 

np.y  ni.  Dec.  III.  b.  time. 

a&y  see  airy . 

pay  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  or  p^y  Dec.  III. 

b.  affair ;  business. 

"loy  m.  Dec.  III.  with  suff.  r7;;cy , 

branches,  foliage. 
'^^y  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  dust. 
i"^iy  part. adj.  Dec.  I.  ^.troubled,  sad. 
ipy  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  b.  the  heel, 

Heb.  lap  y  ;  an  end ;  a  reward,  Heb. 

'OpV  to  be  crooked ;  to  be  perverse.   Pa. 

to  make  crooked ;  to  pervert. 
'^py  to  root  out,pluck  up.  Ithpe.  pass. 


^b^ 


167 


ans 


^py  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  stock,  root. 

'^y'ni.  Dec.  I.  a.  enemy. 

an>  and  Pa.  any  to  mix.  Ithpa.  pass. 

T^y  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  imld  ass,  onager. 

mny  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  nakedness ; 
hence  dishonour. 

;t3~JJ•n^^  to  be  stripped,  rendered  na- 
ked. '  ' 

"^^2^5-15  adj.  Dec.  VI.  naked.  The 
forms  b"'U'-]^,  '^iXr'^a-jy,  and 
"^Nl:Tt2~iy  ai'e  less  frequent. 

f^ny  or  n^~iy  adj.  Dec.  I.  cumiing. 

bny^and  b"}?'  Dec.  I.  a.  and  "'bny 
Dec.  VI.  adj.  uncircumcised. 

sto ,  nijy  or  noy  m.  Dec  III.  b. 
an  herb  ;  coll.  herbs. 

l-jPS?  f.  N'-iipym.num.'adj.fe?!.  Plur. 
■J"^"!;:;?  twenty. 

D'iliy  and  n^'jjy  <o  fAtnA',  purpose. 

ny  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  i.  q.  npy. ,  <tme. 

I^ny  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  prepared^  ready ; 
about  to,futurus.  Prefixed  to  the 
Inf.  it  fonns  a  kind  of  Future 
tense. 

p^ny  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  ancient,  old. 

■^ny  to  be  rich.  Pa.  to  enrich. 


D 


^SD ,  '^5S  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  coipse. 

■Jhb^Sm.  Dec.  I.  b.  verbal  from  nbs  j 
service. 

C1D  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  the  mouth. 

'JTpTD  m.  Dec.  I.  b;  a  command,  pre- 
cept. 

i^Vis  m.  irreg.  const,  nhs  ,  pi-  lIl^Q  , 
governor  of  a  province. 

nhS  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  (lhl3  Dan.  2:  41.) 

'ilip.S   m.  Dec,  III.  a.  an  under-gar- 

ment,   perhaps    breeches.     Kethib 

Dan.  3:  21.  Tli'^CS  ,  idem. 
■'T?  (""IS  Gen.  3:  24.    Jer.  T.)  c.  g. 
/rmf,  ifreg.   Plur.   ■;''T'5 ,  DT"!?., 

wth  sufF.  ■'^-(S  Prov.  8:  19. 
3^3  to  divide. 
aSs  m-  Dec.  III.  a.  half. 
N3bs  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  division  or  class 

of  the  priests. 


C^bs  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  lin£n ;  a  piece  of 
linen. 

n be  to  serve  ;  to  ivorship  ;  to  cultivate 
(the  ground) ;  to  observe  or  keep  (a 
law.)  Compare  in  Latin  colo, 
which  has  all  these  significations. 

]r;b3  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  service,  ivorship 
"dfGod. 

^nu:bs  m.  Dec.  VI.  a  Philistine. 

pi3D  and  Pa.  p:S  to  afford  delight. 
Ithpa.  to  enjoy ;  to  feast  upon. 

D3  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  and  b.  a  part;  in 
relation  to  the  hand,  the  palm. 

■nUriDD  and  "iPp.DS  m.  Dec.  I.  a. 
generally  derived  from  the  Gr. 
\paXTi]q,  the  psaltery,  a  stringed  io- 
strumeut  like  the  harp.  But  Heng- 
stenberg  considers  it  a  kettle-shap- 
ed instrument ;  see  his  new  work 
on  the  authenticity  of  Daniel,  arti- 
cle Greek  words. 

1:722s  and  Pa.  "'SS  to  deliver ;  to  make 
free. 

nps  Pa.  to  command. 

^=l  ps  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  statute,  command- 

TttETlt 

bp?  ni.  Dec.  II.  (Gr.  §  32,  note  3.) 

iron. 

n~\3  to  flourish;  to  blossom. 

DnS  to  divide. 

D"13  pr.  n.  Persia;  the  Persians. 

■'DVs  m.  Dec.  VI.  emph.  J^^DTS 
Kethib.  Dan.  6:  29,  a  Persian. 

yns  to  render  (good  or  evil  to  any- 
one); to  reward.  Ithpe.  irfem  ;  to 
take  vengeance. 

pnc  to  redeem,  liberate;  hence  Dan. 
4:'  24,  to  expiate,  or  perhaps  rather 
to  dismiss. 

'■ii'^B  to  divide;  to  distinguish.  Pa. 
Part.  pass.  'CJ'lDa  Ez.  4 :  18.  dis- 
tinctly. 

]a^J-1S  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  copy. 

"O^B  to  extend,  reach  out. 

IT^S  to  interpret,  explain.  Pa.  idem. 

'-\iliB  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  interpretation, 
explanation. 

aans  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  delicacies,  rich 
food. 


biP 


1G8 


ntjp 


fiiinS  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  word;  edict;  Ut- 
ter;   thing,  matter,  like  the  Heb. 

Irins  /o  enlarge,  extend. 

hnD  to  open.    Ithpeel  and  Ithpsial, 

pass. 
■^ns  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  breadth,  width. 


NiJZ  to  be  willing  ;  to  acquiesce. 

ni  Nbl2   Hebrew  armies,  retained  in 

Chaldee  after  ^-^  and  "'n'bi*'. 
=lli£  f.  Dec.  VIIL  c.  business,  "affair. 

y-SJZ  to  ivet,  moisten.  Ithpa.  yaUSN 
pass. 

1^  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  side. — naa  on  the 
part  of. — T^b  against. 

N"1!£  only  Dan.  3:  14.  N'lJiSl  is  it 
your  purpose  ?  or  was  it  your  de- 
sign'} 

p'^'T'li  adj.  or  sub.  masc.  Dec.  I.  a. 
tighteous ;  a  righteous  mail. 

Np")5I  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  justice,  righ- 
teousness ;  alms-giving. 

^a^'rCZ  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  (n  in  otio,)  the 
neck. 

nVli  ,  ■^J.iS  Pa.  to  pray,  supplicate, 
invoke. 

hblt  to  prosper.  Aph.  hbit^  to  make 
pi-osperous,  promote  (a  person)  ;  to 
execute  prosperously ;  also  intrans. 
to  prosper,  be  successful ;  to  be  pro- 
moted. 

t35it  and  q1:2£  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  an  im- 
age, idol ;  form,  appearance. 

n^aiS  to  sprout,  germinate.  Aph.  to 
cause  to  sprout,  to  bring  forth. 

^i'it  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  gripf 

'n''D:£  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  he-goat. 

*1D!:£  c.  g,  Dec.  II.  a.  a  bird ;  a  spar- 
row. 

!]"'-)2£  or  ^"^-iSt  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  needy  ; 
construed  with  }:  ,  in  need  of. 


^i^p  and  Pa.  to  receive,  accept;   like 


5>QT1J,   to   listen   to,   comply   with. 
Ithpa.  pass. 

blaj?  and  ^lip  prep,  before;  over 
against,  opposite ;  because  of. 
With  suff:  nbnp ,  ry^ap  ,  etc.— 
'5R.^  tWem. — b5p.~''3  because  of; 
cony  because ;  therefore;  as. 

"lU'^'T'p  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  holy  ;  as  a  noun, 
saint ;  holy  being,  appUed  to  an- 
gels. 

Dnp  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  that  which  is  be- 
fore ;  former  time,  beginning  ;  the 
east. — 'y*'a'^0i)Z^,  (see  '^^12^  former- 
ly ;  in  front ;  toward  the  east,  on 
the  east  side. 

mj^  and  blp  prep,  before,  in  rela- 
tion to  place,  coram ;  in  relation  to 
time,  ante.  It  takes  suffixes  like 
plural  nouns ;  e.g.  ^'^^p^,,  '^Tl'v:i'^Ji . 
— ny  t3^p  antequam. — Q'lp  ]73  ot 
ten  i.  q.  "112  ;  sometimes  i.  q.  OTp^ 
simply. 

o^'lp  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  origin,  antiqui- 
ty.   DJ2^i>^  "i^  prep,  before. 

^iTS'lp  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  antiquity; 
meeting,  coining  together,  occursus. 

■'^np  adj.  Dec.  W.  first. 

UJ'lp  Pa.  to  sanctify,  consecrate,  set 
apart. 

\1;T^P  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  holiness,  sacred- 
ness. 

Dip  Fut.  tj'lp'^  to  rise  up,  to  stand. 
Pa.  t]]"_p  to  establish  ;  to  confirm  by 
an  oath ;  to  sivear ;  to  sustain. 
Aph.  D'lpN  and  Cpri ,  Fut.  tJip^ 
and  tl"'pn';',  Part.  t3''pn»  ,  to  set  up, 
e.  g.  a  statue,  an  image ;  to  appoint, 
e.  g.  a  governor.  Hoph.  D*^p.n  , 
S'^pin  ,  or  with  the  form  of  Aphel, 
tJ'^pn  Dan.  7:  4.   to  stand. 

"iSllpm.  Dec.  I.  b.  offering,  obla- 
tion ;  sacrifice,  victim. 

bUp  to  kill.  Pa.  idem,'m  reference  to 
the  destruction  of  inany.  So  in 
Syriac.     Ithpe.  aud  Ithpa.  pass. 

'iDp  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  knot ;  joint ; 
difficult  problem. 


inp 


169 


nni 


'oy_  (i.  q.  Heb.  yp_)  111.  Dec.  III.  d. 
summer. 

u''p  ni.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  covenant;  an 
edict,  decree. 

D^j5  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  estahlished,Jirm. 

"j^j?  m.  pr.  n,  Cain. 

Dhn'^15  Kethib  Dan.  3:5,  7,  etc.,  i.  q. 
Gr.  xl&uQig,  a  harp.  The  point- 
ing is  that  of  Oi"inp_  ,  q.  v. 

'^j"5  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  voice'.  PI.  V\p^  thun- 
ders ;  ]hp  voices. 

h'^'^Ji  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  light ;  quick ; 
adv.  a  little. 

1P73J?  and  littp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  gir- 
dle^ a  belt. 

"Jp,  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  a  nest,  a  hive. 

Njp  io  buy,  purchase. 

]|JjJ>  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  acquisition ;  pos- 
session, substance. 

fjiCp  to  be  angry,  to  be  in  a  rage. 

?|i:p  in.  Dec.  III.  anger,  ivrath. 

If^p  to  cut  off,  amputate;  to  kill. 
Ithpe.  pass. 

nilp  f.  Dec.  I.  b.  apart;  an  end. 

S<~lj7  <o  call ;  to  read. 

S'^p  ,  i"}p  and  Pa.  i'np  to  approach ; 
to  touch,  constrned  ^vith  3  ,  ^  ,  etc. 
to  bring,  to  offer.  Aph.  to  bring 
near;  to  offer. 

i'^p  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  loar,  contest. 

■^np    a    city,    irreg.    Emph.    N'^'np 

^^"^.li,  ^'^^■:")R)  N;":.pand  NnnTp; 

puw. rinp,rii''P  ^^^ 'ixTP' 

emph.  Nn;||'-i^p  . 

■J-^P  and  ]np  f.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  horn, 
V\\n:  ]"'j"}p ,  ]3np  and,  with 
Dual  form,  ]'';"ip  . 

ynp  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  piece,  frag- 
ment. 

DTCp  m.  irreg.  emph.  NU'^iJIp  truth. 
— Nt3Ti3Tp3  indeed;  iuterrog.  wi- 
dted) — DTvL'p  "JXD  truly,  certainly. 

n"4ip.  emph.  Nriiip  Dec.  III.  a.  a  bow ; 
the  rain-boio. 

Dinnp  (Keri  for  D-irT^p  ,  Dan.  3:  5, 
etc.  The  analogy  of  the  Greek 
xi&a^tc;  would  lead  us  to  point  the 
22 


latter  D"^n"'p .  The  Targums 
have  Dinnp  which  appears  to  be 
the  less  ancient  form.)  m.  Dec.  I. 
a.  a  harp. 


TliN*}  and  •r'^'n  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  head ; 
sum,  amount.  Plur.  "j'^'lJi^n  ,  '}"'>p'^"], 
and  once  ]"^'ijit-)  Ez.  5:  10.  chiefs, 
principal  men. 

Sn  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  plur.  ■j"»n-iin 
Dec.  II.  a.  a  prince ;  as  an  adj. 
great;  plur.  proud,arroga7it  (speech- 
es, or  actions). 

ni")  to  be  great  or  numerous.  Pa.  '^3']] 
aiid  Aph.  "i2~\N  to  exalt,  set  in  an 
eminent  station ;  to  increase ;  to 
bring  forth  abundantly.  Ithpe.  and 
Ithpa.  to  be  exalted,  to  be  elevated. 

=111  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  greatness. 

13")  and  J<13"1  num.  adj.  ten  thou- 
sand, a  myriad.  Plur.  ]112"1  and 
■jni-) . 

"p3~l  m.  Dec.  h  a.  lord,  master. 

■'y"'!"^  num.  adj.  Dec.  VI.  fem. 
^ib;^^-)  fourth. 

■jl'^nn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  nobleman, 
prince. 

a^n  to  desire,  long  for.  Pa.  idem. 

T^"*]  to  be  moved,  excited;  to  be  angry. 
Aph.  to  excite  to  anger. 

Tan  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  anger. 

b:<")  and  b^i"?.  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  afoot. 
l3ual  and  plural  "("ib^T  . 

UJai  to  be  tumultuous.  Ithpe.  and  Ith- 
pa. idem  ;  to  rage  ;  to  roar.  Aph. 
to  rage  ;  to  collect  together  in  a  rage 
or  until  tumult. 

"ll  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  aspect,  appearance. 

T5i"1  m.  Dec.  III.  e.  anger. 

m"l  e.g.  Dec.  I.  a.  wind;  spirit. 

nn~l  to  be  high ;  to  be  exalted.  Palp. 
tJail  to  exalt, praise.  Aph.  to  lift 
up.  Ithpal.  to  lift  up  one^s  self 

cm  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  height. 

T1  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  secret. 

p^h"!  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  distant,  remote. 

t3ni  and  Pael  QH"!  ,  to  pity,  com- 
passionate ;  to  love. 


-IM 


170 


ait) 


nnn'^  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  love  ;  affection, 
friendship. 

■j^atin  (found  only  in  the  plural)  m. 
Dec.  III.  a.  mercy,  compassion. 

yrin  to  trust  in.  Ithpe.  construed 
With  by  ,  idem. 

UJ''l3"i  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  sent  away ;  de- 
serted. 

'n'^~\  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  scent,  smell. 

TZJ"'n  ,  see  UJNl . 

B^  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  high. 

ii')2~\  and  nQT  to  throw,  cast;  to  set, 
place ;  to  impose  (a  tax).  Ithpe. 
to  be  cast. 

'^iy'\  to  loink  significantly ;  to  beckon. 

•'ya-l  adj.  Dec.  V.  b.  and  Dec.  \l.de- 
ceitful. 

•J  2")  and  Pa.  to  sing  for  joy ;  to  speak 
joyfully. 

ns?-)  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  and 

t{1i"n  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  pleasure,  tvill ; 
benevolence ;  delight. 

'ji'^y-1  ni.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  thought. 

)z^'.hi  ^tlJ-  only  Dan.  4: 1,  [4:  4]flour- 
ishing. 

SS~\  and  Pa.  2.'2>-i  to  break  inpieces. 

DC"]  to  trample  upon,  tread  in  pieces. 

1UJ~)  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  permission  ;  lib- 
erty ;  power. 

^^UJn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  ivicked. 

tlU;"1  to  note,  ivrite  down;  to  write. 

^UJ-j  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  and  TyuJn  f. 
Dec.  VII.  c.  wickedness. 

i>»n"^n~)  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  verbal  from 
nri"i  ,  trembling. 

i'i)  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an  elder,  a  man  of 
grey  hairs. 

N:D2iy,  i.  q.  ND2D,  q.v. 

N^TL'  ,  i.  q.  N^p  ,  to  be  or  become  great. 

iX^i'g  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  great;  much, 
many  ;  adv.  very,  exceedingly. 

ti'^'O  to  set,  place  ;  to  appoint ;  to  is- 
sue (a  decree) ;  Cyq  QTil)  to  sheiv 
respect;  t3UJ  CViJ  to  give  a  name, 
to  name. 

•nUip  m.  Dec,  III.  b.  i.  q.  iDD  ^  side. 
"dnly  Dan.  7:  5.  Keri.       '  ' 


b^ip  Aph.  bSiZJiJ  to  understand;   to 
'  be  loise.     Ithpa.  const,  with  3  ,  to 

consider. 
^DnbptJ  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  intelligence^ 

understanding. 
m'yp  i.  q.  NjD  to  hate.     (In  Chaldee 

it  is  generally   written   with    D.) 

Part.  Npuj  an  enemy. 
^yiD  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  hair. 
nsib  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  (PL  -JICD  Dec. 

VIII.  c.)  a  lip. 


t) 


"bm:  ,  bNlb  or  "byip  to  ask,  seek,  re- 
quest, with  3  of  the  thing  asked, 
or  with  two"  accusatives ;  to  in- 
quire, with  i^  of  the  person. 

N^N'O  f.  Dec.  Vll.  a.  request ;  affair, 
concern,  matter. 

^^•^  Ithpe.  -iNP'iiJN  and  Ithpa. 
~lNn">i;N  to  be  left,  to  remain. 

~1J<TIJ  mi  Dec.  I,  b.  the  rest,  remain- 
der. 

I.  id  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  the  sabbath. 

II.  Id  (contracted  from  y^d)  num. 
adj.  seven. 

"ITnid  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  glory,  honor. 

nsd  Pa.  to  praise;  to  sing  praises. 
simply  to  sing. 

UlwJ  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  tribe. 

^''laUJ  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  fame. 

b'^laui  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  way,  path. 

■^jj'^iUJ  ord.  adj.  Dec.  VI.  seventh. 

2>5d  num.  adj.  seven.  See  Par.  XI. 
in  the  Gram. 

pid  to  forsake;  simply  <o  Zeave.  Ith- 
pe. pass. 

naUJ  to  err.  Aph.  to  entice  to  sin. 

bid  f.  pi.  'jb^d  and  ]b?d,  wife  of  a 
king ;  hence  queen,  Ps.  45:  10. 

b'nui  Pa.  to  persuade  ;  to  entice. 

I'l'd  Ithpa.  to  exert  one's  self. 

"'^d  Pae'l.  to  set,  place.  Ithpa.  to  be 
made,  to  become. 

■jUbTd  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  auihjority,  domin- 
ion. 

1DV>23  i.  q.  Dd  . 


GO 


171 


p25 


'IBIUJ  m.  Dec.  11.  a.  beauty.   Plur.  id. 

^Vii  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  wall. 

'pyp'yjji  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  friend;  a 
companion. 

M^^S-UJIU}  ni.  pi.  inhabitants  of  Susa, 
the  winter  residence  of  the  Per- 
sian kings. 

^Vili  and  S'^Pib  to  free,  deliver.  See 
Gram.  §  14.  2.  note. 

n'^Jl'iJ  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  corrupt,  loicked ; 
as  a  noun  ivickedness,  crime. 

nS'-iJ  to  discover ;  to  attain,  acquire. 
Aph.  idem.     Ithpe.  to  be  found. 

I'yD  to  dwell,  rest.  Pa.  "jSUi  to  cause 
to  divell.     Hence 

N3'^5"(P  f.  Dec.  VIl.  a.  dwelling,  pre- 
sence ;  the  divine  presence  and  glo- 
ry as  it  appeared  in  the  tabernacle. 

ilV'^  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  and 

•ibuj  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  something  amiss, 
an  error,  fault ;  a  failure. 

mb'vli  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  rest,  tranquillity. 

ll^Tl)  to  send  away;  to  put  off;  to 
stretch  out  (the  hand).  Pa.  and 
Aph.  idem.     Ithpe.  to  be  deprived. 

I.  tDbip  and  Vibjp  to  ride,  to  have  pow- 
er, construed'with  3  or  ):V.  Aph. 
to  cause  to  rule,  to  give  dominion. 

II.  lib'ip  const,  with  3,  to  fall  upon, 
attack. 

■jitiVii  m.  Dec.  I.  a.ruler,  governor. 

■jtDb'iJ  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  might,  power; 
dominion. 

ta'^buj  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  powerful,  hav- 
ing power,  const,  with  3  over  any 
thing ;  const,  with  b  and  an  Inf. 
permitted,  laioful ;  as  a  noun,  a 
powerful  man,  rider,  officer. 

DbilJ  to  complete.  Aph.  to  fnish,bnng 
to  an  end ;  to  restore,  give  back. 

fib  tJ  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  peace,  prosperity. 

n'Tablii  m.  pr.  n.  Solomon. 

r)^;ajb'43   f.   iiTeg.   plur.   •j'^^Tabia, 

•jbibb'"?? ,  Ijb^b^lJ  and  'jib'^ab'''??';  ^ 

chain. 
t*23  ,'DVii   and  CTZi  m.  irreg.  emph. 

"{HJZp  ;  with  suffi  n^/^j ,  'fTrtWIMJ ; 

plur.  ^trnp ,  const.  ritlJaUJ ,  etc.  a 

name. 
)a^  m.  pr.  n.  Shem. 


n)3'»lj  Aph.  to  destroy. 

)'n'^'^_  names,  pi.  of  Cr  q.  v. 

i<'?3\y  Plur.  emph.  heaven,  the  heav- 
^ens.  The  sing,  and  the  absol. 
plur.  are  wanting ;  const.  '''D'p. 

Uiy^i  Ithpolel  DTjin'IJN  iobe  astonish- 
ed, amazed. 

•jr);^  ,  N3'^72UJ  (see  Gr.  §  31.  note  2.) 
ad],  fat,  rich. 

SJy::  to  hear ;  to  obey.  Ithpe.  to  be 
heard  ;  to  show  one^s  self  obedient, 
to  be  obedient  or  submissive. 

]'^n?3T:J  i.  q.  Heb.  ■jinailj ,  Sainaria. 

12J73W  c.  g.  Dec.  HI.  b.  the  sun. 

vi;7iiu3  to  serve  ;  to  minister,  as  a.  priest, 
etc. 

■jTvli^TtU  m.  pr.  n.  Samson. 

yq  c.  g.  Dec.  IV.  b.  a  tooth.  The 
dual  form  ^^SUiis  used  for  the  plu- 
ral.    So  in  Hebrew  B'^3'»z3 . 

ND'^  Fut.  Tseri,  to  be  changed,  alter- 
^  ed ;  to  be  different.  Pa.  to  change ; 
to  violate,  transgress  ;  pass.  Part. 
diverse,  different.  Ithpa.  to  change  ; 
mtrans.  to  be  altered.  Aph.  i.  q. 
Pael. 

I.  1X3^'  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  sleep. 

II.  ^{D\2;  and  nsui  f.  irreg.  const.  n3Tp  ; 
emph.  Nri'ij ;  plur.  ym  ;  a  year ; 
collectively  in  the  singular,  years. 

yy^  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fem.  i<3''3U3  Dec. 
VII.  a.  sharp. 

•ji'tU  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  edge ;  point. 

NJ'iiJ  f  irreg.  emph.  Uny^  and  ^tWi  ; 
plur.  1"'^^  ;  an  hour ;  a  moment, 
any  short  period  of  time. 

Sl^iZJ  Ithpa.  ''iinUJN  to  narrate,  tell ; 
to  enumerate  ;  to  speak. 

DSUJ  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  judge. 

T^DUJ  or  T^C^  f  Dec.  VII.  c.  bruis- 
ing, trampling  underfoot ;  perhaps 
Gen.  3:  15  Pseudo-Jon.  and  Jer. 
Targ.  safety,  deliverance ;  or  rem- 
edy. 

bciU  Aph.  to  bring  down,  humble ;  to 
oppress,  subdue. 

bSTJJ  adj.  Dec.  III.  low. 

*1DT25  to  be  fair;  to  be  agreeable. 

pia  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  leg. 


pin 


172 


J^pn 


^2"^5\1J  m.  Dec.  I.  a,  dawn  of  the 
moniing. 

I.  N'n'kij ,  NT!)  and  tTTiT  ,  to  dwell; 
to  stop,  rest'.  A  ph.  to  caitse  to  divell 
or  remain. 

II.  ii~\-D  and  !Ti'i3  to  loosen;  Part. 
■j'^TUJ  loose,  at  liherty  ;  to  solve,  ex- 
plaiii.  Pa.  idem;  also  to  begin. 
Itlipa.  to  he  loosed,  spoken  of  tlie 
joints,  to  become  powerless. 

'i;~iirj  m.  Dec,  III.  e.  a  root. 

!)",lJnu3  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  and 

■'•^"lUJ  f.  Dec,  VII.  b.  eradication; 
met.  banishment. 

r"iJ  and  nUJ  num.  adj.  Dec.  IV.  b. 
six.  Pi.  'j-'n-vij  siz/j/, 

NP'iJ  and  TtTrp  to  drink.  Construed 
with  3  denoting  the  vessel  out  of 
which'  any  one  drinks.  The 
French  language  has  a  similar 
idiom,  boire  dans  une  tasse. 

Dri">lj  to  found ^  establish,  confirm. 
Aphel  idem. 

pn'ij  to  be  silent,  keep  silence. 


Ni>lNM ,    defectively    written ;     see 

NJ-^Nri  f.Dec.   VII.  a.  (PI.  'j-'rNPl 

c.  g.  Dec.  I.)  a  fig-tree  ;  a  fig. 
T^Sri  part.  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fragile, 

weak,  easy  to  be  broken. 
"li^  to  break,  to  break  in  pieces.     Pa. 

idem.  Ithpe.  and  Ithpa.  pass. 
'lan  m.   Dec.  III.  b.  and  N'napl  f. 

Dec.  VII.  a.  contention,  strife. 
^"^^1^  fem.  Dec.  VII.  a,  revolving 
in  a  circle  ;    hence,  continuance. — 

N'l'^'TJnS  constantly,  continually. 
ain  to  retwn  ;  to  txmi  aivuy,  to  avert. 

Aj)h.  to  return  (act.),  to  restore. 
rrlPl  to  be  astonished;    to  be  terrifi,ed, 

to  tremble  for  fear. 
NTb^n  f.  Dee.  VIII.  a.  a  generation; 

a  nation,  tribe. 
i^SjtOTni  f.  emph.  NnSJPp^n,  cause, 

occasion. 
;iji=in  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  strength,  might. 


■nnn,  i.  n.  Heb.  "niO,  m.  Dec.  I.  a. 
an  oz: 

Nri3"l3Tnf.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  praise;  a 
soiig  of  praise ;  any  so7ig. 

nihn  prep,  under.  It  takes  the  suf- 
fixes of  plural  nouns. 

Diin  idem. 

^{3^^{'^n  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  desire,  appe- 
tite. ' 

•J^n  Aph.  'Jl^^l^i  to  prepare. 

abn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  i.  q.  Heb.  iibv  . 
snow. 

'b'^'b'Pi  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  elevated;  forti- 
fied. 

n^n  f.  (masc.  nnbn ,  const,  m. 
rinbri ,  f.  ■'nbri)  ]  num.  adj.  three. 
Plur.'-J'^nbri,  ihii-ty. 

'•n'^bri  adj.  Dec.  VI.  third.  Once 
written  "^nbin  Dan.  5:  7. 

an  (i.  q.  Heb.'  t3'^),  ln?3n ,  and  iTSl^l 
adv.  there ;  thither.  Dna ,  ]J3n73 
thence. 

n^ri  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  wonder,  a  mir- 
acle. 

^y^OPl  f  Dec.  VII.  c.  perfection ;  in- 
tegrity. 

n2ttn  or  n:J3n  f.  pr.  n.  of  a  city  of 
the  Philistines,  Timnath. 

NDn  plur.  ]'':n  contracted  from 
"iia'^Nn  ,  etc.  q.  v. 

'{''Dn'^uum.  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  second. 

mS'^iPl  adv.  a  second  time,  again. 

Ml^nDD  m.  pi.  Dan.  3:  2,  3.  prob. 
judges    or   lawyers,   jurisconsuUi. 

Ar.  (^^^  to  give  counsel,  to  pass 
sentence  ;  hence  mufti. 

p]Tpn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  strength;  vehe- 
mence. 

rpln  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  right ;  fit,  conve- 
nient ;  firm. 

PT^pn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  strong,  mighty. 

Vpn'(i.  q.  Heb.  b^^)  to  weigh.  Pass. 
Praet.  to  be  weighed. 

■jsn  Pa.  to  adapt,  arrange ;  to  pre- 
pare; to  establish.  Aph.  idem. 
lloph.  to  be  reestablished,  restored. 

•jnn  adj.  Dec.  II.  a.  i.  q.  ppPi. 

p)pri  to  grow,  as  a  tree ;    to  become 


Vn 


173 


3?-in 


strong,  powerful.    Pa.  to   confirm, 

establish. 
i:\'pr\  and  7[pP\  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  power, 

authority. 
fi3_"in   quadr.    to  explain,    interpret. 

Part.  pass.  Ci3~inQ  interpreted. 
y^~\V\    num.  adj.    two;    both.      See 

Gram.  Par.   XL  and  §  42.  1.  a. 

note. 
^Di!'"'^nn  num.  adj.  twelve. 
^"in  and" Pa.  ^"iPi  to  expel,  drive  out. 


3>'in  and  Pa.  ynn  <o  break  asunder; 
to  destroy. 

y^n  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  b.  door ; — 
NbbQ  5''nn  the  kiiig^s  palace,  Dan. 
2:  49.  So  the  Turks  call  the  pal- 
ace of  the  Sultan  "sublime  porte," 
from  the  high  gate  which  leads 
to  the  seraglio  and  other  public 
buildings, 

yiFl  m.  Dec.  I.  "a.  porter,  watchman 
at  a  gate. 


APPENDIX  A. 


Rabbinic  character  and  style. 


§  1.  This  dialect  is  so  called  from  the  principal  writers  who  have 
employed  it,  viz.  the  Jewish  Rabbins.  Their  most  important  writings 
have  generally  had  respect,  either  to  the  Hebrew  language,  the  Scrip- 
tures of  the  Old  Testament,  or  to  the  traditions  which  constitute  the 
Oral  Law,  and  which  the  Jews  regard  as  of  equal  authority  with  the  Scrip- 
tures. These  writings  have  been  composed  in  various  ages,  chiefly 
since  the  eleventh  century  of  the  Christian  era.  Among  the  most  val- 
uable of  them  are  the  commentaries  of  Solomon  Jarchi,  Aben  Ezra  and 
David  Kimchi,  which  are  published,  with  others,  in  the  Hebrew  Rab- 
binic Bibles  of  Bomberg  and  Buxtorf.  That  of  Solomon  Jarchi  is  extant 
also  in  a  Latin  translation  published  by  J.  F.  Breithaupt,  (Gotha  1713 
3  vols,  small  4to.) 

For  a  general  account  of  Rabbinic  writers,  see  Bartolocci's  Biblio- 
theca  Rabbinica,  Wolfs  Bibliotheca  Hebraea,  Vols.  I  and  HI.,  and  the 
"  Vitae  Celebrium  Rabbinorum"  in  Reland's  Analecta  Rabbinica. 

<§,  2.  The  Rabbinic  resembles  the  ancient  Hebrew  more  nearly 
than  it  does  the  Chaldee,  although  Chaldee  forms  are  by  no  means  rare. 
The  following  are  the  principal  points,  in  respect  to  which  it  varies  from 
both  Hebrew  and  Chaldee. 

1.  Form  of  the  letters.  These  may  be  characterised  as  a  sort  of 
Hebrew  running  hand.     They  are  the  following. 


Rabbinic. 

b 

3 
J 

7 

1 
r 
n 


Hebrew. 

Rabbinic 

N 

S 

•  3 

D 

V 

% 

I 

) 

T 

D 

1 1 

V 

1 

^ 

D 

T 

T 

i 

n 

p 

12 

-) 

1 

T     3 

! 
i 

1 

Hebrew. 
D 

r  ^ 

p 

-I 
n 


176  APPENDIX    A. 

2.  Vowels.  The  Rabbinic  is  entirely  destitute  of  vowel-marks,  with 
the  exception  of  a  few  books  which  have  been  pointed  for  the  conve- 
nience of  learners.  (Cellarius  Inst.  Rab.  1. 1.)  What  vowels  are  to  be 
supplied  in  reading,  must  be  determined  by  a  knowledge  of  forms,  and 
by  the  sense  in  each  particular  case.  Where  however  ambiguity  would 
otherwise  exist,  the  letters  f),  1  and  ^  are  frequently  inserted  ;  b  in  such 
cases  indicating  the  a  sound  (Qamets  or  Pattahh),  1  the  o  or  m  sound 
(Ilholem,  Shureq,  dibbuts  or  Qamets  Hhateph),  and  '  the  e  or  i  sound 
(Tseri,  Seghol  or  Hhireq). 

3.  The  construct  state  of  nouns  often  appears  instead  of  the  abso- 
lute. 

4.  The  prefixes  7  (Chaldee)  and  C  (Hebrew,  for  iCf))  are  employ- 
ed almost  indiscriminately, 

5.  The  conjugation  Picl  is  distinguished,  by  the  insertion  of  Yodh 
between  the  first  and  second  radicals  ;  e.  g.  ")3'7  (="iz'7) ;  Ifophal,  by 
the  insertion  of  Vav  after  the  preformative  He  ;  e.  g.  "I3n0  (="i?Tin  or 
^Stin).    Compare  No.  2.  above. 

6.  From  Niphal  and  Hithpael  a  new  conjugation  is  formed  in 
Rabbinic,  called  NUhpael,  sometimes  reflexive,  but  generally  passive  in 
signification.  It  is  distinguished,  in  the  Praeter,  by  the  formative  pre- 
fix PD ;  elsewhere,  it  does  not  differ  inform  from  Hithpael. 

7.  Many  words  occur  in  Rabbinic,  which  are  not  found  in  Hebrew 
or  Chaldee.  They  are,  for  the  most  part,  theological  or  philosophical 
terms,  and  are  not  unfrequently  borrowed  from  foreign  languages,  es- 
pecially the  Greek  ;  e.  g.  JP^D,  i.  q.  ai]^i(7ov. 

8.  Abbreviations  abound.  These  are  fully  explained  by  Buxtorf 
in  his  treatise,  De  Abbreviaturis  Hebraicis.  Compare  also  Wolfs  Bib- 
liotheca  Hebraea  Vol.  IV.  p.  251. 

For  the  means  of  obtaining  a  complete  acquaintance  with  the  Rab- 
binic, the  reader  is  referred  to 

Reland's  Analecta  Rabbinica,  particularly  the  first  two  works  in 
that  collection,  viz.  Genebrard's  Isagoge  Rabbinica  and  Cellarius'  In- 
stitutio  Rabbinismi. 

Danzius'  Rabbinismus  Enucleatus. 

Opitius'  Chaldaismus. 

Otho's  Institutiones  Linguarum  Orientalium. 

Tychsen's  Elementa  Dialecti  Rabbinicae. 

Buxtorfs  Lexicon  Chaldaico-Talmudico-Rabbinicum. 

§3.  The  commentary  of  R.  David  Kimchi  on  Joel  3:  1,  2,  (Eng. 


APPENDIX   A.  177 

Ver.  2:  28,  2!)),  may  serve  as  a  specimen  of  this  dialect.  The  words  of 
the  prophet  arc 

->^'T  t]'«'iSi:r!-V5  C^T    nN^.^  ni:'^t^:  CD-^-iir:?  ]T72bt;!  niyorh  ^T'-p.X 

:'^^.=i-i-nf<  ^isT^N -7^n- £"'^"2  niM2-ii- 

COMMENTARY. 

i6unn  i3icn  tid  o  orid  v^v^t  bh)  )vir>  Ojid  ^jp^i  •  >:f)  bjSic^  3-)p3  ^d  orivT) 
fSpi  711)  ifjuDD  f)Si  Drk  0D^7^  ^nf)  "iuvpd  jrr  63^  nD>7>n  r6r  nnf)  bf)  kd^ 
h  hv  ^nn  iiDC^  :  [6^  o^up]  r^in^  rf)  r>vi  pf)n  of)!)P  ^d  ipf):c  n^cro  nn"'!) 
D7f)D  f)!)6  D^^n  >hvj  hh  r/f)i  11:3  b  •)vb  Dipr3  np6t;  ip!)  I)6-ic^3  nn^D    •  it;3 

D:)7  rn  60  "rni  •  [6*!)  '^p")^]  oinj  7n  Djuppb  ^nf)  id7>  dIjid  o  ivbt  ip3 
1*1$:;  nn  05^31  np3n  rn  '"id  dV^i  'n  nn  vii?  nroi  [6^  niDC]  ip6c  ip3  bcm 
•  if53:p^c  ID  -)}3iri  VD  DP5pP3  i3j^  obc  iD7rc  ^:dpi  •  m:i>  rf)-i^i  pr)7  nn  o-ii3Ji 
nC3  b  i)i?  -)Pf)  nnn  pid^dC31  .  DD^ri)3i  dd'')3  16331  656  i63:p>  dI)D  ^:5  -ip6  6!)  o 
oiiD  65  03mn3  D3^)pf  ip6i  .  dd^pi^si  03^53  163D1  6l)6  b  ip6  65  0613:3  536 
06i35n  D76S  6i3P  65  ^3  '5't  |1p"p  )3  dcp  ^3-)  3-)^  5i7JD  ddpd  3PDn  ■]-i7  5:;  6101 
i63)P'  Pi)30i  D^)3m  •  m^i^o  PW  r3U  l5  D7p  p  d6  656  pi7p5p  dv  '^d6i 
•PDinn  pipi5d  -)p6cipd  Di5nn  ri6nP3D05  ri^op  n6i3)rii  6^3:0  56ipc  ipd  DPni':)3 . 
v56  ri6-iP3  'c^  056^33  ovii  d6  [3'^  i37P3]  ■)p6c  ipd  •  D^6'3Dn  3n  P6133  dpo  pi 
71)  nsDC  D>6^3)3 1'Tic  )VD  ntp  n5DP5  nt  pi5dp  0:13  vn^  pi  .  13  -1376  Di5n3  d71p6 
pnD:o  ^P^  D760  Pi)C3  ic6  pi5pp  'j  i:;  ."^501  'o'p  1:^3-1  i^cp:)  d03  nin^  ^5i6c 
iD-ii  onr  17PD1  [6V'DC>]  -iP6t;  ipd  •  Dn3pri  5d  dji  :  Pi^pto  ^pm  pnn3D  ^pm 
56iD  p6  1731)^1 56ic^  p63  hpd^c  id5  dp"i6  dji  dd^pii^i  DDnD6  "iD)  ^d31  d3)65 
I^:dd  3n5  nn  d03  d\ipc  '5S  nno  pd^dc  j":di    •  5Dcrii  nD7  nn  dd5  o^dp 

.  D>51)pP1  jD  ni>D5c1T  3tV  5d1  717  P^3  5p  ^PIJDCI  ip6  jD     •  07>DCri 

Translation  of  the  commentary. 
15~"^"?.™  n;^") ,  as  if  he  had  said  t^^^tj  n"i-]nN2  T\17\\ ,  (Isa.  2: 
2.)  And  it  shall  come  to  pass  in  the  last  days.  He  employs  the  ex- 
pression ■)5~'^nnj<  ,  after  this,  because  he  had  said,  "  And  ye  shall 
know  that  I  am  in  the  midst  of  Israel."  His  meaning  was,^  Ye  shall 
know  now,  but  not  with  a  perfect  knowledge  ;  for,  as  yet,  ye  continue 
to  sin^  before  me.  But  after  this  knowledge,  the  time  will  come  when 
23 


178  ■  Al'I'KNDIX  A. 

ye  shall  know  me  with  a  perfect  knowledge,  and  shall  no  longer  sin,  viz. 
in  the  days  of  the  Messiah,  when  it  is  written^  that  the  earth  shall  be 
full  of  the  knowledge  of  the  Lord.  (Isa.  11:  9.) 

"  I  will  pour  out  my  Spirit  upon  all  flesh."  The  meaning  is,  upoti 
Israel;  as  it  is  written^  in  other  places,  alljlesh,  when  the  expression 
does  not  relate  to  all  beings  that  possess  life,  but  to  man  alone.  So  it 
is  written,^  "Let  all  flesh  bless,  etc."  (Ps.  145:  2L),  and,  "All  flesh 
shall  come,  etc."  (Isa.  66:  23.)  So,  in  a  restricted  sense,  here,  "all 
flesh"  relates  to  Israelites  fit  to  receive  the  Holy  Spirit. 

"  All,"  that  is,''  great  and  small;  as  it  is  written,^  "  For  they  shall 
all  know  me,  from  the  least  of  them,  unto  the  greatest  of  them,"  Jer. 
31:  34. 

"  My  Spirit,"  that  is,  the  spirit  of  knowledge  and  wisdom ;  as  it 
is  written,^  (Isa.  11:  2.)  "  The  Spirit  of  the  Lord''' shall  rest  upon  him," 
and  the  prophet  goes  on  to  explain,®  "  the  spirit  of  wisdom  and  under- 
standing, the  spirit  of  counsel  and  might,  the  spirit  of  knowledge  and 
of  the  fear  of  the  Lord." 

After  their  understanding  shall  have  been  purified,  the  power  of 
speech  in  some  of  them  shall  be  increased  until  they  shall  prophesy. 
For  he  says,  not,  "  They  shall  all  prophesy,"  but,  "  Your  sons  and 
your  daughters  shall  prophesy."  In  respect  to  the  effusion  of  the  Spi- 
rit, he  says,  "  upon  all  flesh  ;"  but  in  regard  to  prophecy,  he  says,  not 
all,  but,  "  And  yotir  sons  and  your  daughters  shall  prophesy."  So  he 
says,  "  your  old  men  and  your  young  men,"  not  all  of  them.  And  this 
accords  with  the  manner  in  which  that  wise  and  great  man,  R.  Moses 
Ben-Maimon,  of  blessed  memory,^  wrote.  "  The  gift  of  prophecy  (he 
says,)  is  not  conferred  upon  a  man,  even^°  with  instruction,  unless  na- 
ture prepared  it  for  him  at  the  time  of  his  birth." 

The  sons  and  the  daughters  shall  prophesy  in  their  youth,  like  Sam- 
uel the  prophet.  And  the  prophetic  revelations  shall  be  given  to  them 
in  seeing  dreams;  as  he  says,  "dreams,  visions."  And  such  was  the 
prophesying  of  most  of  the  prophets  ;  as  it  is  written,^  (Num.  12 :  6.), 
"  If  there  be  a  prophet  among  you,  I,  the  Lord,  will  make  myself  known 
to  him  in  a  vision,  and  will  speak  unto  him  in  a  dream."  So  also  there 
shall  be  degrees  among  them,  one  more  exalted  than  another,  as  there 
were  among  the  prophets  who  have  passed ;  until  perhaps  there  will 
be  among  them  one  equal  to  Moses  our  master,  (peace  be  upon  him).^^ 
And  observe,  he  mentions  three  degrees  which  [correspond]  to  the  ages 
of  man,  childhood,  youth,  and  old  age. 

"Also  upon  the  servants;"  as  it  is  written,"'' (Isa.  61:  5.),  "And 
strangers  shall  .stand  and  feed  your  flocks,  and  the  sons  of  the  alien  shall 
be  your  ploughmen  and  your  vine-dressers."     And  even  upon  them,  be- 


APPENDIX    B.  179 

cause  they  dwell  in  the  land  of  Israel  and  serve  Israel,  shall  be  the  spi- 
rit of  knowledge  and  understanding. 

The  expression  pouring  out  of  the  Spirit,  is  equivalent  to  saying, 
''  Tlie  Spirit  shall  be  upon  them  ahundnnthj ,'^  [so  as  to  be]  like  a  lite- 
ral pouring  out.  Thus  it  is  written,^  (Zech.  10:  12.),  "  And  I  will 
pour  upon  the  house  of  David,  and  upon  the  inhabitants  of  Jerusalem 
the  spirit  of  grace  and  of  supplications." 

J  Verse  27.  ^  lj^^  ;jg  g^^^  -,p<5  jg  y^s%d  with  very  great  latitude. 
See  below,  note  4.  ^  Lit.  ye  return  and  sin.  "*  ")Pf))d  ,  lit.  concei-n- 
ing  which  it  is  said,     t  Js  instead  of  iCf) .  ^  Compare  the  preceding 

note.  ^'h'l ,  au  abbreviation  for  "ipil)  DiT) ,  that  is  to  say.  "^  'o ,  ab- 

breviation of  DCD  ,  the  name,  i.  e.  Jehovah.  ^  Abbreviations.     Fully 

written  they  would  read  Ci^D  p  "infjl.  p  is  a  Rabbinic  particle,  equivalent 
to  the  Hebrew  ]3 .  Ci^D  is  Piel  (='^ns),  comp.  §  2.  5.  ^  'i  f ,  abbrevia- 
tion of  ODI^!)  1)n::!r.  ^^  '^d6i  ,  abbreviation  for  ib^Df)"!,  which  is  contracted  of 
the  two  particles  \h>f)  qf) ,  even  if.  ^^  'D  'd  ,  i.  e.  Dlbcn  V'hv.  So  the  Mo- 
hammedans say  whenever  they  repeat  the  name  of  their  prophet. 


APPENDIX  B. 

ON  THE  SVRIAC  LANGUAGE  NOW  SPOKEN  IN  THE  EAST. 

The  passage  on  page  12  respecting  the  existence  of  the  Chaldee  at 
the  present  day,  as  indeed  nearly  the  whole  of  the  Introduction,  was 
translated  directly  from  the  work  of  Prof  Winer.  After  it  was  in  type, 
it  was  suggested  to  the  translator  that  the  language  there  employed  might 
occasion  incorrect  impressions.  In  consequence  of  this  suggestion,  the 
reference  to  an  appendix  was  given. 

Remains  of  the  Syriac,  as  a  spoken  language,  unquestionably  exist 
in  the  East.  This  is  testified  by  various  travellers,  and  recently  by  the 
Rev.  Eli  Smith,  American  Missionary,  who  is  now  publishing  in  this 
country  the  results  of  an  exploring  tour  in  Armenia.  The  fact  that  the 
term  Chaldee  has  been  occasionally  employed,  in  relation  to  these  remains, 
has  perhaps  arisen  from  the  circumstance,  that  a  portion  of  the  nominal 
Christians  among  whom  they  are  found,  (viz.  those  who  acknowledge  the 
authority  of  the  see  of  Rome),  have  been  designated  as  the  Chaldean 
church  ;  or  perhaps  from  the  circumstance  that  these  Christians  reside 
in  the  region  of  the  ancient  Chaldea. 

Still  the  statements  on  p.  12  are  believed  to  be  correct,  so  far  as  the 
ancient   Chaldee  is  concerned.     Niebuhr  himself,  who  uses  the  term 


ISO  APPENDIX  B. 

Chaldee,  says ;  "  the  modern  Syriac  or  Chaldee  varies  from  the  lan- 
crnaae  in  whicli  the  church-books  are  written,  at  least  as  much  as  the 
modern  Arabic  from  the  ancient.  Those  Christians  who  are  connected, 
in  the  way  of  trade,  or  otlierwise,  with  foreigners,  speak  also  Kurdish, 
Turkish,  and  especially  Arabic.  Doubtless  also  many  words  from  these 
foreign  languages  exist  in  the  modern  Si/riac.  Reisebeschreibung, 
Vol.  II.  p.  352. 

Mr.  Smith's  "  Researches  in  Armenia,"  now  in  the  press,  will  con- 
tain statements  in  respect  to  a  body  of  Nestorians  whom  he  found  in 
Persia,  on  the  borders  of  Kurdistan,  and  who  speak  the  Syriac  lan- 
guage. 

I  have  the  pleasure  of  stating  also,  that  Mr.  Smith  is  expected  to 
prepare  an  article,  in  respect  to  this  subject,  for  the  Bil)lical  Reposi- 
tory. 


ERRATA. 
Page  12  line  20    for  csVw  read  B-^^Vw',  and  for  ^:3J53  read  Vita;; 
for  sa"!!  read  S5"^l  ,  S3  V,  ss-^l.. 
for  V^  read  ^3 
for  ^^hs.  read  ri^ 
for  ^rr^'/S  read  '^ri.'^s 

for  li^SSN  read  t|^>;"^'*  >  ^^'^  ^'°^  ^V.V^.'^  ^'^^^  "'^'^^IS!* 
for  Srt_  read  ns_ 
for  in'iVt3;iir}>3  read  TiiVuliritt 
from  the  bottom,  col.  2.  articie  omitted 
Ciaa  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  and  c.  body. 
col.  2.  for  rri  read  t^l 
from  the  bottom  col.  2.  for  -,r,V  read  ■]r.h 


29 

11 

46 

9 

47 

16 

49 

2 

51 

12 

52 

19 

87 

15 

155 

7 

160 

16 

161 

6 

14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 
This  booK  ^^  ^^  ^^^^  ^^  ^j^.^j^  renewed. 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recalL 


LD  21A-50w-12,'60 
(B6^21slO)476B 


General  Library    _ 
University  of  California 
Berkeley 


U,C   BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDsa]i^D5^5 


